Installation Provisioning Manual IPASOLINK EX Advanced Sept2016

GGS-000543-01E
June 2016
71-76/81-86 GHz
PACKET RADIO SYSTEM
iPASOLINK EX
Advanced
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
NEC Corporation
7-1, Shiba 5-Chome, Minato-Ku, Tokyo 108-8001, Japan
GENERAL -1-
iPASOLINK EX Advanced
SAFETY INFORMATION
The Safety Information provides precautions and directions to install, operate and
maintain the iPASOLINK EX Advanced (hereinafter iPASOLINK EX/A) safely. To
prevent the equipment from being damaged or causing bodily harm, please
familiarize yourself with the contents here in this document and in the instruction
manuals before installing/operating the equipment.
Following indications are used for admonishment:
GENERAL
Indicates an imminently hazardous

DANGER situation, which, if not avoided, will
result in death or serious injuries.
Indicates an imminently hazardous

situation, which, if not avoided, could
WARNING
result in serious injuries or physical
damages.
Indicates a potentially hazardous

situation, which, if not avoided, may
CAUTION result in minor or moderate injuries or
physical damages. It is also used to
alert against inappropriate practices
This system should be installed, powered on, operated

and maintained only by the appropriate service personnel
who is/are skilled enough to be aware of hazards to which
the personnel may be exposed during operation, and of
measures to minimize the risks to the personnel or others.
iPASOLINK EX Advanced: SAFETY INFORMATION GGS-000544-01E

-2- LABELS
LABELS
Marks of Cautions and Warnings printed on the equipment are shown below. In case
that these labels are out of sight due to the installed condition, please contact NEC.:
Risk of Electric Shock

The system uses a high voltage. Extra attention is required particularly in the
WET CONDITION in the outdoor environment.
Hot Surface. Do Not Touch

The surface of the equipment may be heated if it is in operation. Ensure
not to touch the equipment while it is in operation.
Non-Ionizing Radiation
Caution that the non-ionizing radiation from the equipment may affect
your health.
WEEE
Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment — The electrical and
electronic products with this mark are the subjects to follow WEEE.
Disposal of NEC equipment or any part of NEC equipment with this
mark should comply with regulations implemented by the local
authorities or the agreement with NEC.
China RoHS
Equipment with this mark is the subject to compliance with China RoHS
in terms of the environmental protection applied to the electrical and
electronic equipment.
Protective Earthing (Must Be Grounded)

Any device and equipment with this label must be connected to the ground
using its Grounding Terminal.
GGS-000544-01E iPASOLINK EX Advanced: SAFETY INFORMATION

WARNING -3-
WARNING
(1) Risk of Electric Shock
WARNING
(1) iPASOLINK EX/A is designated to use the –48 V DC

power at the outdoor environment. Due to the risk of
electric shock, particular attention should be paid in
wet condition that decreases the electric resistance.
(2) AC Power Module is designated to convert the 100-200

V AC power to –48 V DC power at the outdoor
environment. Due to the risk of electric shock,
particular attention should be paid in wet condition
that decreases the resistance.
(2) Microwave Radiation
WARNING
Do not enter the area in front of the antenna while
transmitter is activating. Power density of microwave or
millimeter-wave is high along the antenna beam. For
details, refer to the NOTICE and SAFETY GUIDELINE in this
document.

-4- WARNING
(3) Class1/1M Laser Product
WARNING
In a system using optical modules, do not stare at the laser
beams directly when using the optical instruments. or it
may cause damages to eyes and skin.

CAUTION -5-
CAUTION
(1) Lift with Care
CAUTION: HEAVY
Use Caution when Lifting: This equipment is heavier
than you expect. Ensure not to hurt yourself or the
equipment when lifting or transporting it.
(2) To Work in High Place
CAUTION
Take care not to drop the equipment, parts and/or tools
when working in a high place. Even a small part could
be a weapon (sometimes deadly), if it is fallen from the
high place. Ensure to take adequate measures, such as
restricting the area, to prevent an accident before
starting the high-place work.
(3) Supply Safety Extra Low Voltage
CAUTION
Use the Safety Extra Low Voltage (SELV) to supply the
–48 VDC power to the equipment.

-6- CAUTION
(4) Protect from Lightning
CAUTION
Place iPASOLINK EX/A within the area protected by
lightning rod. To avoid surge current caused by lightning,
from circulating within the equipment earth system, the
equipment earth system should be connected to the
ground of the lightning rod at the ground level.
(5) Do Not Touch Power Plug While in Service
CAUTION
While the equipment is powered on, do not even attempt
to disconnect/reconnect the power supply plug, or the
equipment and DC-DC CONV may be damaged.
(6) Use Circuit Breaker
CAUTION
iPASOLINK EX/A requires a circuit breaker or shut-off
function externally. The equipment does not provide a
power on/off switch. Place the equipment and a power
injector in position to shut the power of iPASOLINK EX/
A off safely just in case of emergency.

CAUTION -7-
(7) Using PoE
CAUTION
When iPASOLINK EX/A is powered via the PoE
Terminal, ensure not to disconnect the LAN Cable while
in service, or the equipment may be damaged.
CAUTION
iPASOLINK EX/A provides PoE (Power over Ethernet)
Port, which can enable either –48 VDC Power Port or
PoE Port but not both at a time. See NOTICE (POWER
SUPPLY AND CIRCUIT BREAKER) also.
(8) Use STP Cable for LAN Connection
CAUTION
Use STP (Shielded Twisted Pair) cables for LAN
connections. Using UTP (Unshielded Twisted Pair) cables
may result in damage to the equipment, causing the
failure. To enable the shielding effect for the radio
equipment and devices to which it is connected, ground
the equipment and connecting cables securely and
properly.

-8- CAUTION
(9) Do Not Use Cables Charged with Static Electricity
CAUTION
Do not use cables that are charged with static electricity.
If the charged cables are used for connecting to the
equipment, it may result in damage to the equipment.
Make sure that the cables are not charged with static
electricity before connecting them to the equipment.
(10) Quit Operation in Case of Emergency
CAUTION
In case of emergency, such as detecting unusual odor,
burning smells, smokes, or strange sounds, quit
operating the equipment immediately, and power it off. If
the equipment keeps operating in such condition, the
equipment may get damaged, generating an electric
shock, which should not be fixed or repaired by
customers.

CAUTION -9-
(11) Do Not Disassemble
CAUTION
Do not attempt to disassemble, modify, overhaul, or
repair the equipment by yourself, or it may damage the
equipment or may result in giving an electric shock.

- 10 - NOTICE (PLACING EQUIPMENT)
NOTICE (PLACING EQUIPMENT)

1. iPASOLINK EX/A generates non-ionizing radiation, and is designated for
the outdoor use. Installing the equipment indoors may cause bodily harm
nor inflict damage to objects, which needs to take the adequate measures, if
occurs.
2. iPASOLINK EX/A should be installed as follows:

 Verify that the equipment is installed in the appropriate site. Do not
install it on an unstable spot. Improper installation raises the
temperature inside the equipment, which may damage the
equipment.
 Accessing to the equipment should be limited only by the SERVICE
PERSONNEL or by USERS WHO ARE WELL TRAINED WITH
ENOUGH SKILLS AND KNOWLEDGES REGARDING THESE
RESTRICTIONS, PRECAUTIONS AND INSTALLATION SITES.
 Accessing to the equipment must be protected using a tool, locks,
keys, and/or other means of security, which should be managed by
the authority who is responsible for the installed site.
 The other end of the grounding cable connected to the ground
terminal should be connected to the station earth point. For details,
refer to the Installation Manual.
3. Precautions for Cables:

(a) POWER SUPPLY CABLES
Use two-core double insulated cable of 5.86 to 10.00 mm in diameter.
(b) DATA TRANSMISSION CABLES

Use shielded cables for the data transmission cables.
(c) GROUNDING
Ground Terminal should be connected to the station earth point. For
details, refer to the Grounding the Frame section in the Installation
manual.
4. Transmission quality degradation may temporarily occur due to the

electromagnetic disturbances, such as lightning or ESD.

NOTICE (POWER SUPPLY AND CIRCUIT BREAKER) - 11 -
NOTICE (POWER SUPPLY AND CIRCUIT BREAKER)

Since iPASOLINK EX/A itself does not have a power on/off switch, it requires a
circuit breaker or shut-off function externally. See the following for reference:
➀ Using DC IN (Power) Port ➁ Using AC Power Module
EX/A EX/A
DC –48V DC –48V
POWER CABLE
(2-Core Shielded Cable of
POWER CABLE 14 to 16 AWG)
(2-Core Shielded Cable of AC POWER
14 to 16 AWG) MODULE
AC POWER CABLE
AC 100 V to 240 V
EXTERNAL CIRCUIT BREAKER EXTERNAL CIRCUIT BREAKER
➁ Using LAN (PoE) Port
EX/A
PoE
LAN CABLE
Use STP (shielded twisted pair) cable.
POWER
INJECTOR
EXTERNAL
CIRCUIT
BREAKER
The cable should be shielded to keep operating in conformity with EMC standards.

- 12 - SAFETY GUIDELINE FOR USING HAZARDOUS MICROWAVE RADIATION
SAFETY GUIDELINE FOR USING HAZARDOUS MICROWAVE

RADIATION
The radiation levels of Microwave and Millimeter-Wave that iPASOLINK series deal
with are very low, and no health hazard has been reported for them so far. However,
advanced countries that care much about health hazard have started regulating the
radiation levels. For EU countries, it is specified by EN 62311 Annex A A.2. In order
to follow the regulation, operators should not work near the antenna if its transmitter
is activating. Especially, the radiation level of a specific area (X and Y shown in the
illustration below) in front of antenna is high.
See the following illustration and Calculation Examples 1 and 2:
Power density in front of the antenna turns high along the antenna beam. Ensure not
to allow yourself radiated by beams anytime.
Radiation Hazard Area
Y
Calculation Example 1 ANTENNA
SAFETY DISTANCE: X m –90 to +90

degrees
iPASOLINK EX/A
Calculation Example 2
SAFETY DISTANCE: Y m
The power density and field strength level can be obtained by the following
calculation formula:
P’ + G – 30 
P 10  10 
Power Density : S = (W/m2) = (mW/cm2)
4R2 40R 2
Where
P = Output Power (W),
P’ = Output Power (dBm),
G = Antenna Gain (dBi),
(in condition of angle and range from antenna)
R = Distance between human being and antenna (m)

SAFETY GUIDELINE FOR USING HAZARDOUS MICROWAVE RADIATION - 13 -
Safety distance should be calculated according to the conditions of installation site.

Following show the calculation examples:
 Calculation Example 1 (Front Side of Antenna)

 iPASOLINK EX = +18 dBm
 Antenna Diameter = 0.6 m
 Antenna Gain = 52 dBi
 Distance = 9.0 m
 Output Power Density : S = 0.982 mW/cm2  1 mW/cm2
Limit: Output Power Density S = 10 (W/m2) * = 1 (mW/cm2)

*: COUNCIL RECOMMENDATION (1999/519/EC) of 12 July 1999 on the
limitation of exposure of the general public to electromagnetic fields (0 Hz to 300 GHz)
 Calculation Example 2 (Rear Side of Antenna)

 iPASOLINK EX = +18 dBm
 Antenna Gain = –16 dBi
 Distance = 0.004 m = 4.0 mm

The safety distance that is obtained by the conditions above and is below the value
defined by COUNCIL RECOMMENDATIN (1999/519/EC) of 1 mW/cm² is:
 Front Side of Antenna (X)  9.0 m
 Rear Side of Antenna (Y)  0.004 m = 4.0 mm

GGS-000546-01E
June 2016
iPASOLINK EX
Advanced
INSTALLATION
NEC Corporation
CONTENTS –i–
iPASOLINK EX/A
INSTALLATION
CONTENTS
1. OVERVIEW 1-1
2. COMPOSITIONS 2-1
2.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

2.2 Power Supply and Circuit Breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.3 Available Systems and Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2.3.1 1+0 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2.4 Components Appearances. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2.4.1 iPASOLINK EX/A Main Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2.4.2 Power Injector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2.4.2.1 AC PSE Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2.4.2.2 DC PSE Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
2.4.3 Power Cable (SELV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
2.4.4 LAN Cable (Electric) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
2.4.5 LAN Cable (Optic) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
2.4.6 Grounding Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
2.4.7 Antenna and its Mounting Brackets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
3. UNPACK iPASOLINK EX/A 3-1
4. MOUNT iPASOLINK EX/A 4-1
4.1 For Placing Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

4.2 Mount iPASOLINK EX/A for 1+0 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
4.2.1 Set Antenna Brackets to Pole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
4.2.1.1 Polarization: Vertical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
iPASOLINK EX Advanced: INSTALLATION GGS-000546-01E

June 2016
– ii – CONTENTS
4.2.1.2 Polarization: Horizontal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

4.2.2 Secure iPASOLINK EX/A to Antenna Attachment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
4.3 Mount SFP Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
5. CONNECT CABLES 5-1
5.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

5.2 Connecting Terminals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
5.2.1 iPASOLINK EX/A (1+0 System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
5.3 Grounding Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
5.4 Power Cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
5.5 LAN Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
5.5.1 DCN (PoE) Port (RJ-45) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
5.5.2 P2/P3 Port (SFP+) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
5.6 Routing Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
5.6.1 Allowable Bending Radius of Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
5.6.2 Secure Cables (for 1+0 System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
5.7 Pin Assignment of Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
5.7.1 Summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
5.7.2 Power Port (SELV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
5.7.3 P1 Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
5.7.4 P2, P3 Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
5.8 Assemble Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
5.8.1 Grounding Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
5.8.1.1 Outlines of Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
5.8.1.2 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
5.8.2 Power Cable (2-Core Cable) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
5.8.2.1 Outlines of Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
5.8.2.2 Considering to Wear Waterproofing Plug Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
5.8.2.3 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
GGS-000546-01E iPASOLINK EX Advanced: INSTALLATION

CONTENTS – iii –
6. GROUND iPASOLINK EX/A 6-1
7. START UP AND SHUT DOWN 7-1
7.1 Start Up iPASOLINK EX/A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

7.2 Check Reception Level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
7.3 Shut Down iPASOLINK EX/A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
8. ADJUST ANTENNA ANGLE 8-1
8.1 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

8.2 Adjust Equipment Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
8.3 Adjust Antenna Angle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
8.4 Safety Guideline for Microwave Radiation Hazard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8

– iv/END – CONTENTS
This page is intentionally left blank.

OVERVIEW 1-1
1. OVERVIEW
The standard installation is summarized in this section. Following shows the typical
installation work flow and guides:
Figure 1-1 Installation Flow
Unpack iPASOLINK EX/A

(Section: 3. UNPACK iPASOLINK EX/A)
Mount iPASOLINK EX/A

(Section: 4. MOUNT iPASOLINK EX/A)
Connect Cables
(Section: 5. CONNECT CABLES)
Ground (Earth)
(Section: 6. GROUND iPASOLINK EX/A)
Start Up iPASOLINK EX/A

(Section: 7. START UP AND SHUT DOWN)
WebLCT should be operational here.

Refer to the Set Network & System Provisioning
manual.
Adjust Equipment Angle

(Section: 8. ADJUST ANTENNA ANGLE)

1-2/END OVERVIEW

COMPOSITIONS 2-1
2. COMPOSITIONS
2.1 Overview
Following shows the list of contents; iPASOLINK EX/A and its parts required to set
up iPASOLINK EX/A. Confirm them before starting the installation.
2.2 Power Supply and Circuit Breaker

Since iPASOLINK EX/A itself does not have a power on/off switch, it requires a
circuit breaker or shut-off function externally. See the following for reference.
 Normal Connection (to DC –48 V Port)
EX/A
DC –48V
POWER CABLE
(2-Core Shielded Cable of
14 to 16 AWG)
EXTERNAL CIRCUIT BREAKER

2-2 COMPOSITIONS
 Using AC Power Module
EX/A
POWER CABLE
DC –48V (2-Core Shielded Cable of 14 to 16 AWG)
AC POWER
MODULE
AC POWER CABLE AC 100 V to 240 V
EXTERNAL CIRCUIT BREAKER
 Using PoE Port

When using the PoE Port to supply the power, the –48 V DC Power Port must be
disabled. Select either –48 V DC Power Port or PoE Port but not both for the power
supply.
EX/A
LAN PoE Port
LAN CABLE
POWER
INJECTOR
EXTERNAL CIRCUIT BREAKERS

COMPOSITIONS 2-3
2.3 Available Systems and Components
2.3.1 1+0 System
CONTENTS QTY DESCRIPTION
iPASOLINK EX/A 1 TRP-80G10GB-1A: NWA-A01926

[2.4.1, Figure 2-1]
Power Injector 1 SELV NOTE PoE++:

AC PSE Unit: NWA-A00086 [2.4.2.1, Figure 2-2]
DC PSE Unit: NWA-A00087 [2.4.2.2, Figure 2-3]
Power Cable 1 SELV NOTE; Double-insulated; with Waterproofing Cap.

[2.4.3, Figure 2-4]
LAN Cables (Electric) 1 For P1 Port; RJ-45; Double-shielded; with Waterproofing Cap.
[2.4.4, Figure 2-5]
LAN Cables (Optic) 1 or 2 For P2 and P3 Ports; LC; with Waterproofing Cap.
[2.4.5, Figure 2-6]]
Grounding Cable 1 EX/A must be grounded. [2.4.6, Figure 2-7]
Antenna and its Mounting 1 [2.4.7, Figure 2-8]

Bracket
NOTE: SELV (Safety Extra Low Voltage).

2-4 COMPOSITIONS
2.4 Components Appearances
2.4.1 iPASOLINK EX/A Main Part
Figure 2-1 iPASOLINK EX/A (for 1+0 Configuration Only)
(PORT-SIDE VIEW)
(FRONT VIEW)
2.4.2 Power Injector
2.4.2.1 AC PSE Unit
Figure 2-2 AC PSE Unit
(NWA-A00086)

COMPOSITIONS 2-5
2.4.2.2 DC PSE Unit

NOTE: DC PSE Unit does not convert the voltage. That is, the power voltage
of the power source will be applied as it is to iPASOLINK EX/A. When
connecting the DC PSE Unit, ensure to sue the power source that
can supply the stable power.
Figure 2-3 DC PSE Unit
(NWA-A00087)
2.4.3 Power Cable (SELV)
Figure 2-4 Power Cable (SELV; Double-Insulated)
2.4.4 LAN Cable (Electric)
Figure 2-5 LAN Cable (Electric; Double-Shielded, with Waterproofing Cap)

2-6 COMPOSITIONS
2.4.5 LAN Cable (Optic)
Figure 2-6 LAN Cable (Optic) with Waterproofing Cap
2.4.6 Grounding Cable

Figure 2-7 Grounding Cable

COMPOSITIONS 2-7
2.4.7 Antenna and its Mounting Brackets
Figure 2-8 Antenna with its Mounting Brackets
ANTENNA
ANTENNA
ATTACHMENT
MOUNTING BRACKET (example: onto Pole)

2-8/END COMPOSITIONS

UNPACK iPASOLINK EX/A 3-1
3. UNPACK iPASOLINK EX/A
Following show the methods of unpacking iPASOLINK EX/A.
NOTE: Please keep the packing materials. If the equipment needs to be

transported,
1. Unpack the container box by opening its top cover:
CAUTION MARK
iPASOLINK EX Advanced INSTALLATION GGS-000546-01E

3-2/END UNPACK iPASOLINK EX/A
2. Unbox the contents. The contents are boxed as shown below:
TOP PAD
POLYETHYLENE SHEET
iPASOLINK EX/A
BOTTOM PAD
CONTAINER BOX
3. Remove the polyethylene sheet from iPASOLINK EX/A.

4. Inspect the iPASOLINK EX/A.
This step ends the procedure.
GGS-000546-01E iPASOLINK EX Advanced INSTALLATION

MOUNT iPASOLINK EX/A 4-1
4. MOUNT iPASOLINK EX/A
This section provides the installation procedures to mount iPASOLINK EX/A and its
Antenna onto a Pole. For the detailed descriptions for the Antenna Installation, see
the instruction manual attached to the Antenna.
Tools required for the installation are listed below.
Table 4-1 Tools
TOOLS
Wrench or Monkey Wrench
Screwdriver
Torque Wrench
4.1 For Placing Equipment

 NOTICE
1. iPASOLINK EX/A (equipment) generates non-ionizing radiation. Installing the
equipment indoors may affect, which needs to take the adequate measures,
if occurs.
2. The equipment should be installed in the appropriate site. Do not install it on
a slant or unstable spot. Improper installation raise the temperature inside the
equipment, which may damage the equipment.
3. iPASOLINK EX/A should be installed as follows.
 Accessing to the equipment is only by the SERVICE PERSONNEL or by

users who are WELL TRAINED WITH ENOUGH SKILLS AND
KNOWLEDGES regarding these restrictions, precautions and installation
sites.
 Accessing must be protected using a tool, locks, keys, and/or other means
of security, which should be managed by the authority who is responsible
for the installed site.
 The other end of the Grounding terminal should be connected to the

station earth point. For details, refer to 6. GROUND iPASOLINK EX/A
section.
Following show the methods of direct-mounting antenna. Depending on configuring

system, the mounting methods differ.
iPASOLINK EX Advanced:INSTALLATION GGS-000546-01E

4-2 MOUNT iPASOLINK EX/A
4.2 Mount iPASOLINK EX/A for 1+0 System
4.2.1 Set Antenna Brackets to Pole
Antenna Bracket’s position to the pole differ depending on the use of the equipment.
NOTE: iPASOLINK EX/A should be mounted as pointing its one of two

Polarization. The opposing-site iPASOLINK to which this iPASOLINK is
to be facing should point the same Polarization Label.
4.2.1.1 Polarization: Vertical
V mark is found on the grip. Place this V mark on top. For the Vertical Polarization,
either side to the pole is available to be mounted (no restrictions):
(mounted on the right to the pole)

(mounted on the left to the pole)
Figure 4-1 V-Polarization and Position to Install
GGS-000546-01E iPASOLINK EX Advanced:INSTALLATION

4.2.1.2 Polarization: Horizontal
H mark is found on the bottom left of the grip. To mount the equipment on left to the
pole, place the equipment showing its H mark on top. To mount the equipment on
right to the pole, place the equipment showing its H mark on bottom:
H
(to mount the equipment on left to the pole)
(to mount the equipment on right to the pole)
Figure 4-2 H-Polarization and Position to Install

4-4 MOUNT iPASOLINK EX/A
4.2.2 Secure iPASOLINK EX/A to Antenna Attachment
1. Using four M6 Screws, secure the iPASOLINK EX/A to the Antenna

Attachment:
NOTE: Tightening torque is 4.0 Nm ±10%
POLE
(50 ～ 115 mm;  2.0 ～ 4.5 inches)
Figure 4-3 Mount iPASOLINK EX/A (example: H Mark is on Top)

4.3 Mount SFP Module
ATTENTION!!
For the purpose of the use in iPASOLINK EX/A, it is recommended to use the SFPs
that are designated and supplied by NEC. NEC will not guarantee the
performances of iPASOLINK EX/A if other vendors’ SFP modules are installed.
PORTS FOR SFPs

(SFPs are mounted.)
The Small Form-Pluggable (SFP) is a compact and hot-pluggable transceiver

designated to support 10 Gigabit Ethernet (10GbE) and/or 1 Gigabit Ethernet (GbE)
in the iPASOLINK EX/A. The SFP on iPASOLINK EX/A offers the following:
1) Single Module Fiber (SMF): This SFP complies with 10GBASE-LR Ethernet
and 1000BASE-LX Ethernet. The SFP operates with the 1310 nm laser
transmitter and has a duplex LC connector.
2) Multi Mode Fiber (MMF): This SFP complies with 10GBASE-SR and
1000BASE-SX Ethernet interfaces. The SFP operates with the 850 nm laser
transmitter and has a duplex LC connector.
3) Electrical SFP (RJ-45): This SFP complies with 10/100/1000 BASE-T copper
interface.
The SFP Modules also accept LC Fiber Connectors with polished connector (LC-PC)
or ultra polished connector (LC-UPC).

4-6/END MOUNT iPASOLINK EX/A

CONNECT CABLES 5-1
5. CONNECT CABLES
5.1 Overview
This section provides the descriptions for connecting Traffic Cables and Power
Cable. This section also provides the assembly methods of the Grounding Cable and
Power cable for the purpose of preparing them on site if needed.
Following shows the summary of the cable installation:
1. Connect the Grounding Cable to Grounding Terminal on iPASOLINK EX/A. (See

6. GROUND iPASOLINK EX/A for detailed descriptions and steps.)
NOTE: Tightening torque is 2.7 ±0.3 N•m
2. Connect the Power Cable.

NOTE: This step is not required when using a PoE. Go to Step 3.
3. Connect a LAN Cable to DCN (PoE) Port.

NOTE: To use this port as the PoE, confirm that the power injector to be
connected is powered off. If it is powered on, connecting the LAN
cable to DCN (PoE) port immediately turns on the iPASOLINK EX/A.
(1) Connect a LAN Cable to DCN (PoE) Port on iPASOLINK EX/A.
(2) Connect the other end of LAN Cable:
 To use this port as PoE, connect it to the power injector.

 To operate WebLCT, connect it to your PC (web browser must be installed).
4. Connect LAN Cables to P2 and P3 Ports, as necessary.

5-2 CONNECT CABLES
5.2 Connecting Terminals

iPASOLINK EX/A has following terminals. Depending on its placing angle, these
terminals may be shown on bottom left.
5.2.1 iPASOLINK EX/A (1+0 System)

Figure 5-1 Terminals on iPASOLINK EX/A
➀
➆
➁ ➂ ➃ ➄ ➅
Table 5-1 Terminals on iPASOLINK EX/A
No. INDICATION PURPOSE
➀ Grounding Terminal (dia. 5 mm)
➁ DC –48V Power Supply (SELV)
➂ DCN (PoE) GbE; Power Supply by PoE (RJ-45); WebLCT or NMS Connecting Port
➃ P2 SFP+ (GbE/10GbE) Port
➄ P3 SFP+ (GbE/10GbE) Port
➅ MEM USB Memory Interface
➆ RSL Monitoring Port for RSL (Received Signal Level)

CONNECT CABLES 5-3
5.3 Grounding Cable

Following shows the location of Grounding terminal.
Figure 5-2 Connect Grounding Cable
example: mounted for V Polarization
GROUNDING TERMINAL (M5)
example: mounted for V Polarization
Detailed descriptions and routing methods are provided in the Section 6. GROUND
iPASOLINK EX/A.

5-4 CONNECT CABLES
5.4 Power Cable

Power Cable to connect with iPASOLINK EX/A requires the waterproof process on
its connection point. Following shows the connecting method of Power Cable and
waterproof cap:
 Reference
1. Uncover the Power Port (SELV):

(1) Protecting cap can be off by turning it counterclockwise.
Figure 5-3 Remove Protecting Cap on Power Port
(2) The removed cap should be stored properly.
2. Connect the Power Cable (SELV):

(1) Insert the Power Cable’s plug into the uncovered port.
Figure 5-4 Connecting a Plug

CONNECT CABLES 5-5
(2) Place and set the housing:
Figure 5-5 Place Housing

no gap
gasket is
seen
HOUSING
(3) Move the housing till the plug is fit in the shell..
Figure 5-6 Place Plug Shell
BARREL
HOUSING
BUSHING WITH RIB
GLAND NUT
(4) Push the Bushing into the barrel.
Figure 5-7 Set Bushing into Barrel
BARREL
RIB Check that the bushing

is fully inserted within
the barrel end.

5-6 CONNECT CABLES
3. Secure the Gland Nut:
Figure 5-8 Secure Bland Nut
GAP
CAUTION: In case using the thin cable, the Gland Nut may not stop and be secured at
the appropriate position if tightening it by force. Ensure that the barrel end does not
stick out of the gap at the Gland Nut end.

CONNECT CABLES 5-7
5.5 LAN Cables
5.5.1 DCN (PoE) Port (RJ-45)
A LAN Cable to connect with iPASOLINK EX/A requires the waterproof process on
its connection point. Following shows the connecting method of the LAN Cable
(Electric) and the waterproofing cap:
 Reference
1. Uncover the protected port. Waterproofing cap can be off by turning it counter-
clockwise.
Figure 5-9 Remove Waterproofing Cap from DCN (PoE) Port

5-8 CONNECT CABLES
2. Verify the connector shape of the RJ45 Port, then insert the plug of LAN Cable
with waterproofing cap.
Figure 5-10 Connect LAN Cable
(front side)
RJ45 PORT
Check the shape of connector

to insert the plug appropriately.
3. Place the housing over the RJ45 Connector, and engage it by turning it
clockwise:
Figure 5-11 Engage Housing
no gap
gasket is seen

CONNECT CABLES 5-9
4. Push the Bushing fully into the barrel:
BARREL
BUSHING
WITH RIB
RIB
(GLAND NUT) Check that the bushing is fully inserted
within the barrel end.
Figure 5-13 Set Waterproofing Cap (1/2)
5. Tighten the Gland Nut at the barrel end level, and secure them using the torque
wrench.
Figure 5-14 Secure Gland Nut
GLAND NUT
CAUTION: In case using the thin cable, the Gland Nut may not stop and be secured at
the appropriate position if tightening it by force. Ensure that the barrel end does not
stick out of the gap at the Gland Nut end.

5-10 CONNECT CABLES
5.5.2 P2/P3 Port (SFP+)
Each LAN cable to connect with iPASOLINK EX/A should wear a waterproofing
cap. Following shows the connecting method of LAN Cable with SFP+ and
waterproofing cap:
 Reference
1. Uncover the protected port. Waterproofing cap can be off by turning it counter-
clockwise.
Figure 5-15 Remove Waterproofing Cap

CONNECT CABLES 5-11
2. Insert the LC Connectors into the SFP+ Port:
Figure 5-16 Connect LAN Cable
3. Place the housing over the LC Connectors, and engage it by turning it

clockwise:Slide the waterproofing cap toward the port fully.
Figure 5-17 Engage Housing
HOUSING

5-12 CONNECT CABLES
4. Turn the waterproofing cap clockwise to lock the cap.
BARREL
BUSHING
WITH RIB
RIB
(GLAND NUT)
Check that the bushing is fully inserted

within the barrel end.
5. Tighten the Gland Nut at the barrel end level, and secure them using the torque
wrench.
Figure 5-19 Secure Gland Nut
 Go to 5.6 Routing Cables to end the Cable Connecting procedure.

CONNECT CABLES 5-13
5.6 Routing Cables
5.6.1 Allowable Bending Radius of Cables
Allowable bending radius of cables is 60 mm in diameter or greater.
Figure 5-20 Allowable Bending Radius of Cables
dia. 60 mm or greater

5-14 CONNECT CABLES
5.6.2 Secure Cables (for 1+0 System)
Secure the cables as shown below:
1. Tie cables.
2. Then secure tied cables onto the pole.
Figure 5-21 Secure Cables (1+0 System)
tie cables
secure them onto pole

CONNECT CABLES 5-15
5.7 Pin Assignment of Connectors
Following shows the pin assignment of connectors used by iPASOLINK EX/A.
5.7.1 Summary
5.7.2 Power Port (SELV)
5.7.3 P1 Port
5.7.4 P2, P3 Port
5.7.4 P2, P3 Port

5-16 CONNECT CABLES
5.7.2 Power Port (SELV)
 Indication: DC –48V
 Connector Type: molex® MEGA-FIT4P
Table 5-2 Pin Assignment of DC –48V Port (SELV)
DC –48 V [4-Pin]
1 2
3 4
PIN No. POWER PORT (SELV) ASSIGNMENT
1 Positive
2 Positive
3 Negative
4 Negative

CONNECT CABLES 5-17
5.7.3 P1 Port
 Indication: DCN (PoE)
 Connector Type: RJ-45
Table 5-3 Pin Assignment of DCN (PoE) Port
RJ-45
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
PIN No. PoE++ ASSIGNMENT
1 DA+ / Positive VPD, Negative VPD
2 DA / Positive VPD, Negative VPD
3 DB+ / Positive VPD, Negative VPD
4 DC+ / Positive VPD, Negative VPD
5 DC / Positive VPD, Negative VPD
6 DB / Positive VPD, Negative VPD
7 DD+ / Positive VPD, Negative VPD
8 DD / Positive VPD, Negative VPD
NOTE: Use 4-pair shielded cable of CAT5e or higher. The cable should be
shielded to keep operating in conformity with EMC standards.

5-18 CONNECT CABLES
5.7.4 P2, P3 Port
 Indication: P2, P3
 Port Type: SFP, SFP+ (LC Connector)
Table 5-4 Pin Assignment of P2/P3 Port
SFP/SFP++
1 2
PIN No. GbE/10GbE ASSIGNMENT
1 TX
2 RX

CONNECT CABLES 5-19
5.8 Assemble Cables
5.8.1 Grounding Cable
5.8.1.1 Outlines of Parts

Table 5-5 List of Applicable Cable
Parts Description
Grounding Cable AWG10

(IEC60204-1)
 Outer Color: Green and Yellow
Grounding Terminal Ring Terminal

(for M5 Screw Type)
Insulation Sleeve 5.0 mm
Hand Tools Screwdriver Flat-blade, Phillips-head
Crimping Tool ——
Wire Stripper, Wire

——
Cutter, etc.
5.8.1.2 Procedure
1. Cut the AWG10 cable to the appropriate length.
2. Strip approximately 7 mm of cable sheath from one end of each cable.
1~2 mm
CABLE SHEATH
(RING TERMINAL)
3. Slide the insulation sleeve onto the cable.

INSULATION SLEEVE
Slide

5-20 CONNECT CABLES
4. Apply the Crimp Ring to the cable end, and fasten it using a crimping tool.
crimp
1~2 mm
(EXPOSED WIRE STRANDS)
RING TERMINAL
(side view)
crimp
5. Slide insulation sleeve back to cover the root of crimp contact.
INSULATION SLEEVE
Slide back

CONNECT CABLES 5-21
5.8.2 Power Cable (2-Core Cable)

Two-core cable is used for the Power Port. To prepare the power cable on site, refer
to the following:
5.8.2.1 Outlines of Parts
Table 5-6 Parts List
Parts Description
Connector Housing 17692-0104
Contact(s) 172063-0311
Cable AWG14 to 2-Core Double Insulated Cable, 5.86 to 10.00 mm in diameter:

AWG16
Pin #1: Positive

Pin #3: Negative
Hand Crimping Tool 63825-7100
Waterproofing Plug ——
Cover

5-22 CONNECT CABLES
5.8.2.2 Considering to Wear Waterproofing Plug Cover

If the connector of the other end (at the power unit side) is larger than 14.5 mm in
diameter, and is already assembled, put the cable through the Waterproofing Plug
Cover and Watertight Hose through prior to starting the procedure below. See
5.4 Power Cable also.
 Plug Cover Mechanism:
1. Disassemble the Waterproofing Plug Cover.
2. Put the cable into and through the parts.

CONNECT CABLES 5-23
5.8.2.3 Procedure
1. Strip the cable jacket.
2. Remove the insulation to expose each conductor:
5.75 ±0.25 mm
NOTE: Ensure not to damage the braided wire.
• knife
Tools • cutter
• measuring tool, etc.
3. Set contact to each conductor.
4. Seal the crimp.

5-24/END CONNECT CABLES
5. Insert the both contacts into the connector housing.
NOTE: The drawings below put the connector housing upside down for some
reasons. Be sure to verify the orientation of completed connector
when connecting it to the equipment.
 Assemble 2-Core Cable:

#3
POWER CONNECTOR
HOUSING (REAR SIDE)
#1
 Wear Waterproofing Plug Cover if Prepared:

GROUND iPASOLINK EX/A 6-1
6. GROUND iPASOLINK EX/A
When mounting iPASOLINK EX/A, ground the equipment. Following shows the
method of grounding equipment.
Figure 6-1 Grounding Method (Example – 1/2)
LIGHTNING ROD PROTECTED AREA
GROUNDING TERMINAL 30° 30°

(on-site facility)
LAN CABLE
GROUNDING
iPASOLINK EX/A
WIRE
Use a copper grounding conductor

to ground the injector.
POWER SUPPLY UNIT
GROUNDING WIRE
This is the buried grounding wire.

This type of wire is naked (not
insulated), which is recommended.
GROUND LEVEL
(Grounding Resistance
should be less than 10 ohms)
Cautions
1. Ensure to install iPASOLINK EX/A within the area protected by lightning
rod.
2. To avoid surge currents caused by lightning circulating in the equipment
earth system, connect the equipment earth system to the ground of the
lightning rod at the ground level.
NOTES:
1. For grounding iPASOLINK EX/A, 5 mm square cable, which means
more than 2.5 mm diameter cable, of AWG #10 with an appropriate
crimping terminal should be used.
2. Screwing torque should be within 2.7 ± 0.3N•m.

6-2/END GROUND iPASOLINK EX/A
Figure 6-2 Grounding Method (Example – 2/2)
LIGHTNING ROD Tower

It lets through the center of the steel
tower as much as possible.
iPASOLINK
EX/A GROUNDING WIRE
POWER CABLE
GROUNDING TERMINAL
Grounding wire for iPASOLINK EX/A should be

GROUNDING WIRE connected to the nearest EP of the tower.
(away from tower)
Grounding Resistance EP
should be less than 10 Ohms)
GROUNDING WIRE*
(Grounding Resistance should be less than 10 ohms)
Let the cables run through inside of steel tower.
(Grounding Resistance of
Tower should be less than
10 ohms.)
POWER CABLE
This is the buried grounding

wire. This type of wire is
naked (not insulated),
which is recommended. GROUND
LEVEL
NOTES:
* NEC recommends that the equipment should be connected to earth line
as NEC’s standard installation.
EP Earth Ground Point of tower

START UP AND SHUT DOWN 7-1
7. START UP AND SHUT DOWN
7.1 Start Up iPASOLINK EX/A
CAUTIONS:
Equipment surface may be hot during the operation. Ensure not to
touch the equipment.
1. Verify that the power cable is properly connected:

 Using Power Cable (SELV): The power cable should be connected at
DC –48V Port.
 Using PoE Cable: The LAN cable should be connected at DCN (PoE)
Port.
2. SYSTEM LED (Green) starts blinking by turning on the equipment.
3. When the starting-up process is completed, the SYSTEM LED (Green)
stays on.
4. For the first time only, the equipment starts up disabling the radio output.
WARNING:
Once the equipment is powered on, wait at least 5 minutes before
turning its power off. Repeatedly turning the power on and off
within a short interval may cause the equipment failure.
7.2 Check Reception Level
Refer to 8. ADJUST ANTENNA ANGLE for checking the reception levels.

7-2/END START UP AND SHUT DOWN
7.3 Shut Down iPASOLINK EX/A
1. Powering off the power unit or power injector shuts down iPASOLINK EX/
A.
WARNING:
Disconnecting LAN Cable from DCN (PoE) Port while the equipment
is powered on may cause the equipment failure.

ADJUST ANTENNA ANGLE 8-1
8. ADJUST ANTENNA ANGLE
When the installation is completed, adjust the equipment angle following steps
shown below.
8.1 Precautions
1. Required Tools
 Digital Multimeter
 Test Leads
 WebLCT (PC)
2. Check the following:

Check the following before starting the procedures here.
 Cables are properly connected.
 Power is supplied to iPASOLINK EX/A (operational).
 PC with a web browser installed is connected.
8.2 Adjust Equipment Angle
1. Set TX Power Control:

(1) Launch WebLCT, and log in to the equipment.
(2) From the MENU pane, select Equipment Setup ➜ Radio

Configuration.
(3) Click Setup tool button to display Step 1 Detailed Radio
Configuration window.

8-2 ADJUST ANTENNA ANGLE
Figure 8-1 Radio Configuration
click
(4) At TX Power Control parameter, select MTPC if a different value is

selected.
Figure 8-2 Step 1 Detailed Equipment / Radio Setting Window

.
2. Repeat steps above at the opposing site.
3. Prepare to measure RX Level:

CAUTION:
Surface of iPASOLINK EX/A may be hot during the operation.
Ensure not to touch the equipment by mistake.
(1) Remove a protective cap from RSL terminal on iPASOLINK EX/A, and
connect it to a digital multimeter using the lead between.
(2) Monitor levels at both the local and opposing site, and fix the reception
level to its maximum by turning iPASOLINK EX/As up and down and/or
left to right.
NOTES:
1. RSL monitor conforms to IEC61169-24.
2. When the checks are done, put the waterproofing cap on to the RSL
terminal to protect it.
Figure 8-3 Example to Measure Levels for Fixing Angles
RSL TERMINAL
iPASOLINK EX/A
DIGITAL MULTIMETER
Following shows the relationship between RX INPUT LEVEL and RSL (V).

Figure 8-4 RSL and RX Input Level
RSL vs RX INPUT LEVEL (Typical)
4.5
3.5
3
RSL [V]
2.5
1.5
0.5
0
–80 –70 –60 –50 –40 –30 –20
RX INPUT LEVEL [dBm]

8.3 Adjust Antenna Angle

Figure 8-5 Shape Model of Beams
SECOND SIDE-LOBE
(if detected)
NULL
FIRST SIDE-LOBE
NULL
MAIN BEAM
(Target Voltage)
5°
Up/Down Adjustment
RX POWER LEVEL
Left/Right Adjustment
Figure 8-6 Fine Adjustment
MAIN BEAM
(Target Voltage)
RX Level
Figure 8-7 Possible Attempts before Fine Adjustment
Below Target Voltage CENTER

CENTER CENTER
CENTER (NO MAIN BEAM) (NO MAIN BEAM) (NO MAIN BEAM)
(NO MAIN BEAM)
Below
Target Voltage

1. Adjust the antenna angle — Left or Right:
Figure 8-8 Turn Antenna to Left or Right
(1) Loosen bolts

(3) Tightening Torque: 38 Nm ±5%
(2) Rotate bolt
(1) Loosen six bolts on top and bottom of the bracket.

(2) Rotate the bolt to turn the antenna to the left or right.
(3) Adjust and specify parameters for control items using WebLCT at both
opposing sites.
(4) When the left/right angle is adjusted, secure the six bolts back in place.

2. Adjust the antenna angle — Turn it up or down:
Figure 8-9 Turn Antenna Up or Down
(2) Rotate bolt

(1) Loosen bolts
(3) Tightening Torque: 38 Nm ±5%
(1) Loosen three bolts.

(2) Rotate the bolt to turn the antenna up and down.
(3) Adjust and specify parameters for control items using WebLCT at both
opposing sites.
(4) When the up/down angle is adjusted, secure the three bolts back in place
3. Release the system from Maintenance mode using WebLCT.
4. Disconnect the Multimeter from RSL terminal.
5. Put the protective cap back in place on RSL terminal of each station. This
terminal must be covered by the protective cap for waterproofing.
6. At each station, secure the Antenna by re-tightening bolts that have been
loosen in Step 2.

8.4 Safety Guideline for Microwave Radiation Hazard
The radiation levels of Microwave and Millimeter-Wave that iPASOLINK series deal
with are very low, and no health hazard has been reported for them so far. However,
advanced countries that care much about health hazard have started regulating the
radiation levels. For EU countries, it is specified by EN 62311 Annex A A.2. In order
to follow the regulation, operators should not work near the antenna if its transmitter
is activating. Especially, the radiation level of a specific area in front of antenna is
high.
See the following illustration and Calculation Examples 1 and 2:
Power density in front of the antenna turns high along the antenna beam. Ensure not
to allow yourself radiated by beams anytime.
Figure 8-10 Radiation Hazard Area
Calculation Example 1 Y
ANTENNA
SAFETY DISTANCE: X m
–90 to +90
degrees
iPASOLINK EX/A
Calculation Example 2
SAFETY DISTANCE: Y m
The power density and field strength level can be obtained by the following
calculation formula:
P’ + G – 30 
P 10  10 
Power Density : S = (W/m2) = (mW/cm2)
4R2 40R2
Where
P = Output Power (W),
P’ = Output Power (dBm),
G = Antenna Gain (dBi),
(in condition of angle and range from antenna)
R = Distance between human being and antenna (m)

Safety distance should be calculated according to the conditions of installation site.

Following show the calculation examples:
 Calculation Example 1 (Front Side of Antenna)

 iPASOLINK EX/A = +18 dBm
 Antenna Gain = 52 dBi
 Distance = 9.0 m

 Calculation Example 2 (Rear Side of Antenna)

 iPASOLINK EX/A = +18 dBm
 Antenna Gain = –16 dBi
 Distance = 0.004 m = 4.0 mm

The safety distance that is obtained by the conditions above and is below the value
defined by COUNCIL RECOMMENDATIN (1999/519/EC) of 1 mW/cm² is:
 Front Side of Antenna (X)  9.0 m
 Rear Side of Antenna (Y)  0.004 m = 4.0 mm

8-10/END ADJUST ANTENNA ANGLE

GGS-000547-01E
June 2016
iPASOLINK EX
Advanced
SET NETWORK AND
SYSTEM PROVISIONING
NEC Corporation
GGS-000547-01E
© 2016 by NEC Corporation
GGS-000547-01E
Printed in Japan
CONTENTS –i–
SET NETWORK AND SYSTEM PROVISIONING
CONTENTS
DOCUMENT WARRANTY i
1. OPERATE WebLCT 1-1
1.1 Conventions Used in this Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

1.2 LCT Communication Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.2.1 Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.2.2 Local Port Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.3 Hardware Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.4 Software Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1.5 Operating System Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1.6 Recommended Settings for Browsing Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
1.6.1 Microsoft® Internet Explorer 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
1.6.2 Mozilla Firefox™ ESR 38 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
1.7 If a Script Warning is Issued . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
1.7.1 Solution for Microsoft® Internet Explorer® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
1.7.2 Solution for Firefox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
1.8 Login, Logout and Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
1.8.1 Log In to NE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
1.8.2 Log Out from NE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
1.8.3 Exit WebLCT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
1.9 WebLCT Main Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
2. LICENSE AND USER ACCOUNT 2-1
2.1 Setup Software License. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

2.1.1 Import Software License Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
iPASOLINK EX Advanced: SET NETWORK AND SYSTEM PROVISIONING GGS-000547-01E

June 2016
– ii – CONTENTS
2.2 User Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

2.2.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2.2.1.1 Access Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2.2.1.2 User Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2.2.2 User Access Levels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
2.2.3 Default User Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
2.2.4 User Account. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
2.2.4.1 Login User List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
2.2.4.2 Login User Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
2.2.4.3 User Authentication Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
2.2.4.4 Privilege ID and Group Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
2.2.4.5 User Account Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
2.2.4.6 User Group Profile Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
3. SECURITY MANAGEMENT 3-1
3.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

3.1.1 SNMPv1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.1.1.1 GET/SET of MIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.1.1.2 Send Trap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3.1.1.3 User Application (Log) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3.1.2 SNMPv2c . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3.1.2.1 GET/SET of MIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
3.1.2.2 Send Trap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
3.1.2.3 User Application (Log) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
3.1.3 SNMPv3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
3.1.3.1 GET/SET of MIB.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
3.1.3.2 Send Trap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
3.1.3.3 Security (user authentication, session management and
encryption). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
3.1.4 NTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
3.1.4.1 As NTP Client . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
3.1.4.2 As NTP Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
3.1.5 FTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
3.1.5.1 Data Upload and Download Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
3.1.5.2 Session Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
3.1.5.3 User Authentication Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
3.1.6 SSHv2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
3.1.6.1 CLI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
GGS-000547-01E iPASOLINK EX Advanced: SET NETWORK AND SYSTEM PROVISIONING


3.1.7 SFTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
3.1.7.1 Providing Function of Secure File Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
3.1.7.2 Data Upload/Download Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
3.1.8 HTTP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
3.1.8.1 WebLCT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
3.1.8.2 Session Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
3.1.8.3 User Authentication Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
3.1.9 HTTPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
3.1.9.1 Providing Web Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
3.1.9.2 Session Management among External Terminals. . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
3.1.9.3 User Authentication Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
3.2 Service Status Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
3.3 SNMP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
3.3.1 Set SNMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
3.4 SNMP Community . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
3.4.1 Register/Modify SNMP Community. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
3.4.2 Delete SNMP Community . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
3.5 SNMP Trap Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
3.5.1 Set/Modify SNMP Trap Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
3.5.2 Delete SNMP Trap Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
3.6 NTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
3.6.1 Enable NTP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
3.6.2 NTP Client Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
3.7 NTP Server Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
3.7.1 Register/Modify NTP Server Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
3.7.2 Delete NTP Server Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
3.8 NTP Auth Key Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
3.8.1 Create/Modify NTP Authentication Key Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
3.8.2 Remove Registered NTP Authentication Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
3.9 FTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
3.10 SSHv2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47
3.11 SFTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50

– iv – CONTENTS
3.12 HTTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53

3.13 HTTPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56
3.14 RADIUS Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59
3.14.1 Set RADIUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-60
3.14.2 Set RADIUS Server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-63
3.14.3 Remove Registered RADIUS Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-66
4. EQUIPMENT SETUP 4-1
4.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

4.2 Equipment Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
4.3 Radio Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
4.4 AMBR Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
5. NETWORK MANAGEMENT 5-1
5.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

5.2 Port/VLAN Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
5.2.1 Ethernet Port Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
5.2.2 MODEM Port Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
5.2.3 Inband Management VLAN Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
5.2.3.1 For VLAN Mode 802.1Q . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
5.2.3.2 For VLAN Mode 802.1ad. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
5.2.4 VLAN Setting Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
5.3 Bridge Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
5.4 LLDP Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
5.5 Routing Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
5.5.1 Routing Protocol Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
5.5.2 Add Routing Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
5.5.3 Modify Routing Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
5.5.4 Delete Routing Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
5.6 IP Access Control Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
5.6.1 Input Filter List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
5.6.1.1 Add Entry. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29

CONTENTS –v–
5.6.1.2 Modify Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32

5.6.1.3 Delete Entry. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
5.6.1.4 Modify Rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
5.6.2 Forwarding Filter List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39
5.6.2.1 Add Entry. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39
5.6.2.2 Modify Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43
5.6.2.3 Delete Entry. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47
5.6.2.4 Modify Rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-49
5.7 ARP Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-51
5.7.1 View ARP Cache. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-51
5.7.2 Static ARP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-52
5.7.2.1 Add Static ARP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-52
5.7.2.2 Modify Static ARP Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-54
5.7.2.3 Delete Static ARP Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-56
5.8 DHCP Server/Relay Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-59
5.8.1 Set DHCP Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-59
5.8.2 Set DHCP Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64
5.8.3 MAC Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-67
5.8.3.1 Add MAC Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-67
5.8.3.2 Modify MAC Address. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-70
5.8.3.3 Delete MAC Address. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-73
5.8.3.4 Release IP Address Forcibly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-76
5.9 Adjust Current Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-79
6. PROVISIONING 6-1
6.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
7. Set MODEM Function 7-1
7.1 MODEM Port Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

7.2 TX Power Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
7.2.1 ATPC Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
7.2.2 MTPC Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
7.3 ALM Mode Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9

– vi – CONTENTS
8. Set ETH Function 8-1
8.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

8.2 Equipment Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
8.2.1 Bridge Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
8.2.2 Max Frame Size Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
8.2.3 Other Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
8.3 ETH Port Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
8.4 VLAN Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
8.4.1 Add VLAN/S-VLAN ID. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
8.4.2 Modify VLAN Service Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
8.4.3 Delete VLAN/S-VLAN ID. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23
8.4.4 VLAN Setting (802.1Q Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26
8.4.5 VLAN Setting (802.1ad Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-33
8.5 FDB Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-40
8.5.1 FDB Setting (Equipment) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-40
8.5.2 FDB Setting (VLAN ID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-43
8.5.2.1 Service Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-43
8.5.2.2 Port Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-46
8.5.3 Static Entry Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-49
8.5.3.1 Add Static Entry. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-49
8.5.3.2 Modify Static Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-52
8.5.3.3 Delete Static Entry. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-54
8.6 ETH OAM Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-57
8.6.1 OAM MEG Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-57
8.6.1.1 Add MEG Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-57
8.6.1.2 Modify MEG Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-60
8.6.1.3 Delete MEG Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-63
8.6.2 OAM MEP Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-65
8.6.2.1 Add MEP Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-65
8.6.2.2 Modify MEP Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-70
8.6.2.3 Delete MEP Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-73
8.6.3 OAM MIP Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-75
8.6.3.1 Add MIP Index. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-75
8.6.3.2 Modify MIP Index. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-78
8.6.3.3 Delete MIP Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-81
8.6.4 LINK OAM Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-83

CONTENTS – vii –
8.7 RSTP/MSTP Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-86

8.7.1 Select STP Mode for Setting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-86
8.7.2 RSTP Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-88
8.7.2.1 Modify RSTP Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-88
8.7.2.2 Modify Detailed RSTP Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-91
8.7.3 MSTP Port. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-94
8.7.3.1 Modify MSTP Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-94
8.7.3.2 Modify Detail MSTP Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-100
8.8 ERP Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-103
8.8.1 Configure ERP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-103
8.8.2 Modify ERP Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-112
8.8.3 Delete ERP Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-113
8.9 Link Aggregation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-115
8.9.1 Add Link Aggregation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-115
8.9.2 Modify LAG Registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-119
8.9.3 Delete LAG Registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-122
8.10 QoS/Classification Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-125
8.10.1 Classify Setting Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-126
8.10.1.1 Set Classification Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-126
8.10.1.2 Edit Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-128
8.10.1.3 Specify Attributes of Equipment Based QoS Mode . . . . . . . . . . 8-131
8.10.1.4 Specify Attributes of Port Based QoS Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-134
8.10.1.5 Specify Attributes of VLAN ID Based QoS Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 8-137
8.10.2 Policer Setting Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-140
8.10.2.1 Add Policer Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-140
8.10.2.2 Modify Policer Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-144
8.10.2.3 Delete Policer Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-148
8.10.2.4 Policer Profile Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-150
8.10.3 Shaper Setting Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-153
8.10.3.1 QoS Class and Shaper Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-153
8.10.3.2 Edit Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-156
8.10.3.3 Edit Egress Shaper Rate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-160
8.10.3.4 Modify Queue Profile. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-162
8.10.3.5 Edit Shaper Group Member . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-165
8.11 Filter Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-168
8.11.1 Filter List Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-168
8.11.1.1 Add Filter List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-168
8.11.1.2 Modify Filter List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-171

– viii – CONTENTS
8.11.1.3 Delete Filter List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-174

8.11.2 Profile List Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-177
8.11.2.1 Add Profile List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-177
8.11.2.2 Modify Profile List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-180
8.11.2.3 Delete Profile List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-183
8.11.3 Port Filter Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-186
8.12 L2CP Transparent Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-188
8.13 Mirroring Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-191
8.14 Port Isolate Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-194
8.15 LLF Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-196
8.15.1 Add LLF Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-196
8.15.2 Modify LLF Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-199
8.15.3 Delete LLF Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-202
8.16 Broadcast Storm Control Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-204
8.16.1 Set Broadcast Strom Control Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-204
8.16.2 Specify Broadcast Strom Control Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-206
9. Set Equipment Clock and Synchronization 9-1
9.1 Equipment Clock Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2

9.1.1 Specify/Modify Equipment Clock Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
9.2 PTP Mode Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
9.2.1 Modify PTP Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
9.2.2 Add/Modify PTP Logical Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
9.2.3 Delete PTP Logical Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14
10. Assign Alarm/AIS Settings 10-1
10.1 Correlation Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2

10.2 Alarm Severity Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
10.3 BER Threshold Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
10.3.1 MODEM (1+0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10

CONTENTS – ix –
11. Assign PMON/RMON Settings 11-1
11.1 RMON Threshold Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2

11.2 RMON Threshold Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
11.3 Other Threshold Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
11.3.1 RX Level TCN (Threshold Crossing Notification) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
11.3.2 SFP Optical Power TCN (Threshold Crossing Notification) . . . . . . . . 11-11
11.4 VLAN Counter Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13
11.4.1 VLAN Counter Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13
11.4.1.1 Add VLAN Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13
11.4.1.2 Modify VLAN Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-16
11.4.1.3 Delete VLAN Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-19
11.4.2 Shaper Group Counter Select. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-21
11.4.2.1 Add Shaper Group Counter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-21
11.4.2.2 Delete Shaper Group Counter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-23

– x/END – CONTENTS
GGS-000547-01E
DOCUMENT WARRANTY –i–
DOCUMENT WARRANTY
1. The information in this document is subject to change without prior notice.
2. Screenshots of WebLCT provided in this document are examples. Screenshot

samples in this document should be the latest as of issuing time, however, their
appearances may vary according to configurations, operation modes and specified
parameters of the equipment, WebLCT application’s release version, etc.
3. This document is provided on the assumption that the targeted users have skills and
knowledge of restrictions and precautions to operate the equivalent equipment. Refer
to the equipment manual for details.

– ii/END – DOCUMENT WARRANTY

OPERATE WebLCT 1-1
1. OPERATE WebLCT
1.1 Conventions Used in this Document

Following conventions are used throughout this document:
Style Description Examples:
Italic Indicates a related document title/name. Refer to iPASOLINK Operation

Manual for details
Bold  Menus and menu items The Overall window appears.
 Indications of parameters and buttons displayed

on the user interface
 Names of items in the computer display
 File names and directory names
 ➤ Indicates transition of screens and/or menu items. Select System  Login/Logout.
(arrow) Menu Path:
Provisioning ➤ PWE Setting
< item > A command variable to be entered, which requires < password >
the user’s choice or definition. Commonly used to
prompt the user to enter a password.
Initial Caps Indicates a keypad name using an uppercase for Press Enter key.
its first letter.
1.2 LCT Communication Interface
1.2.1 Communications
iPASOLINK EX Advanced (hereinafter iPASOLINK EX/A) provides WebLCT as

the Local Craft Terminal (LCT) that is a convenient tool to install and maintain the
equipment. WebLCT uses the GUI method on WEB browser. In addition, this tool
enables a remote connection.
Since using the method of WEB browser, there is no application software to install.
However, to operate iPASOLINK via WebLCT, license keys that are prepared
according to the contract and equipment version should be installed.

1-2 OPERATE WebLCT
1.2.2 Local Port Interface
The DCN (PoE) Port is provided on the equipment:
Figure 1-1 DCN (PoE)
DCN (PoE)
(to DCN (PoE) port
LAN CABLE
(10/100BASE-TX)
Connect the LAN Port on PC and DCN (PoE) Port on iPASOLINK EX/A using a
LAN Cable. Following are the specifications of LAN Port/Cable:
 10/100BASE-TX
 RJ45
1.3 Hardware Requirements
Component Windows 7® (32 bits, 64 bits) Windows 8.1® (32 bits, 64 bits)
CPU Intel Core i5 2 cores 2.0 GHz or greater Intel Core i52 cores 2.0 GHz or greater
RAM 2 GB or greater 2 GB or greater
HDD 40 GB or greater 40 GB or greater
Display Color LCD (1024 × 768) Color LCD (1024 × 768)
LAN Port 10/100BASE-T(X) 10/100BASE-T(X)
USB Port ——— ———

OPERATE WebLCT 1-3
1.4 Software Requirements
Item Requirement
Supported Operating System Windows 7® (32 bits, 64 bits) [English Version]
Windows 8.1® (32 bits, 64 bits) [English Version]
Browsing Software Microsoft® Internet Explorer 11
Mozilla Firefox™ ESR 38
NOTE: It is not recommended to use the Zoom function of these browsers while
operating the WebLCT. Using this function may affect the appearance of
WebLCT windows.
1.5 Operating System Environment

Check if your PC satisfies the conditions below:
 Internet Explorer is installed
 TCP/IP Protocol is properly set.

1-4 OPERATE WebLCT
1.6 Recommended Settings for Browsing Software

Following are the recommended settings for the browsing software (browsers)
available to operate LCT. (Examples use the Windows® 7.)
1.6.1 Microsoft® Internet Explorer 11
Procedure 1-1 Set Tabbed Browsing Option
Tabbed Browsing option is recommended.
1. Start up the Internet Explorer 11.
2. Click Tools on the menu bar or the command bar, and select Internet
Options. Following example is selecting Tools on the menu bar.
Figure 1-2 Internet Explorer — Select Internet Options
The Internet Options window appears.

OPERATE WebLCT 1-5
3. On the General tabbed page, click Settings under Tabs option.
Figure 1-3 Internet Options — General Tab
4. The Tabbed Browsing Settings option window appears. Select Always open
pop-ups in a new tab, then click the OK button.
Figure 1-4 Tabbed Browsing Settings Option Window
Proceed to Procedure 1-2.

1-6 OPERATE WebLCT
Procedure 1-2 Set Security Options
1. Click Security tab to show the security options, and click Custom level
button.
Figure 1-5 Internet Options — Security
Custom level button
2. Security Settings — Internet Zone option window appears. Select Enable for
Downloads — Automatic prompting for file downloads option.
Figure 1-6 Internet Options — Security Settings — Internet Zone
3. Click the OK button.

OPERATE WebLCT 1-7
1.6.2 Mozilla Firefox™ ESR 38
Procedure 1-3 Customize Firefox
1. Start up the Firefox.
2. Click Tools on the menu bar, and select Options.
Figure 1-7 Firefox — Tools Menu
3. The Options window appears. Select Always ask me where to save files,
then click the OK button.
Figure 1-8 Options — General

1-8 OPERATE WebLCT
1.7 If a Script Warning is Issued

According to the complexity or massiveness of the registered configuration,
iPASOLINK may take some time to run the scripts, by which the browser issues a
script warning to ask if you still want to continue or stop running the script.
DO NOT STOP RUNNING THE SCRIPT

or iPASOLINK cannot complete the whole process.
However, if this message appears repeatedly, annoying you, proceed with the
following to stop displaying, instead of stop running the script:
1.7.1 Solution for Microsoft® Internet Explorer®

Following is the message dialog by the Internet Explore® if any script takes too long
to respond, or is getting out of control:
Figure 1-9 Run Slowly Message
If the message above appears, proceed with the following:
1. Close all the Internet Explorer® windows.
2. Launch the Internet Explorer® newly, and go to the web site by following
URL: http://support.microsoft.com/kb/175500
Figure 1-10 Error Message
(Example used here is English Version. Language used differs according to where you are.)

OPERATE WebLCT 1-9
3. Scroll down the page to show the Fix it tool button, then click it.
Figure 1-11 Fix It Window

Fix it tool button
4. Security Warning dialog box appears. Click the Run button in the dialog box,
and follow the steps in the Fix it wizard:
Figure 1-12 Security Warning Dialog Box

1-10 OPERATE WebLCT
1.7.2 Solution for Firefox
Following is the message dialog by the Firefox™ if any script takes too long to
respond, or a is getting out of control:
Figure 1-13 Unresponsive Script Warning Message
If the message above appears while the iPASOLINK process is in progress, proceed
with the following:
1. Click to leave a tick in the Don’t ask me again check box.
Figure 1-14 Request Action
Don’t ask me again check box
Continue button
2. Then click the Continue button.
This warning message will not appear again.

OPERATE WebLCT 1-11
1.8 Login, Logout and Exit
1.8.1 Log In to NE
Users are registered by means of login names and their passwords. To protect the
network and network management system from unauthorized access or unauthorized
modifications, three levels with different privileges (refer to the table shown in
Section 2.2.2 User Access Levels) define users. The available functions to operate
depend on the user’s privilege level. Therefore, some of the functions may or may not
be carried out.
The highest or administrator level (Admin) has the full access to the network and
network management system.
Procedure 1-4
1. Power on the computer.
2. Log in to the Windows as the Administrator.
3. Click start, and select Programs  Internet Explore. The Internet Explorer
window appears.
4. In Address field, enter an IP address of the NE adding /weblct/ as shown

below:
 Example: http://172.17.254.253/weblct/
Figure 1-15 Launch WebLCT
5. The Login window for WebLCT appears. Enter a user name and his/her
password into User Name and Password fields:

1-12 OPERATE WebLCT
Figure 1-16 WebLCT Login Window
Following are the default user name and its password for iPASOLINK EX/A:
 User Name: Admin
 Password: 12345678
6. Click the OK button blow the Login fields. System Status indicator appears.
7. Click the OK button, or wait till the box automatically disappears. (The System
Status indicator disappears in a while without clicking the OK button if you
wait.)
Figure 1-17 System Status Indicator
The main window for WebLCT appears:

OPERATE WebLCT 1-13
Figure 1-18 WebLCT Main Window

1-14 OPERATE WebLCT
1.8.2 Log Out from NE

Procedure 1-5
1. Click Logout button in the upper right of WebLCT main window.
Figure 1-19 Logout Button on WebLCT Main Window
Logout button
2. The Confirmation dialog box appears. Click the OK button to log out.
Figure 1-20 Confirmation Dialog Box
3. The browser returns to WebLCT Login window.
1.8.3 Exit WebLCT
Following are the methods to exit WebLCT:

 Select File (F)  Close (X) from Internet Explorer menu bar.
 Click button in the upper right of Internet Explorer.

OPERATE WebLCT 1-15
1.9 WebLCT Main Window

Following describes the contents and structure of WebLCT main window:
Figure 1-21 WebLCT Main Window Contents

(1) NE Name
(2) Logged-In User Name
(7) Opposite Site Links
(3) Refresh button
(4) Auto Mode check box
(5) Hide NR (8) Maintenance button
(6) Equipment Status View
(9) Logout button
(10) Menu Tree (11) Detailed Information
(1) NE Name
This field indicates a registered equipment name.
(2) Logged-In User Name [Login User]

This field indicates a user name that is currently logged in.
(3) Refresh button

Click Refresh button to manually update the current status displayed in the WebLCT
main window.

1-16 OPERATE WebLCT
(4) Auto Mode check box
Check (click to leave a tick in) Auto Mode check box to enable refreshing the
window automatically.
(5) Hide NR
Check (click to leave a tick in) Hide NR check box to hide the lines of conditions that
are assigned to NR (Not Reported) from the Active Alarm list.
(6) Equipment Status View

This field shows the current equipment status.
(7) Opposite Site Links
This drop-down list shows a list of NEs on the opposed sites. A user can select an NE
from the list to log in to.
(8) Maintenance button
Click Maintenance tool button before starting any maintenance operations.
(9) Logout button
Click Logout button to log out from NE.
(10) Menu Tree

This part shows the menus for the equipment configuration and provisioning by a tree
view. Available operations via WebLCT are:
(a) Current Status

Current Status lists current status and event histories of the equipment by each
part of an NE (Active Alarm, Event Log, Equipment, ETH).
(b) Equipment Setup

This item is to register the NE name and set up radio configurations.
(c) Network Management Setting

This item is to configure and set up the network environment. This item also
provides the User Account management as well.
(d) Provisioning
This item is to configure the detailed settings of the Equipment.

OPERATE WebLCT 1-17
(e) Maintenance Control

Maintenance Control executes a protection switch, Loopback, Hardware Reset,
Firmware Reset, etc.
(f) Maintenance Test

Maintenance Test measures the link quality of Ethernet traffic.
(g) PMON/RMON Report

This item is to retrieve the information of Performance Monitor (PMON) and
Remote Network Monitor (RMON). A user can also exports the data to external
storage (local PC, USB Memory, etc.) For more details, refer to the Maintenance
manual.
(h) Metering
Metering measures the real time TX power, RX level, Power Supply and BER,
etc.
(i) Equipment Utility

Select this menu to upload and download the equipment configuration data,
software, firmware and FPGA data, etc.
(j) Inventory
Inventory retrieves the information regarding the equipment and software
license.
(k) S/W License Setup

This menu is used to import the license keys.
(11) Detailed Information
This part shows detailed information or a setting procedure under each menu.

1-18/END OPERATE WebLCT

LICENSE AND USER ACCOUNT 2-1
2. LICENSE AND USER ACCOUNT
NOTE: Procedures here use the Microsoft® Internet Explorer for the
browsing software as an example.
2.1 Setup Software License

Software License Key must be installed to operate iPASOLINK equipment via
WebLCT. Some operations, such as registering user accounts, do not require the
license. Thus, the Software License Key should be installed sometime between
logging in to WebLCT and registering/setting the equipment attributes.
2.1.1 Import Software License Key
Procedure 2-1
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand the S/W License Setup to select
Import License key. The Import License key window appears.
3. Click the Setup tool button.
Figure 2-1 S/W License Setup — Import License key Window
Setup tool button

2-2 LICENSE AND USER ACCOUNT
4. File selection window for Import License key appears. Click the button,
and select a target file:
Figure 2-2 Import License key Option Window
Figure 2-3 Choose File to Upload Option Window
5. Import License key option window displays the selected file name. Confirm
the file name, then click the OK button to proceed.
Figure 2-4 Import License key Option Window (selected)

6. When the importing process ends, the Import License key window updates
the information.
Figure 2-5 Import License key Dialog Box

2.2 User Management

The user management is a function to manage an authorized user to access to a
network system, and to prevent an unauthorized user from accessing to the network
system.
2.2.1 Overview
2.2.1.1 Access Level
iPASOLINK provides three user access levels with different privilege as shown in the
table below. For details of each access level and its available operations, refer to
Table 2-3 User Access Privilege Levels.
Table 2-1 Access Levels
Component Available Task File Operation SNMP Operation

Operator View the equipment configuration and status. Upload only Obtain
Config In addition to tasks available by Operator level, man-  Upload  Obtain
agement of radio base band and switching function.
 Download  Set
Admin In addition to tasks available by Config level, man-  Upload  Obtain
agement of user accounts and time adjustments.
 Download  Set
Following describes the terms, such as upload and download mentioned in the table
above:
 Upload is to copy a file from NE to an external storage, such as WebLCT PC.
 Download is to copy a file from an external storage to the internal storage of
equipment.
2.2.1.2 User Group

User Group configuration allows a user to manage the protocol type and access level
for each group. A user of the specified User Group in iPASOLINK will be assigned
with the pre-defined protocol and access level of the group. In addition to the three
default user groups, up to six user groups can be added. The default user groups are
shown below:
NOTE: Options specified to the default user groups cannot be modified.
Table 2-2 User Group Profile
Group Name Classification FTP SSHv2 SFTP HTTP HTTPS SNMP Access Level
OPERATOR Unchangeable ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ Operator
CONFIG Unchangeable ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ Config
ADMIN Unchangeable ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ Admin

2.2.2 User Access Levels
Following shows the access level for each task. Remote means that a user makes an
access to the equipment remotely.
 Meanings:
R/W: A user can both browse and modify settings.
R: A user can browse the settings.
O: The task is operational by a remote access but is restricted according to the access
level assigned to the user.
Table 2-3 User Access Privilege Levels (Sheet 1 of 4)
WebLCT Menu Admin Config Operator Remote
Current Status R R R O
Equipment Setup
Equipment Configuration R/W R R O
Radio Configuration R/W R R O
AMBR Configuration R/W R R O
Network Management Setting

Port/VLAN Setting R/W R R O
Bridge Setting R/W R R O
LLDP Setting R/W R R O
Routing Setting R/W R R O
IP Access Control Setting R/W R R O
ARP Setting R/W R R O
DHCP Server / Relay Setting R/W R/W R O
Date/Time Setting R/W R R O
User Account/Security Login User List R — — O

Setting
User Authentication
R/W — — O
Configuration
User Account Management R/W — — O
User Group Profile

R/W — — O
Configuration
Security Management Service Status Setting R/W — — O
RADIUS Setting R/W — — O

Provisioning
MODEM Function Setting MODEM Port Setting R/W R/W R O
TX Power Setting R/W R/W R O
ALM Mode Setting R/W R/W R O
ETH Function Setting Equipment Setting R/W R/W R O
ETH Port Setting R/W R/W R O
VLAN Setting R/W R/W R O
FDB Setting R/W R/W R O
ETH OAM Setting R/W R/W R O
RSTP/MSTP Setting R/W R/W R O
ERP Setting R/W R/W R O
Link Aggregation Setting R/W R/W R O
QoS/Classification Setting R/W R/W R O
Filter Setting R/W R/W R O
L2CP Transparent Setting R/W R/W R O
Mirroring Setting R/W R/W R O
Port Isolate Setting R/W R/W R O
LLF Setting R/W R/W R O
Broadcast Storm Control
R/W R/W R O
Setting
Equipment Clock/ Equipment Clock Setting R/W R/W R O

Synchronization Setting
PTP Mode Setting R/W R/W R O
PTP Domain Setting R/W R/W R O
Alarm/AIS Setting Correlation Setting R/W R/W R O
Alarm Severity Setting R/W R/W R O
BER Threshold Setting R/W R/W R —
PMON/RMON Setting PMON Threshold Setting R/W R/W R O
RMON Threshold Setting R/W R/W R O
Other Threshold Setting R/W R/W R O
VLAN Counter Setting R/W R/W R O

Maintenance Control
Loopback Control L2 Loopback Control R/W R/W R O
Link OAM Loop Back R/W R/W R O
Protection Control RSTP/MSTP Control R/W R/W R O
ERP Control R/W R/W R O

LAG Revert Control R/W R/W R O
Timing Source Switch
R/W R/W R O
Control
MODEM Maintenance Control R/W R/W R O*1
Laser Shutdown Control R/W R/W R O
H/W, F/W Reset Control H/W Reset Control R/W — — O
F/W Reset Control R/W — — O
PTP Domain Control R/W R/W R O
Maintenance Test
ETH OAM LB/LT/DM/LM Control R/W R/W R O
PMON/RMON Report
MODEM PMON Report R R R O
ETH RMON Report R R R O
VLAN Counter Report R R R O
Metering
Current Metering R/W R/W R O
Equipment Utility
Export (NE -> Storage) Utility R/W R/W — O
Update (Storage -> NE) Utility R/W — — O
Program ROM Switching R/W — — O
USB Memory Utility R R R O
Log Clear Function R/W — — O
Shipment R/W — — —
Inventory
Equipment Inventory Information R/W R/W R O
S/W License Information R R R O

User Description R/W R/W R O
S/W License Setup

Import License Key R/W — — O
*1: CW Control is not editable.
2.2.3 Default User Account
iPASOLINK provides three default user accounts with pre-defined access levels and
privileges. In addition to these default user accounts, up to 100 user accounts can be
added.
Following describes the pre-defined default user accounts:
Table 2-4 Default User Accounts
User Name Default Password Description User Group
User 87654321 A User is able to view the information of system OPERATOR

configuration and equipment status, but is not
allowed to make any changes to the configuration.
Config 87654321 In addition to the tasks available for a User, Config CONFIG
user is able to operate the radio management, base
band management, switching management for C-
Plane control
Admin 12345678 In addition to the tasks available for a Config user, ADMIN
Admin user is able to operate database
management, file management, user management
and time adjustment for M-Plane control.

2.2.4 User Account
Following are the functions to manage user accounts supported by iPASOLINK:
 Login User List

Login User List displays the information of registered user accounts. From this list,
user profiles, such as passwords and User Group Profiles can be modified. This
window also provides the function (Login User Control) to limit the maximum
number of users that can access to the equipment.
 User Authentication Configuration

User Authentication Configuration provides the authentication methods to select.
 User Account Management

User Account Management is used to register new user accounts, and to modify/
delete the registered user accounts.
 User Group Profile Configuration

User Group Profile Configuration is used to register new User Groups, and to
modify/delete the registered User Groups.

2.2.4.1 Login User List
This function allows users to view and confirm the registered user accounts.
Procedure 2-2
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Network Management Setting, and its
submenu User Account / Security Setting to select Login User List. The
Login User List appears.
Figure 2-6 Login User List

 To specify the maximum number of accessing users, go to 2.2.4.2 Login User
Control.

2.2.4.2 Login User Control
Procedure 2-3
Menu Path:
Network Management Setting ➤ User Account / Security Setting
➤ Login User List
1. Click the Login User Control link.
Figure 2-7 Select Login User Control in Login User List Window
click the link
2. Login User Control option window appears. Specify the maximum number
of users to allow logging in, then click the OK button.
Figure 2-8 Login User Control Option Window
Table 2-5 Login User Control Setting Parameters
Parameter Value Description
Total Number of Admin/ 1 to 5 Limits the maximum number of Admin and

Config Level Accounts Config level users to log in.

3. Information dialog box appears. Click the OK button to proceed.
Figure 2-9 Information Dialog Box
4. Login User List window updates the information.
Figure 2-10 Login User List Window

2.2.4.3 User Authentication Configuration
An authentication method for iPASOLINK can be specified using the User

Authentication Configuration.
NOTE: This operation is available only by users whose access level is Admin.
 Authentication Setting
Determines and sets the authentication method to log in to iPASOLINK.
 Privilege ID / Group Name

Assigns authority levels to the registered Group Names.
Procedure 2-4 Authentication Setting
submenu User Account / Security Setting to select User Authentication
Configuration. The User Authentication Configuration window appears.
3. Click the Authentication Setting link.
Figure 2-11 User Authentication Configuration Window
click the link

4. Authentication Setting option window appears. Select values, then click the
OK button.
Figure 2-12 Authentication Setting Option Window
Table 2-6 Authentication Setting Parameters
Authentication NE Only Login authentications are proceeded only by the internal

Method authentication function, using the accounts and their passwords
registered to the equipment. Selecting this option enables the
Login Protection option.
NE + RADIUS If it fails at the internal authentication function, the external

authentication by RADIUS Server is proceeded. To use this
function, settings for RADIUS are required. Selecting this
option enables the Authentication Sequence option.
Authentication NE -> RADIUS Server Login authentications are proceeded by the order from NE to
Sequence RADIUS Server. This option is available when the
Authentication Method is set to NE + RADIUS.
RADIUS Server -> NE Login authentications are proceeded by the order from RADIUS
Server to NE. This option is available when the Authentication
Method is set to NE + RADIUS.
Login Protection Enable Enables Account locking (Login Protection) that is the internal
authentication function using the registered account and their
passwords.
Disable Disables the account locking (Login Protection) that is the

internal authentication function using the registered account
and their passwords.

6. The User Authentication Configuration window updates the information.

Verify the displayed information.
 To assign privilege IDs and Group Names, go to 2.2.4.4 Privilege ID and

Group Name.

2.2.4.4 Privilege ID and Group Name

Following procedure applies a Group Name to the selected Privilege ID.
Procedure 2-5
Menu Path:
Network Management Setting ➤ User Account / Security Setting
➤ User Authentication Configuration
1. Click a Privilege ID No. link of the target group.
Privilege ID numbers
2. Privilege ID option window for the selected ID number appears. Select the
method to assign, then click the OK button.
Figure 2-16 Privilege ID Option Window

Table 2-7 Setting for Privilege ID
Group Name Operator Each group is mapped to a privilege level defined

by the vendor specific message.
Config
ADMIN
Default Permission
4. The User Authentication Configuration window updates the information.


2.2.4.5 User Account Management
This function allows users to add registrations of new user accounts, and to modify/
delete the registered user accounts.
NOTE: The operations regarding this function are available by the Admin-level user(s)
only.
 Add User Account

This function is used to register a new user account.
NOTE: In addition to the three default accounts, up to 100 user accounts can be added.
 Modify User Account

This function is used to modify the information of registered user accounts including
their password and User Group.
 Delete User Account

This function is used to remove registered user accounts.

Procedure 2-6 Add User Account
NOTE: Security Level (Hash Algorithm / Priv (Privacy) Algorithm) is required to be set
to add new user accounts. Once a registration of a user is completed, the
security level of this user cannot be modified.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Network Management Setting, then its
submenu User Account / Security Setting to select User Account
Management. The User Account Management window appears.
3. Click Add User tool button.
Figure 2-19 User Account Management Window
Add User button
The User Setting option window appears.

4. Enter the appropriate value to each parameter for the user to be added.
Figure 2-20 User Setting Option Window
i) Enter a User Name within one to 31 characters long.
ii) Click Set Password tool button on the tool bar to open the Set Password option
window, enter the password within eight to 31 characters long, then click the
OK button.
Figure 2-21 Set Password Option Window
iii) Select Group Name. See Table 2-2 User Group Profile for User Groups.
iv) Select Security Level:

 Selecting NoAuthNoPriv has no additional settings. Go to Step 5.
 Selecting AuthNoPriv enables Auth Algorithm option. Click a radio button to
select the algorithm type, and enter Auth Key. See (a) Setting Authentication
Algorithm below.
 Selecting AuthPriv enables both Auth Algorithm and Priv Algorithm options.
Click radio buttons to select algorithm types, and enter Auth Key and Priv Key.
See (a) Setting Authentication Algorithm and (b) Setting Privacy
Algorithm below.

(a) Setting Authentication Algorithm
➀ Select AuthNoPriv or AuthPriv to enable the Auth Algorithm option.
➁ Select MD5 or SHA by clicking its radio button.
➂ Click Set Auth Key button on the tool bar to open the option window.
➃ Enter the Auth Key within eight to 16 digits, the click the OK button.
Figure 2-22 Set Auth Key
Verify the selection and entry.
 To set Priv Algorithm, go to (b) Setting Privacy Algorithm below.
 To complete the procedure, go to Step 5.

(b) Setting Privacy Algorithm
➀ Select AuthPriv to enable the Priv Algorithm option.
➁ Select DES or AES by clicking its radio button.
➂ Click Set Priv Key button on the tool bar to open the option window.
➃ Enter the Priv Key within eight to 16 digits, the click the OK button.
Figure 2-23 Set Privacy Algorithm
Verify the selection and entry, then go to Step 5.
5. Click the OK button of the User Setting option window. The Information
dialog box appears.
6. Click the OK button to proceed.

7. The User Account Management window updates the information. Confirm the
registered user account information.

Table 2-8 User Setting Parameters

User Name (text field) Valid value: One to 31 characters long.
Password (read only) Valid value: Eight to 31 characters long. To enter the password, click Set
Password button on the tool bar.
Group Name ADMIN Assign a Group Name for the user to be added. Refer to 2 User Group
Profile for User Group.
CONFIG
OPERATOR
GROUP
Security Level NoAuthNoPriv Allows a user to log in without authentication and encryption.
AuthNoPriv A user needs authentication but no encryption to log in. Selecting this
option enables Auth Algorithm radio button below.
AuthPriv A user needs authentication and data are encrypted by DES or AES.
Selecting this option enables Priv Algorithm radio button below.
Auth Algorithm MD5 MD5 (Message-Digest algorithm 5) is one of the Hash Algorithm for
authentication and digital signature. In order to detect the falsification of
original data while transmitting, the original data will be converting the
Hash by comparing them at both ends.
SHA SHA (Secure Hash Algorithm) is one of the Hash Algorithm for authentica-
tion and digital signature. In order to detect the falsification of original data
while transmitting, less than 2 64 bits of the original data will be converting
the Hash of 160 bits by comparing it at both ends.
Auth Key (read only) Valid value: Eight to 16 digits of MD5 or SHA1 public key. To enter the
Authentication Key, click Set Auth Key button on the tool bar.
Priv Algorithm DES DES (Data Encryption Standard) uses a 56-bit encryption key. The block
size is 64 bits.
AES AES (Advanced Encryption Standard) is SPN-Structured block encryption.
The block size is 128 bits, and the length of the key is 128/192/256 bits.
Priv Key (read only) Valid value: Eight to 16 digits. To enter the Privacy Key, click Set Priv Key
button on the tool bar.

Procedure 2-7 Modify User Account
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Network Management Setting, then
its submenu User Account / Security Setting to select User Account
3. Click on a User Name of the target user account.
4. The User Setting option window appears. Modify the registered value(s):
 To modify the password, click Set Password button on the tool bar to open the Set
Password option window, enter the password within eight to 31 characters long,
and click the OK button of the Set Password option window.

 To modify the Group Name, select an appropriate Group Name from the Group
Name drop-down list. See Table 2-2 User Group Profile for User Groups.
Figure 2-28 Set Password Option Window
5. When completed, click OK button of the User Setting option window.

6. The Information dialog box appears. Click the OK button to proceed.
User Account Management window updates the information.

7. Confirm the modified user account information.

Procedure 2-8 Delete User Account
submenu User Account / Security Setting to select User Account
3. Click Delete User tool button on the tool bar
Delete User button
4. The User Setting option window appears. From User Name drop-down list,
select a user account to be removed, and click the OK button.
Figure 2-33 User Setting (Delete) Option Window

5. Confirmation dialog box appears. Confirm the user name to be removed, and
click the OK button.
7. The User Account Management window updates the information. Confirm that
the selected user account has been removed.

2.2.4.6 User Group Profile Configuration
This operation registers/modifies User Group Profiles. The privilege of iPASOLINK

user is the subject to change according to the user access level and protocols that are
assigned by the User Group Profile. Only the Admin level user(s) is/are available to
configure the settings.
 Add User Group Profile

This operation registers a new User Group Profile adding to the default User Group
Profiles.
NOTE: In addition to the three default User Group Profiles, up to six User Group
Profiles can be registered.
 Modify User Group Profile

This operation modifies the Access Level and Protocol of the registered User Group
Profile.
 Delete User Group Profile

This operation deletes a registered User Group Profile.

Procedure 2-9 Add User Group
submenu User Account / Security Setting to select User Group Profile
Configuration.
3. The User Group Profile Configuration window appears. Click Add Group tool
button on the tool bar.
Figure 2-37 User Group Profile Configuration Window
Add Group button
The Group Setting option window appears.

4. Specify the appropriate value to each parameter:
Figure 2-38 Group Setting Option Window
OK button
Table 2-9 User Group Setting Parameters
Group Name (text field) Valid value: One to 32 characters long.
FTP Allow Select to use FTP protocol for file transfer.
Deny Not to use FTP for file transfer.
SSHv2 Allow Select to use SSHv2 protocol for CLI accessing to the equipment.
Deny Not to use SSHv2 protocol for CLI accessing to the equipment.
SFTP Allow Select to use SFTP protocol for file transfer.
Deny Not to use SFTP for file transfer.
HTTP Allow Select to use HTTP protocol for WebLCT accessing to the equipment.
Deny Not to use HTTP for WebLCT accessing to the equipment.
HTTPS Allow Select to use HTTPS protocol for WebLCT accessing to the equipment.
Deny Not to use HTTPS for WebLCT accessing to the equipment.
SNMP Allow Select to use SNMP protocol for accessing NEs.
Deny Not to use SNMP protocol for accessing NEs.
Access Level Admin Specifies the user access level. See Table 2-3 User Access
Privilege Levels for each level’s description.
Config
Operator

5. When completed, click the OK button.
7. The User Group Profile Configuration window updates the information.

Confirm that the information of newly added User Group Profile is displayed.
This step ends the procedure

Procedure 2-10 Modify User Group
Configuration. The User Group Profile Configuration window appears.
3. Click on a target Group Name.
click
The Group Setting option window appears.

4. Modify parameters:
Figure 2-42 Group Setting Option Window
OK button
 Click either Allow or Deny radio button to select a protocol.

 Select the appropriate Access Level from its drop-down list.
5. Click the OK button when completed. The Information dialog box appears.
The User Group Profile Configuration window updates the information.

7. Confirm the displayed Group Profile information.

Procedure 2-11 Delete User Group
NOTE: A User Group can be removed only when it has no assigned user account.
Configuration. The User Group Profile Configuration window appears.
3. Click Delete Group tool button on the tool bar.
Delete Group button
4. The Group Setting option window appears. Select a target Group Name to be
removed from the drop-down list, and click the OK button.
Figure 2-46 Group Setting (Delete) Option Window

2-38/END LICENSE AND USER ACCOUNT
5. Confirmation dialog box appears. Confirm the selected Group Name, and click
the OK button to proceed.
7. The User Group Profile Configuration window updates the information.

Confirm that the target group name has been removed.

SECURITY MANAGEMENT 3-1
3. SECURITY MANAGEMENT
3.1 Overview
iPASOLINK supports the following protocols and security management functions:
3.1.1 SNMPv1
SNMPv1 (Simple Network Management Protocol Version 1) is a communication

protocol to monitor/control NEs on an IP network, which is specified by the
following RFCs:
Table 3-1 RFC Standards
RFC No. Title
RFC 1155 Structure and Identification of Management Information on TCP/IP-based

Internets (SMIv1)
RFC 1157 A Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)
RFC 1213 Management Information Base on Network Management of TCP/IP-based

internets: MIB-II
iPASOLINK enables SNMPv1 to support the following functions:
3.1.1.1 GET/SET of MIB

Following are responses to the request of PDU (Protocol Data Unit) supported by
SNMPv1. Up to ten SNMP managers including the setting of IP address, community
name, security settings, etc., can be registered via the WebLCT. By default,
iPASOLINK uses the port 161 to receive the SNMP request PDU. To use any other
port but the default port, change the settings via the WebLCT.
Table 3-2 PDU Supported by SNMPv1
Item Description
GetRequest Requests the specified instance value.
GetNextRequest Requests the subsequent instance value of specified instance value in the list.
GetResponse Responds to the corresponding GetRequest and Set Request.
SetRequest Sets the specified instance value.
Trap Informs the change of state and troubles (SNMPv1-Trap).

3-2 SECURITY MANAGEMENT
3.1.1.2 Send Trap

iPASOLINK can send SNMPv1 trap initiatively to UDP Port 162. Except for sending
the trap to the connected NMS, user can specify an IP address of one additional
destination. A user can also specify the community name and UDP Port.
3.1.1.3 User Application (Log)

iPASOLINK records the names of logged-in users in the log file.
3.1.2 SNMPv2c
SNMPv2c (Simple Network Management Protocol Version 2c) is a communication

protocol to monitor/control NEs on an IP network, and is a revised version of
SNMPv1. The differences between v1 and v2c are that the GetBulk, the inform
request, unified packet format of each PDU are added, conforming to SMIv2 and
following RFCs:
RFC No. Title
SNMPv2c
RFC 1901 Introduction to Community-based SNMPv2
RFC 3416 Version 2 of the Protocol Operations for the Simple Network Management
Protocol (SNMP)
RFC 3417 Transport Mappings for the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)
RFC 3428 Management Information Base (MIB) for the Simple Network Management
Protocol (SNMP)
RFC 3584 Coexistence between Version 1, Version 2, and Version 3 of the Internet-
standard Network Management Framework
SMIv2
RFC 2578 Structure of Management Information Version 2 (SMIv2)
RFC 2579 Textual Conventions for SMIv2
RFC 2580 Conformance Statements for SMIv2
iPASOLINK enables SNMPv2c to support the following functions:

3.1.2.1 GET/SET of MIB

iPASOLINK responds to the request of the network management system.
Up to ten SNMP managers including the setting of IP address, community name,

security settings, etc., can be registered via WebLCT.
By default, iPASOLINK uses the port 161 to receive the SNMP request UDP. To use
other than the default port, change the settings via WebLCT.
Table 3-4 PDU Supported by SNMPv2c
Item Description
GetNextRequest Requests the subsequent instance value of specified instance value in the
list.
Response Responds to the corresponding various kinds of Request.
SNMPv2-Trap Informs the change of state and troubles. The format is different from
SNMP v1 trap.
GetBulkRequest Requests a number of instance value.
InformRequest Informs an event.
3.1.2.2 Send Trap

iPASOLINK can send SNMPv2 trap and InformRequest initiatively to UDP port 162.
Except for sending the trap to the connected NMS, user can specify an IP address of
one additional destination. User can also specify the community name and UDP Port.
3.1.2.3 User Application (Log)

iPASOLINK records the logged-in user name in the log file.
3.1.3 SNMPv3
SNMPv3 (Simple Network Management Protocol Version 3) is a communication

protocol to monitor/control NEs on an IP network, and is the newest version of
SNMP. The differences between SNMPv1/v2c and v3 are that the user authentication,
ciphered communication, and the change-packet format are enhanced, conforming to
the following RFCs for SMIv2 that define SNMPv3, SNMPv2c:

RFC No. Title
SNMPv3
RFC 3411 An Architecture for Describing Simple Network Management Protocol

(SNMP) Management Frameworks
RFC 3412 Message Processing and Dispatching for the Simple Network Management
Protocol (SNMP)
RFC 3413 Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) Applications
RFC 3414 User-based Security Model (USM) for version 3 of the Simple Network
Management Protocol (SNMPv3)
RFC 3415 View-based Access Control Model (VACM) for the Simple Network
Management Protocol (SNMP)
RFC 3416 Version 2 of the Protocol Operations for the Simple Network Management
Protocol (SNMP)
RFC 3417 Trans port Mappings for the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)
RFC 3418 Management Information Base (MIB) for the Simple Network Management
Protocol (SNMP)
RFC 3584 Coexistence between Version 1, Version 2, and Version 3 of the Internet-
standard Network Management Framework
SMIv2
RFC 2578 Structure of Management Information Version 2 (SMIv2)
RFC 2579 Textual Conventions for SMIv2
RFC 2580 Conformance Statements for SMIv2
iPASOLINK provides SNMPv3 to support the following function:

3.1.3.1 GET/SET of MIB.

Response the request of PDU (Protocol Data Unit) corresponding to SNMPv3.
Table 3-6 PDU Supported by SNMPv3
Item Description
GetNextRequest Requests the subsequent instance value of specified instance value in the list.
Response Responds to the corresponding various kinds of Request.
SNMPv2-Trap Informs the change of state and troubles. The format is different from SNMP
v1 trap.
GetBulkRequest Requests a number of instance value.
InformRequest Informs an event.
Report Returns a packet if the reportableFlag is set to on.
3.1.3.2 Send Trap

iPASOLINK can send SNMPv2-Trap and InformRequest initiatively to UDP Port
162. IP address of SNMP entity, security level, and user name are required to set the
Trap.
Authentic method and authentic password are required when the security level is
authNoPriv or authPriv. Encryption algorithm and encrypted password are required
when the security level is authPriv.
3.1.3.3 Security (user authentication, session management and

encryption)
SNMPv3 PDU is not authenticated by the community name as v1, v2c., but by the
user name, which requires the user registrations beforehand.
User authentication is carried out when the security level of the sent SNMP request is
authNoPriv or authPriv. The cryptographic hash function of the password is
selectable between MD5 and SHA.
Ciphered communication is enabled by the user authentication when the security

level of the sent SNMP request is authPriv. The cipher algorithm is selectable
between DES and AES. For the ciphered communication, a password must be set
when registering users.
User can also specify an SNMP Engine ID for each NE, which should be 16-byte
long and unique within the network.

3.1.4 NTP
NTP (Network Time Protocol) synchronizes the clocks of the server and associated
clients in a network, which is specified by the following RFCs:
RFC No. Title
RFC 1305 Network Time Protocol (Version 3) Specification, Implementation and

Analysis
RFC 2030 Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) Version 4 for IPv4, IPv6 and OS
iPASOLINK can be set either as NTP Client or Server. Following shows the available
functions of NTP Client and Server:
3.1.4.1 As NTP Client

When the unicast mode is selected on the NTP Client, the client sends a request to
obtain the current time to the pre-configured server, and then adjusts the clock
according to the replied information. Up to four NTP Severs can be registered via
WebLCT.
When the multicast mode is selected on the NTP Client, the client will listen to the
broadcast of the time server and then adjusts the clock according to the first received
valid broadcast and ignores the broadcasts from remaining servers if exist.
If the NTP Client receives neither a response nor broadcasts, the synchronization
among the Server and Clients cannot be accomplished, which allows to use the
current time of the equipment.
3.1.4.2 As NTP Server

When the unicast mode is selected on the NTP Server, Server will respond the current
time information to the Client.
When the multicast mode is selected, the Server will broadcast the current time
information of its own periodically.

3.1.5 FTP
FTP (File Transfer Protocol) transfers a file among NEs, and specified by the
following RFCs.
RFC No. Title
RFC 959 Original FTP spec
RFC 1123 The small FTP related section extends / clarifies RFC-959
RFC 2228 FTP security extensions (vsftpd implements the small subset needed to
support TLS / SSL connections)
RFC 2389 Proposes FEAT and OPTS commands
RFC 2428 Essentially IPv6 support
Using iPASOLINK as FTP Server provides the following functions:
3.1.5.1 Data Upload and Download Service

Data upload and download service are available; however the data download is
restricted, which can be operated only by a user with the appropriate privilege (refer
to 2.2.2 User Access Levels).
Files and the directories accessed via FTP protocol are predetermined as well as the
file names and types, which will be downloaded.
3.1.5.2 Session Management

Upon accepting the connection from external device, the system proceeds to the login
authentication process. An unauthorized user is denied.
The default setting of TCP Port 21 to listen and transfer a file on TCP port 20 can be
changed using WebLCT. When Passive Mode is selected, the port number is selected
by the equipment automatically.
If no command is issued by the Client for ninety seconds, the current TCP session
will be disconnected automatically.
3.1.5.3 User Authentication Function

iPASOLINK supports the internal authentication only.

3.1.6 SSHv2
SSHv2 (Secure Shell Version 2) is the protocol for transferring data between server
and client (CLI). The SSHv2 is based on the following RFC standards:
RFC No. Title
RFC 4250 The Secure Shell (SSH) Protocol Assigned Numbers
RFC 4251 The Secure Shell (SSH) Protocol Architecture
RFC 4252 The Secure Shell (SSH) Authentication Protocol
RFC 4253 The Secure Shell (SSH) Transport Layer Protocol
RFC 4254 The Secure Shell Connection Protocol
Using iPASOLINK as SSHv2 Server enables the following functions:
3.1.6.1 CLI
CLI operation via SSHv2 protocol is available

Upon at accepting the connection from external device, the system proceeds to the
login authentication process. An unauthorized user is not accepted. The default port
number of SSHv2 Service is 22, which cannot be changed by WebLCT.


3.1.7 SFTP
SFTP (SSH File Transfer Protocol) securely transfers a file among NEs, using the
mechanism of SSHv2. iPASOLINK uses the SFTP Server to enable the following
functions:
3.1.7.1 Providing Function of Secure File Transfer

In order to establish a secure network for uploading/downloading files, SFTP
function is provided.
3.1.7.2 Data Upload/Download Service

Data upload and download service are available; however, downloading to
iPASOLINK is available only by the user(s) who is/are authorized to write data into
iPASOLINK. Only the designated directories can be accessed by SFTP. For files such
as F/W, FPGA, Configuration Data, etc., their storage path and file names are
designated as well, depending on their types.
If 90 seconds pass without any SFTP commands issued from the client, the session is
terminated by the SFTP Command Time Out.

Upon accepting the connection from external device, the system proceeds to the login
authentication process. An unauthorized user is denied.
If 90 seconds pass without any SFTP commands issued from the client, the session is
terminated by the SFTP Command Time Out.
SFTP uses the TCP Port #22 by default.
Changing the SSH Connection Port # requires special attention since the Port # of
SSH Connection and that of SFTP connection are the same (cannot change either one
alone).


3.1.8 HTTP
HTTP (Hypertext Transfer Protocol) is the protocol for transferring data between
Web server and client (WebLCT).
The HTTP is based on the following RFC standards:
RFC No. Title
RFC 1945 Hypertext Transfer Protocol -- HTTP/1.0
RFC 2616 Hypertext Transfer Protocol -- HTTP/1.1
Using iPASOLINK as HTTP server enables the following functions:
3.1.8.1 WebLCT
WebLCT operation via HTTP protocol is available.

Upon at accepting the connection from external device, the system proceeds to the
login authentication process. An unauthorized user is not accepted.
The default port number of HTTP Service is 80, which can be changed using
WebLCT.

iPASOLINK supports the following two types of authentications:
 External RADIUS Server with internal authentication.
 Internal authentication only.

3.1.9 HTTPS
HTTPS (Hypertext Transfer Protocol over SSL/TLS) is the protocol that the
encryption function by SSL is added to HTTP used by Web Servers and Clients (Web
Browser, etc.) for receiving/transmitting data.
The HTTPS is specified by the following standard:
RFC No. Title
RFC 2818 HTTP over TLS
3.1.9.1 Providing Web Contents

Web contents via HTTPS is provided, where the multiple languages are supported.
3.1.9.2 Session Management among External Terminals

HTTPS accepts an access from the external terminal, submits the server certification
to the external terminal, carries out the process of the server authentication based on
the public-key cryptosystem, before the login authentication process. The Port # is
443 by default, which can be changed by WebLCT/SNMP.

iPASOLINK supports the following two types of authentications:
 External RADIUS Server with internal authentication.
 Internal authentication only.

3.2 Service Status Setting

Service Status Setting displays the status of service and protocol:
Procedure 3-1
submenu Security Management to select Service Status Setting. The
Service Status Setting window appears:
Figure 3-1 Service Status Setting Window (1/2)

Figure 3-2 Service Status Setting Window (2/2)

Figure 3-3 Service Status Indication
Table 3-12 Service Status Indication
Status Description
Running Protocol/Service is enabled.
Stopped Protocol/Service is disabled.

3.3 SNMP
3.3.1 Set SNMP
Procedure 3-2
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Network Management, then its
Service Status Setting window appears.
3. Click the SNMP link:
Figure 3-4 Service Status Setting Window (SNMP)
SNMP
The SNMP Setting option window appears.

4. Specify an appropriate value to each parameter.
Figure 3-5 SNMP Setting Option Window
Table 3-13 SNMP Setting Parameters
SNMPv1/v2c Enable Enables SNMPv1/SNMPv2c (Running)
Disable Disables SNMPv1/SNMPv2c (Stopped)
SNMPv3 Enable Enables SNMPv3 (Running)
Disable Disables SNMPv3 (Stopped)
UDP Port 1 to 65535 From 1 to 65535 are available for UDP Port No.
161 161 is the default UDP Port No.
CAUTION: In order to apply the values properly, CPU must be

rebooted when UDP Port Number(s) is/are changed.
5. When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.
The Service Status Setting window updates the information.

7. Confirm the displayed SNMP information.
Figure 3-7 Service Status Setting Window

3.4 SNMP Community

This operation registers, modifies, or deletes the SNMP Manager information. Only
the registered SNMP managers have the right to access the equipment. Up to ten
servers can be registered.
3.4.1 Register/Modify SNMP Community
Procedure 3-3
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Network Management, then its
3. Click a Community No. to add.
Figure 3-8 Service Status Setting Window (SNMP Community)
SNMP Community numbers

4. The SNMP Community option window appears. Specify the appropriate value
to each parameter:
Figure 3-9 SNMP Community Option Window
Table 3-14 SNMP Community Parameters
Community Name (text field) Specify an SNMP Community Name. Valid value: One to 31
characters long. A request with a different Community Name
will be rejected.
Access Level Admin Specify the user access level. Refer to Table 2-3 User Access
Privilege Levels for details.
Config
Operator
Access Control Enable Enables to restrict the access to the SNMP Manager(s).
Disable Disables to restrict the access to the SNMP Manager(s).
Access Address xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx Specifies the valid IP address or network address of the SNMP
Manager(s).
Subnet Mask x.x.x.x Specify the Subnet Mask of SNMP Manager(s).
5. Click the OK button when completed. The Information dialog box appears.

7. The Service Status Setting window updates the information. Confirm that the
newly added SNMP Community information is displayed.

3.4.2 Delete SNMP Community
Procedure 3-4
its submenu Security Management to select Service Status Setting. The
3. Click Delete SNMP Community tool button on the tool bar.
Delete SNMP Community button
4. The Delete SNMP Community option window appears. Select an SNMP

Community No. from the drop-down list, and click the OK button.
Figure 3-13 Delete SNMP Communication Option Window
Confirmation dialog box appears.

5. Click the OK button when confirmed.
selected SNMP Community information has been removed.

3.5 SNMP Trap Entry

This option configures the SNMP Trap:
3.5.1 Set/Modify SNMP Trap Entry
Procedure 3-5
3. Scroll down the main window till SNMP Trap option box appears.
4. Click SNMP Trap Entry No. of the SNMP Trap Entry field.
Figure 3-17 Service Status Setting Window (SNMP Trap Entry)
SNMP Trap Entry No.
The SNMP Trap Entry option window appears.

5. Specify the appropriate value for each parameter:
Figure 3-18 SNMP Trap Entry Option Window

Table 3-15 SNMP Trap Entry Parameters
SNMP Version SNMPv1 Set SNMP Version for Trap.

SNMPv2c
SNMPv3
PDU Type Trap Available for all SNMP Versions.
Inform SNMPv1 cannot select Inform.
IP Address xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx Enter the destination IP Address of Trap.
UDP Port 1 to 65535 Set UDP Port of Trap. [default: 162]
Community Name (text field) Enter Community Name of the Trap within 1 to 31 characters long.
This Community Name must be the same on both SNMP Server
and Agent.
Security Level NoAuthNoPriv Allows a user to log in without authentication and encryption.
AuthNoPriv A user needs authentication but no encryption to log in. Selecting

this option enables Auth Algorithm radio button below.
AuthPriv A user needs authentication and data are encrypted by DES or

AES. Selecting this option enables Priv Algorithm radio button
below.
SNMP Engine ID (text field) Assign a 16 byte value for SNMPv3 Local Engine ID, which must
be unique within the same managed network.
Auth Algorithm MD5 MD5 (Message-Digest algorithm 5) is one of the Hash Algorithm
for authentication and digital signature. In order to detect the falsifi-
cation of original data while transmitting, the Hash is generated
using the original data, which is compared at both ends of commu-
nication path.
SHA SHA (Secure Hash Algorithm) is one of the Hash Algorithm for
authentication and digital signature. In order to detect the falsifica-
tion of original data while transmitting, the 160-bit Hash is gener-
ated using the original data that is less than 2 64 bits which is
compared at both ends of communication paths.
Auth Key (read only) Valid value: Eight to 16 digits of MD5 or SHA1 public key. To enter
the Authentication Key, click Set Auth Key button on the tool bar.
Priv Algorithm DES DES (Data Encryption Standard) uses a 56-bit encryption key.
The block size is 64 bits.
AES AES (Advanced Encryption Standard) is SPN-Structured block

encryption. The block size is 128 bits, and the length of the key is
128/192/256 bits.
Priv Key (read only) Valid value: Eight to 16 digits. To enter the Privacy Key, click Set
Priv Key button on the tool bar.
NOTE: Security Level and SNMP Engine ID are the only required parameters to set for
registering SNMPv3 (inform).

6. Click the OK button when completed. Information dialog box appears.
The Service Status Setting window updates the information. Confirm that the
newly added SNMP Trap Entry information is displayed.

3.5.2 Delete SNMP Trap Entry
Procedure 3-6
3. Click Delete SNMP Trap Entry tool button on the tool bar.
Delete SNMP Trap Entry
4. The Delete SNMP Trap Entry option window appears. From the drop-down list,
select the No. of SNMP Trap Entry to be removed, and click the OK button.
Figure 3-22 Delete SNMP Trap Entry Option Window

5. Confirmation dialog box appears. Click the OK button to proceed.
The Service Status Setting window updates the information. Confirm that the
selected SNMP Trap Entry information has been removed from the display.

3.6 NTP
3.6.1 Enable NTP
Procedure 3-7
3. Scroll down the main window until the NTP option appears.
4. Click the NTP link.
Figure 3-26 Service Status Setting Window (NTP)
NTP
The NTP Setting box appears.

5. Assign the appropriate value to each parameter:
Figure 3-27 NTP Setting Option Window
Table 3-16 NTP Setting Parameters
NTP Enable Enable/Disable the NTP Protocol on the equipment.
Disable
NTP Server Mode Multicast Specify the NTP Server mode.
Unicast
Disabled
NTP Client Mode Multicast Specify NTP Client mode.
Unicast
Disabled
Stratum 2 to 15 Set Stratum level of the NTP Time Packets. The

lowest Stratum should be received in NTP PDU plus
1.
NTP Authentication Enable Enables the use of NTP Authentication.
Disable Disables the use of NTP Authentication.
Multicast Auth Key Not Used To assign the Auth Key Index, select the index number
Index from the drop-down list. Otherwise, select Not Used.
(available Auth Key Index #)
Multicast Port Bridge01 to Bridege06 Select a port to output the Multicast Time information.
This parameter is enabled when NTP Server Mode
selects Multicast.
Multicast Interval 16 to 131072s Select Multicast Interval. [unit: second]

6. Click the OK button when completed. Informati3on dialog box appears.
8. The Service Status Setting window updates the information. Confirm the
displayed NTP configuration.
Figure 3-29 Service Status Setting Window (Service Status)
Figure 3-30 Service Status Setting Window (NTP)

3.6.2 NTP Client Status
 Clicking the NTP Client Status link opens the NTP Client Status window:
Figure 3-31 NTP Client Status Window

3.7 NTP Server Address

This operation allows a user to register/modify/delete the NTP Server and its
information.
3.7.1 Register/Modify NTP Server Address
Procedure 3-8
3. Click the No. of the target NTP Server listed in NTP Server Address.
Figure 3-32 Service Status Setting Window (NTP Server Address)
No. of NTP Servers
The NTP Server Address Setting option window appears.

Figure 3-33 NTP Server Address Setting Option Window
Table 3-17 NTP Server Address Setting Parameters
IP Address xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx Enter the IP Address of the upper NTP

Server.
NTP Version 3 Specify the NTP massage version.
Poll Time 64 to 131072 Set the interval (64 × 2n) for polling NTP
Server. [unit: second; default: 64 sec]
Auth Key Index Not Used Not to use the authentication key.
(available index #) Selects an index number of the registered

authentication key to use.
5. Click the OK button when completed. Information dialog box appears.

7. Confirm that the newly added NTP Server Address information is displayed.

3.7.2 Delete NTP Server Address
Procedure 3-9
3. Click Clear NTP Server button on the tool bar.
Clear NTP Server
The Clear NTP Server option window appears.
4. From No. drop-down list, select the number of target NTP Server Address,
and the click the OK button:
Figure 3-37 NTP Server Address Setting Option Window

selected NTP Server Address information has been removed.

3.8 NTP Auth Key Setting
3.8.1 Create/Modify NTP Authentication Key Setting
3. Scroll down the main window until NTP Auth Key Setting option appears.
4. Click the number of Auth Key Index link.
Figure 3-41 Service Status Setting Window (NTP Auth Key Setting)
Auth Key Index
NTP Auth Key Setting (Modify) option window appears.

5. Specify the parameters:
Figure 3-42 NTP Auth Key Setting (Modify) Option Window
Set Auth Key tool button
Table 3-18 NTP Auth Key Setting Parameters
Auth Key Index (read only) Indicates the selected Auth Key Index number.
Auth Key ID 1 to 65535 Specify the key ID.
Auth Algorithm (read only) Indicates the specified Auth Algorithm.
Auth Key (8 characters Clicking the Set Auth Key tool button opens the Auth Key
long or more) Password Setting option window. Specify the password, then
click the OK button:
Auth Key Trust Trusted Trusts the configured Authentication Key.
Not Trusted Not to trust the configured Authentication Key.

6. When completed, click the OK button of the option window.
Figure 3-43 NTP Auth Key Setting (Modify) Option Window
8. The Service Status Setting window updates the information. Confirm the
displayed NTP Auth Key Setting information.
Figure 3-45 Service Status Setting (NTP Auth Key Setting)

3.8.2 Remove Registered NTP Authentication Key
3. Click Clear NTP Auth Key tool button.
Figure 3-46 Service Status Setting Window
Clear NTP Auth Key tool button
4. Clear NTP Auth Key option window appears. Select an index number of
Authentication Key to be removed.
Figure 3-47 Clear NTP Auth Key Option Window

6. When the process is completed, Information dialog box appears. Click the OK
button to proceed.
Auth Key registration of selected index number is removed.
Figure 3-50 Service Status Setting Window (NTP Auth Key Setting)

3.9 FTP
Procedure 3-10
3. Scroll down the main window until FTP option appears.
4. Click the FTP link.
Figure 3-51 Service Status Setting Window (FTP)
FTP
The FTP Setting option window appears.

Figure 3-52 FTP Setting Option Window
Table 3-19 FTP Setting Parameters
Parameter Value Description Recommended

Value for PNMSj
FTP Always Enable FTP is always in service. Enable

(makes PNMSj
Enable Enable FTP service to open or to close on demand. effective)
Disable Disables FTP service.
TCP Port 1 to 65535 Set TCP Port of FTP Server (for incoming 21
(Command) commands). [default: 21]
TCP Port 1 to 65535 Set TCP Port of FTP Server (for outgoing 20
(Data) commands) [default: 20]
MAX Session 1 to 3 Specify the maximum number of user sessions at a 1

time. [default: 1]
Auto Stop Enable Auto Stop disconnects a session automatically if no Enable

operation is carried out for 90 seconds.
Disable FTP Server will not disconnect a session whether or

not a session has an operation.
6. Click the OK button when completed.
7. Warning dialog box appears. Click the OK button to proceed.
Figure 3-53 Warning Dialog Box

8. Information dialog box appears. Click the OK button.
9. Confirm the displayed FTP information:

Figure 3-56 Service Status Setting Window (FTP)

3.10 SSHv2
Procedure 3-11
3. Scroll down the main window until SSHv2 option appears.
4. Click the SSHv2 link.
Figure 3-57 Service Status Setting Window (SSHv2, SFTP)
click
SSHv2/SFTP Setting option window appears.

5. Specify the values, then click the OK button.
Figure 3-58 SSHv2/SFTP Setting Option Window
Table 3-20 SSHv2/SFTP Setting Parameters
SSHv2 Server Enable Enables SSHv2 Server.
Disable Disables SSHv2 Server.
SSHv2 Client Enable Enables SSHv2 Client.
Disable Disables SSHv2 Client.
SFTP Disable See 3.1.7 SFTP.
Enable
Always Enable
Auto Disable Enable
Disable
Service Status Setting window updates the information.
7. Verify the displayed SFTP information.

Figure 3-60 Service State Setting Window (Service Status)
Figure 3-61 Service State Setting Window (SSHv2)

3.11 SFTP
Procedure 3-12
3. Scroll down the main window until SFTP option appears.
4. Click the SFTP link.
Figure 3-62 Service Status Setting Window (SFTP)
click
SSHv2/SFTP Setting option window appears.

5. Specify the values, then click the OK button.
Figure 3-63 SSHv2/SFTP Setting Option Window
Table 3-21 SSHv2/SFTP Setting Parameters
SSHv2 Server Enable See 3.1.6 SSHv2.
Disable
SSHv2 Client Enable
Disable
SFTP Disable Disables the SFTP service.
Enable Enable SFTP service to open or to close on

demand.
Always Enable SFTP is always in service.
Auto Disable Enable Auto Disable disconnects a session automatically

if no operation is carried out for 90 seconds.
Disable SFTP Server will not disconnect a session if a

session has no operation.
Service Status Setting window updates the information.

7. Verify the displayed SFTP information.
Figure 3-65 Service State Setting Window (Service Status)
Figure 3-66 Service State Setting Window (SFTP)

3.12 HTTP
Procedure 3-13
3. Scroll down the main window until HTTP option appears.
4. Click the HTTP link.
Figure 3-67 Service Status Setting Window (HTTP)
HTTP
The HTTP/HTTPS Setting option window appears.

Figure 3-68 HTTP/HTTPS Setting Option Window
Table 3-22 HTTP Setting Parameters
HTTP Enable (Running) Enable HTTP service.
Disable (Stopped) Disable HTTP service.
TCP Port 1 to 65535 Set TCP Port of HTTP Server. [default: 80]
HTTPS See 3.13 HTTPS.

———
TCP Port
Figure 3-69 Waring Dialog Box
9. The Service Status Setting window updates the information.

10. Confirm the displayed HTTP information:
Figure 3-72 Service Status Setting Window (HTTP)

3.13 HTTPS
Procedure 3-14
3. Scroll the main window to display HTTPS appears.
4. Click the HTTPS link.
Figure 3-73 Service Status Setting Window (HTTPS)
HTTPS
The HTTPS Setting option window appears.

5. Set the appropriate values, then click the OK button.
Figure 3-74 HTTP/HTTPS Setting Option Window
Table 3-23 HTTPS Setting Parameters
HTTP See 3.12 HTTP.

———
TCP Port
HTTPS Enable Puts HTTPS Server into service.
Disable Disables HTTPS service.
TCP Port 1 to 65535 Set TCP Port of HTTPS Server. [default: 443]
Figure 3-75 Waring Dialog Box

9. The Service Status Setting window updates the information.
10. Confirm the displayed HTTPS information:
Figure 3-78 Service Status Setting Window (HTTPS)

3.14 RADIUS Setting

Following provides the settings of Remote Authentication Dial In User Service
Server.
NOTE: This operation is available only by users whose access level is Admin.
 RADIUS Setting
Specifies the method of authentications at login.
 RADIUS Server Setting

Specifies the setting values to User Service Server.
 Clear RADIUS Server

Removes the specified settings of RADIUS Server.

3.14.1 Set RADIUS
Procedure 3-15
submenu Security Management to select RADIUS Setting. The RADIUS
Setting window appears.
3. Click the RADIUS link.
Figure 3-79 RADIUS Setting Window
click
RADIUS Setting option window appears.

4. Specify the values, then click the OK button:
Figure 3-80 RADIUS Setting Option Window
Table 3-24 RADIUS Setting Parameters
Timeout 1 to 60 Specifies a period to expire the Accept-Request message.

[unit: second[
Retry Count 0 to 5 Specifies the number of times to resend the Accept-Request

messages.
Default Operator Specifies the privilege levels to vendor-specific messages that

Permissions do not have the authentication information.
CONFIG
ADMIN
Deny Login
The RADIUS Setting window updates the information.

6. Verify the displayed information.

3.14.2 Set RADIUS Server
Procedure 3-16
3. Click the RADIUS Server No. link.
click
RADIUS Server Setting option window for the selected Server appears.

4. In the RADIUS Server Setting option window, specify the values.
Figure 3-84 RADIUS Server Setting Option Window
Set Secret Key button
5. Click the Set Secret Key tool button.
6. The Set Secret Key option window appears. Enter the password as the
authentication key to RADIUS:
Figure 3-85 Set Secret Key Option Window
i) Enter a new password to New Secret Key entry field.

ii) Enter the same password to Re-Enter entry field for confirmation.
iii) Click the OK button. The Set Secret Key option window disappears.
Table 3-25 RADIUS Server Setting Parameters
IP Address x.x.x.x Enter the IP Address of RADIUS Server.
Port No. 1 to 65535 Enter the number of Port connecting for authentication.
Encryption User Communication with a shared key for the authentication by the external server.
Method (RADIUS)
CHAP MD5 with a shared key for the authentication by the external server (RADIUS).
Secret Key (read only) Indicates the authentication key to RADIUS that is specified by the Set Secret
Key option.

7. When the parameters are specified, click the OK button.
9. The RADIUS Setting window updates the information. Verify the displayed
information.

3.14.3 Remove Registered RADIUS Server
Procedure 3-17
3. Click the Clear RADIUS Server tool button.
Clear RADIUS Server tool button
4. Clear RADIUS Server option window appears. Select the target RADIUS
Server number from the No. drop-down list, then click the OK button.
Figure 3-89 Clear RADIUS Server Option Window

7. The RADIUS Setting window updates the formation. Verify the displayed
information.

3-68/END SECURITY MANAGEMENT

EQUIPMENT SETUP 4-1
4. EQUIPMENT SETUP
4.1 Overview
The Equipment Setup allows more detailed settings than those done by the Easy
Setup Wizard. Some parameters are included in the Easy Setup Wizard.
 Equipment Configuration
Specifies NE Name.
 Radio Configuration
Specifies Channel Spacing, Mode, RF Frequency for Radio.
 AMBR Configuration
Specifies the mode type and range for AMBR.

4-2 EQUIPMENT SETUP
4.2 Equipment Configuration
Procedure 4-1
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Equipment Setup to select Equipment
Configuration.
3. The Equipment Configuration window appears. Click Setup tool button on the
tool bar.
Figure 4-1 Equipment Setup — Equipment Configuration Window
Setup tool button
4. Equipment Configuration option window appears. Enter the equipment name to

NE Name field, then click the OK button.

EQUIPMENT SETUP 4-3
Figure 4-2 Equipment Configuration Option Window

Equipment Name
OK button
NOTE: The display on the left shows the current setup, while that on the right is for a
user to edit the configuration.
Table 4-1 Equipment Configuration Parameter
NE Name (text field) Enter the equipment name. Valid value is 1 to 32

characters long.

4-4 EQUIPMENT SETUP
5. When the process is completed, Information dialog box appears. Click the OK
button to proceed.
6. The Equipment Setup — Equipment Configuration window updates the

information. Confirm the displayed equipment configuration.
Figure 4-4 Equipment Setup — Equipment Configuration Window (example)

EQUIPMENT SETUP 4-5
4.3 Radio Configuration
Procedure 4-2
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Equipment Setup to select Radio
Configuration.
3. The Equipment Setup — Radio Configuration window appears. Click Setup

tool button on the tool bar.
Figure 4-5 Equipment Setup — Radio Configuration Window
Setup tool button
Radio Configuration >> Step1 option window appears.

4-6 EQUIPMENT SETUP
4. Specify parameters in New Setting option box:
Figure 4-6 Radio Configuration >> Step 1 Option Window

New Setting
Next button
Table 4-2 Detailed MODEM Setting Parameters (1 of 2)

Channel Spacing 62.5MHz Specify the radio channel spacing/separation.
(enabled values depend on 125MHz NOTE: Refer to 2.2.1 Radio Functions in
Software License) Specification manual for the information regarding
250MHz
the combinations of Channel Spacing and Reference
500MHz Modulations.
750MHz
1000MHz
2000MHz

EQUIPMENT SETUP 4-7
Table 4-2 Detailed MODEM Setting Parameters (2 of 2)

Reference Modulation QPSK Select a reference modulation from the list. Available
Reference Modulation differs according to the channel
8PSK
spacing to use.
16 QAM
This option is enabled depending on the obtained
32 QAM Software License.
64 QAM NOTE: Refer to 2.2.1 Radio Functions in
Specification manual for the information regarding
128 QAM
the combinations of Channel Spacing and Reference
256 QAM Modulations.
Radio Mode High Capacity High System Gain can be selected when Channel
Spacing is set to 750MHz.
High System Gain
ETH Bandwidth [Mbps] (read only) Indicates the Ethernet bandwidth value that is
automatically calculated.
TX RF Frequency [MHz] 71125.00 to 73625.00 Values for Sub-Band A, Lower Band.
73375.00 to 75875.00 Values for Sub-Band B, Lower Band.
81125.00 to 83625.00 Values for Sub-Band A, Higher Band.
83375.00 to 85875.00 Values for Sub-Band B, Higher Band.
RX RF Frequency [MHz] (read only) Indicates the incoming radio frequency value.
Frame ID 1 to 32 Set the Frame ID.
TX Power Control MTPC Manual Transmitter Power Control [manual control]
ATPC Automatic Transmitter Power Control [automatic control]
5. When completed, click the Next button. Radio Configuration >> Step2 Setting
Confirmation Screen window appears.
6. Confirm that the fields of setup parameters change to blue, then click the OK button.

4-8 EQUIPMENT SETUP
Figure 4-7 Radio Configuration — Step2 Window (example)
OK button
Warning dialog box appears.
7. Information dialog box appears. Click OK button to proceed.
8. Confirmation dialog box appears.

EQUIPMENT SETUP 4-9
Go to 4.4 AMBR Configuration, Step 1.

4-10 EQUIPMENT SETUP
4.4 AMBR Configuration

Procedure 4-3
Launch the AMBR Configuration >> Step 1 AMBR Operation option window if it is
not displayed:
i) Launch and log in to WebLCT.
ii) In the MENU frame on the left, expand Equipment Setup to select AMBR
Configuration. The Equipment Setup — AMBR Configuration window
appears.
iii) Click the Setup tool button.
Figure 4-10 Equipment Setup — AMBR Configuration Window
Setup tool button
AMBR Configuration >> Step1 option window appears.

EQUIPMENT SETUP 4-11
1. Specify parameters in the New Setting option box:
Figure 4-11 AMBR Configuration >> Step1 Option Window
New Setting
Next button
 Select the AMR/AMBR Mode to enable the options.
 Set the Range of modulations to be used during AMR/AMBR operation.

4-12 EQUIPMENT SETUP
Table 4-3 AMBR Operation Parameters
AMBR Operation Non Operation Disables AMBR (Adaptive Modulation and Bandwidth
Radio) function.
AMR Mode Enables AMR (Adaptive Modulation Radio) function.
AMBR Mode Enables AMBR function.
AMBR Range MIN QPSK(1/4BW) Specifies the Range of AMR/AMBR.

QPSK(1/2BW) The range MIN  Reference Modulation is shown for
choices to choose.
QPSK
QPSK(1/4BW), QPSK(1/2BW) are shown in the AMBR
8PSK
Mode only.
16QAM
32QAM
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM
MAX QPSK(1/4BW) Specifies the Range of AMR/AMBR.
QPSK(1/2BW) The range Reference Modulation  MAX is shown for
choices to choose.
QPSK
QPSK(1/4BW), QPSK(1/2BW) are shown in the AMBR
8PSK
Mode only.
16QAM
32QAM
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM
NOTE: A modulation highlighted by light green is the reference modulation that is

specified by the Radio Configuration.
2. When completed, click the Next button.

EQUIPMENT SETUP 4-13
3. AMBR Configuration >> Step2 window appears.
Figure 4-12 AMBR Configuration >> Step2 Window
4. Confirm that the fields of modified parameters change to blue, and then click the OK
button.

4-14/END EQUIPMENT SETUP
AMBR Configuration window updates the information.
7. Confirm that all parameters are set.
Figure 4-15 AMBR Configuration Window

NETWORK MANAGEMENT 5-1
5. NETWORK MANAGEMENT
5.1 Overview
This menu allows a user to check and configure the network management parameters
of NEs to be managed by the network management system.
 Port/VLAN Setting
This option determines the use of Ethernet Port, MODEM Port and Inband
Management VLAN, which enables or disables the connection to the NMS.
 Bridge Setting
This option specifies the IP Address of NE Branch (Ethernet Port, MODEM Port,
Inband Management VLAN).
 LLDP Setting
This option configures the Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP).
 Routing Setting
This option configures the static route information.
 IP Access Control Setting

This setting allows a user to filter IP packets on both the incoming and outgoing
interfaces. The filter can be effective on all the management interfaces except LCT
Port,
 ARP Setting
This option configures the static ARP Information.
 DHCP Server/Relay Setting

This setting allocates IP addresses to user ports via inband VLAN. For DHCP
Server, up to 3 IP subnets, and for DHCP Relay, up to 4 IP subnets are available.
 Adjust Current Date and Time

This operation adjusts the date and time on an NE.

5-2 NETWORK MANAGEMENT
5.2 Port/VLAN Setting
5.2.1 Ethernet Port Setting
Procedure 5-1
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Network Management Setting to select
Port/VLAN Setting. The Port/VLAN Setting window appears.
3. Click Ethernet Port Setting link.
Figure 5-1 Ethernet Port Setting Window
Ethernet Port Setting

6. Ethernet Port Setting option window appears. Specify parameters:
Figure 5-4 Ethernet Port Setting Option Window

Table 5-1 Ethernet Port Setting Parameters
Item DCN ——
Port Mode User Port Selects the mode of DCN port.
Management Port (LCT)
Management Port
(NMS)
Port Usage Used Set to use or not to use the Port for NMS/NE1.
Not Used
Speed Status (read only) Indicates the current speed.
Duplex Status (read only) Indicates the current duplex status.
LCT Port Setting
Restrict LCT Any Not to restrict the WebLCT connection.

Connection
Only to Local NE Allows the local NE only to connect WebLCT.
Only to Neighbor NE Allows the neighbor NE on the radio links only to

connect WebLCT.
8. Information dialog box appears.Click the OK button to proceed.
The Ethernet Port Setting option box in the Port/VLAN Setting window
updates the information.

9. Confirm that all the parameters are set:
Figure 5-6 Port/VLAN Setting Window

5.2.2 MODEM Port Setting
Procedure 5-2
3. Click MODEM Port Setting link.
MODEM Port Setting

4. MODEM Port Setting option window appears. Specify parameters:
Figure 5-8 MODEM Port Setting Option Window
Table 5-2 MODEM Port Setting Parameters
ITEM MODEM ——
Port Usage Used Set to use or not to use the MODEM Port.
Not Used
M-Plane Bandwidth Limitation
Bandwidth Limitation Enable Set to limit or not to limit the M-Plane bandwidth.
Disable
Bandwidth 500 to 2000 Set the limitation of M-Plane bandwidth. [unit: kbps]
M-Plane Priority
CoS 0 to 7 Assign the priority.
Highest

The MODEM Port Setting option box in the Port/VLAN Setting window
updates the information.

5.2.3 Inband Management VLAN Setting
The procedure to set Inband Management VLAN differs according to the use of
VLAN mode on the user interfaces.
5.2.3.1 For VLAN Mode 802.1Q
Procedure 5-3
3. Click Inband Management VLAN Setting link.
Inband Management VLAN Setting

4. Inband Management Setting option window appears. Specify parameters:
Figure 5-12 Inband Management VLAN Setting Option Window
Table 5-3 Inband Management VLAN Setting Parameters
ITEM Inband Management ——
VLAN Usage Used Set to use or not to use VLAN.
Not Used
VLAN ID 1 to 4094 Assign the VLAN ID to the Inband Management VLAN.
CoS 0 to 7 Assign the Class of Service
VLAN Tag Setting (This option is currently disabled.)
VLAN Tag Type C-Tag Enables the use of C-Tag to the Inband Management VLAN.
S-Tag Enables the use of S-Tag to the Inband Management VLAN.
The Inband Management VLAN Setting option box in the Port/VLAN Setting
window updates the information.


5.2.3.2 For VLAN Mode 802.1ad
Procedure 5-4
3. Click Inband Management VLAN Setting link.
Inband Management VLAN Setting
Inband Management Setting option window appears.

4. Specify parameters:
Figure 5-16 Inband Management VLAN Setting Option Window
clicking S-VLAN ID link opens

S-VALN Mapping option window
Table 5-4 Inband Management VLAN Setting Parameters
ITEM Inband Management ——
VLAN Usage Used Set to use or not to use VLAN.
Not Used
VLAN ID 1 to 4094 Assign the VLAN ID to the Inband Management VLAN.
CoS 0 to 7 Assign the Class of Service
S-VLAN ID 1 to 4094 Select the S-VLAN ID on the user interfaces to be mapped

Mapping to the inband Management VLAN
VLAN Tag Setting
VLAN Tag Type C-Tag Enables the use of C-Tag to the Inband Management VLAN.
S-Tag Enables the use of S-Tag to the Inband Management VLAN.

The Inband Management VLAN Setting option box in the Port/VLAN Setting
window updates the information.

5.2.4 VLAN Setting Link
 Clicking the VLAN Setting link moves to the 8.4 VLAN Setting window under
the category of ETH Function Setting in Provisioning.
Figure 5-19 Link to VLAN Setting Window
Link to VLAN Setting window

5.3 Bridge Setting

Procedure 5-5
Bridge Setting. The Bridge Setting window appears.
3. Click Setup tool button on the tool bar.
Figure 5-20 Bridge Setting Window
Setup tool button
The Bridge Setting option window appears.

Figure 5-21 Bridge Setting Option Window
Table 5-5 Bridge Setting Parameters
Default Gateway x.x.x.x Enter the address of default gateway.
Bridge Usage Used To enable the Bridge use, select Used.

Not Used
Bridge IP Address x.x.x.x Enter the IP Address to assign.
Bridge Subnet Mask x.x.x.x Enter the subnet mask.
Primary IP Address (check box) Tick a box to select a Bridge to assign the Primary IP Address.
NMS (check box) Tick a box to select a port to be accommodate in the Bridge.
MODEM (check box)
Management VLAN Used Set to use or not to use the Management VLAN. Selecting
Usage Used enables the Management VLAN ID option below.
Not Used
Management VLAN ID (check box) Enter the VLAN ID.
STP Auto Configuration Auto Select an option to configure STP automatically or manually.
Manual
STP Usage Used Set to use or not to use the STP.
Not Used

7. Bridge Setting window updates the information. Verify the displayed

information.

5.4 LLDP Setting
Procedure 5-6
LLDP Setting. The Bridge Setting window appears.
3. Click Setup tool button on the tool bar.
Figure 5-24 LLDP Setting Window
Setup tool button
4. LLDP Setting option window appears. Specify parameters.
Figure 5-25 LLDP Setting Option Window

Table 5-6 LLDP Setting Parameters
TX Interval 5 to 32767 Specify the transmission interval. [unit: second]
TX Hold 2 to 10 Specify the time-to-live value expressed as a multiple of TX

Interval. [unit: times]
Item / Port NMS ——
Link (read only) Indicates the current state.
LLDP Usage Used Select to set Use or Not to Use the Link Layer Discovery Protocol.
Selecting Used enables the LLDP Mode option below.
Unused
LLDP Mode Standard Enables to run the standard LLDP MAC.
Proprietary MAC Enables to run NEC proprietary LLDP MAC. This option is helpful
to locate an iPASOLINK where an L2SW discarding standard
LLDP frames is in between two iPASOLINKs’ management ports.
7. LLDP Setting window updates the information. Verify the displayed information.
Figure 5-27 LLDP Setting Window

5.5 Routing Setting

This operation specifies the static route for the particular network or IP Address.
5.5.1 Routing Protocol Usage
Procedure 5-7
Routing Setting. The Routing Setting window appears.
3. Click a link of Routing Protocol.
Figure 5-28 Routing Setting Window
click
4. Routing Setting — Routing Protocol option window appears. Select Used or

Not Used by clicking its radio button, then click the OK button.
Figure 5-29 Routing Setting — Routing Protocol Option Window

Table 5-7 Routing Setting — Routing Protocol Parameters
Routing Protocol Used Enable the use of Routing Protocol.
Nor Used Disables the use of Routing Protocol.
6. The Routing Setting window updates the information. Confirm that the newly
added route information is displayed.

5.5.2 Add Routing Setting
Procedure 5-8
3. Click Add tool button on the tool bar.
Add tool button
Routing Setting (Add) option window appears.

4. Enter the IP Address, Subnet Mask Address, and Gateway Address, then click the
OK button.
Figure 5-33 Routing Setting (Add) Option Window
Table 5-8 Routing Setting (Add) Parameters
IP Address x.x.x.x Enter the IP Address.
Subnet Mask x.x.x.x Enter the subnet mask.
Gateway x.x.x.x Enter the gateway address.
6. The Routing Setting window updates the information. Confirm that the newly
added route information is displayed.

5.5.3 Modify Routing Setting
Procedure 5-9
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Network Management Configuration to

select Routing Setting. The Routing Setting window appears.
3. Click the linked IP address of the target object.
click the link
Routing Setting (Modify) option window appears.

4. Modify parameter(s), then click the OK button.
Figure 5-37 Routing Setting (Modify) Option Window
6. The Routing Setting window updates the information. Confirm the display for
the modified information.

5.5.4 Delete Routing Setting
Procedure 5-10
3. Click Delete tool button on the tool bar.
Delete tool button
Routing Setting (Delete) option window appears.

4. Enter the target address into the IP Address field, then click the OK button.
Figure 5-41 Routing Setting (Delete) Option Window
6. The Routing Setting option window updates the information. Confirm that the
selected network address has been removed.
Figure 5-43 Routing Setting Option Window

5.6 IP Access Control Setting
5.6.1 Input Filter List
5.6.1.1 Add Entry
Procedure 5-11

select IP Access Control Setting. The IP Access Control Setting window
appears.
3. In the Input Filter List tabbed page, click the Add Entry tool button on the tool
bar.
Figure 5-44 IP Access Control Setting Window
Input Filter List tab

Add Entry tool button
The Input Filter Entry (Add) option window appears.

4. Specify the filter condition:
Figure 5-45 Input Filter Entry (Add) Option Window
Table 5-9 Input Filter Entry (Add) Parameters

Entry No. 1 to 50 Specify the entry number.
Input Index Any Select the ingress port.
Bridge01 to Bridge06
Source IP Address x.x.x.x Specify the source IP Address of the incoming packets.
(0.0.0.0: Any)
Source Subnet x.x.x.x Specify the Subnet Mask of the source IP Address of the
Mask incoming packets. (0.0.0.0: Any)
Protocol Any Selects no specific Protocol.
ICMP Selects Internet Control Message Protocol.
TCP Selects TCP/IP Protocol. Selecting this option enables the
Destination Port option.
UDP Selects User Datagram Protocol. Selecting this option
enables Destination Port option.
Other Selecting Other enables the field below to set the Port
Number. Valid values are 1 to 255.
Destination Port Any (check box)  Check (leave a tick in the check box) to set no specific
port for the destination.
 Uncheck (remove a tick from the check box) to specify
the destination port.
1 to 65535 Select a port for the destination.
Action Permit Allows the packets that meet the specified conditions.
Deny Discards the packets that meet the specified conditions.

NOTE: Filter entries are applied to whole DCN traffic except LCT port. The traffic via
LCT is controlled by LCT Port Setting that is in the General Setting (Detail) of
Network Management Configuration menu. For in-band interface, filter entries
are applied to the traffic that is toward the CPU where the traffic is sent to the
next hop.
The IP Access Control Setting window updates the information.
7. Confirm that the newly added filter information displayed.

5.6.1.2 Modify Entry
Procedure 5-12

select IP Access Control Setting. The IP Access Control Setting window
appears.
3. In the Input Filter List tabbed page, click the Entry No. of the target.
Entry Number(s)
The Input Filter Entry (Modify) option window appears.

4. Specify the filter condition, then click the OK button.
Figure 5-49 Input Filter Entry (Modify) Option Window
Table 5-10 Input Filter Entry (Modify) Parameters

Entry No. (read only) Indicates the selected Entry No.
Input Index Any Selects the ingress port.
Source IP Address x.x.x.x Specify the source IP Address of the incoming packets.
Source Subnet Mask x.x.x.x Specify the Subnet Mask of the source IP Address of the
incoming packets.
Protocol Any Selects no specific Protocol.
ICMP Selects Internet Control Message Protocol.
TCP Selects TCP/IP Protocol. Selecting this option enables
the Destination Port option.
UDP Selects User Datagram Protocol. Selecting this option
enables the Destination Port option.
Other Selecting Other enables the field below to set the Port
Numbers.
Destination Port Any (check box)  Check (leave a tick in the check box) to set no specific
 Uncheck (remove a tick from the check box) to specify
the destination port.
Action Permit Allows the packets that meet the specified conditions.
Deny Discards the packets that meet the specified conditions.

7. Confirm that the modified filter information is displayed.
Figure 5-51 IP Address Control Setting Window

5.6.1.3 Delete Entry
Procedure 5-13
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Network Management to select IP

Access Control Setting. The IP Access Control Setting window appears.
3. In the Input Filter List tabbed page, click the Delete Entry tool button on the tool
bar.

Delete Entry tool button
4. The Input Filter Entry (Delete) option window appears. Enter the target Entry
No., then click the OK button.
Figure 5-53 Input Filter Entry (Delete) Option Window

6. Information dialog box appears.Click the OK button.
7. The IP Access Control Setting window updates the information. Confirm that
the selected filter information has been removed.

5.6.1.4 Modify Rule
Procedure 5-14

3. In the Input Filter List tabbed page, click the Modify Rule tool button on the tool
bar.
Modify Rule tool button
4. The Input Filter Rule option window appears. Set the filter conditions:
Figure 5-58 Input Filter Rule Option Window

Table 5-11 Input Filter Rule Parameters
Input Filter Rule Enable Enables the configured input filters.
Disable Disables the configured input filters.
Default Action Permit Forwards an IP packet that does not meet the configured
conditions.
Deny Discards an IP packet that does not meet the configured

conditions.
7. The IP Access Control Setting window updates the information. Confirm that
the modified filter information is displayed

5.6.2 Forwarding Filter List
5.6.2.1 Add Entry
Procedure 5-15

3. In the Forwarding Filter List tabbed page, click the Add Entry tool button on the
tool bar.
Figure 5-61 IP Access Control Window
Add Entry tool button Forwarding Filter List tab
The Forwarding Filter Entry (Add) option window appears.

4. Set the filter conditions:
Figure 5-62 Forwarding Filter Entry (Add) Option Window
Table 5-12 Forwarding Filter Entry (Add) Parameters (1 of 2)
Entry No. 1 to 50 Enter the entry number.
Output Index Any Selects the egress port.
Source IP x.x.x.x Specify the Source IP Address to output packets.

Address
Source Subnet x.x.x.x Specify the Subnet Mask of the Source IP Address for
Mask output packets.
Destination IP x.x.x.x Specify the Destination IP Address to output packets.

Address
Destination x.x.x.x Specify the Subnet Mask of the Destination IP Address

Subnet Mask for the output packets.

Table 5-12 Forwarding Filter Entry (Add) Parameters (2 of 2)
Protocol Any Select a Protocol for the IP Packets.
ICMP • Selecting Other requires to set port numbers.

• Selecting TCP or UDP enables the Source Port and
TCP
Destination Port options.
UDP
Other
Source Port Any (check box) Check (leave a tick in) the check box to set no specific
port for the source.
1 to 65535 Select a port for the source.
Destination Port Any (check box) Check (leave a tick in) the check box to set no specific
Action Permit Forwards a packet that meets the conditions above.
Deny Discards a packet that meets the conditions above.

7. Confirm that the newly added filter information is displayed.
(scrolled to right end)

5.6.2.2 Modify Entry
Procedure 5-16
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Equipment Setup, then expand Network
Management to select IP Access Control Setting. The IP Access Control
3. In the Forwarding Filter List tabbed page, click the Entry No. of the target:
Forwarding Filter List tab

Entry Number(s)
Forwarding Filter Entry (Modify) option window appears.
4. Modify the filter conditions:

Figure 5-66 Forwarding Filter Entry (Modify) Option Window
Table 5-13 Forwarding Filter Entry (Modify) Parameters (1 of 2)
Entry No. (read only) Indicates the selected Entry No.
Output Index Any Selects the egress port.
Source IP Address x.x.x.x Specify the Source IP Address to output packets.
Source Subnet Mask x.x.x.x Specify the Subnet Mask of the Source IP Address
for output packets.
Destination IP Address x.x.x.x Specify the Destination IP Address to output

packets.
Destination Subnet Mask x.x.x.x Specify the Subnet Mask of the Destination IP
Address for the output packets.

Table 5-13 Forwarding Filter Entry (Modify) Parameters (2 of 2)
Protocol Any Select a Protocol for the IP Packets.
ICMP w Selecting Other requires to set port numbers.

w Selecting TCP or UDP enables the Source Port
TCP
and Destination Port options.
UDP
Other
Source Port Any (check box) Check (leave a tick in) the check box to set no
specific port for the source.
1 to 65535 Select a port for the source.
Destination Port Any (check box) Check (leave a tick in) the check box to set no
specific port for the destination.
Action Permit Forwards a packet that meets the conditions above.
Deny Discards a packet that meets the conditions above.

7. Confirm the display for the modified filter conditions.
(Scrolled to the rightmost field)

5.6.2.3 Delete Entry
Procedure 5-17

3. In the Forwarding Filter List tabbed page, click the Delete Entry tool button on
the tool bar.

Delete Entry tool button
4. Forwarding Filter Entry (Delete) option window appears. Enter the Entry No. of
the target, then click the OK button.
Figure 5-70 Forwarding Filter Entry (Delete) Option Window

7. Confirm that the selected filter information has been removed.

5.6.2.4 Modify Rule
Procedure 5-18 Forwarding Filter List — Modify Rule

3. In the Forwarding Filter List tabbed page, click the Modify Rule tool button on
the tool bar.
Modify Rule tool button
4. Forwarding Filter Rule option window appears. Modify the filter condition:
Figure 5-75 Forwarding Filter Rule Option Window

Table 5-14 Forwarding Filter Rule Parameters
Forwarding Filter Enable Enables the configured forwarding filters.

Rule
Disable Disables the configured forwarding filters.
Default Action Permit Forwards an IP packet that does not meet the
configured conditions.
Deny Discards an IP packet that does not meet the

configured conditions.
7. The IP Access Control Setting window updates the information. Confirm the
display for the modified filter information.

5.7 ARP Setting
5.7.1 View ARP Cache
Procedure 5-19
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Network Management to select ARP
Setting. The ARP Setting window appears.
3. Click the ARP Cache tab. The ARP Cache data appears.
Figure 5-78 ARP Setting Window

ARP Cache tab
Table 5-15 ARP Cache Parameters
IP Address (read only) Indicates the IP Address corresponding to the media-

dependent ’physical’ address.
MAC Address (read only) Indicates the media-dependent ’physical’ address.
Type (read only) Indicates the type of mapping.
State (read only) Indicates the Neighbor Unreachability Detection state

for the interface when the address mapping in this
entry is used.

5.7.2 Static ARP
5.7.2.1 Add Static ARP
Procedure 5-20
3. In the Static ARP tabbed page, click the Add tool button on the tool bar.
Add tool button Static ARP tab
4. ARP Setting (Add) option window appears. Enter the IP Address and MAC
Address to assign ARP configuration.
Figure 5-80 ARP Setting (Add) Option Window

Table 5-16 ARP setting Parameters
IP Address x.x.x.x Enter the IP address.
MAC Address x.x.x.x Enter the MAC Address.
7. The ARP Setting window updates the information. Confirm the display for the
added ARP information.

5.7.2.2 Modify Static ARP Setting
Procedure 5-21
3. In the Static ARP tabbed page, click the IP Address link of target Static ARP.
click Static ARP tab
ARP Setting (Modify) option window appears.
4. Modify the MAC Address to assign ARP configuration.

Figure 5-84 ARP Setting (Modify) Option Window
7. The ARP Setting window updates the information. Confirm the display for the
modified ARP information.

5.7.2.3 Delete Static ARP Setting
Procedure 5-22
3. In the Static ARP tabbed page, click the Delete tool button.
Delete tool button

Static ARP tab
ARP Setting (Modify) option window appears.

4. Tick a box of target address to remove. Ticking a box on top selects all the
registered addresses.
Figure 5-88 ARP Setting (Delete) Option Window
Tick this box

to select all
The ARP Setting window updates the information.

8. Confirm the display for the removed ARP information.

5.8 DHCP Server/Relay Setting
5.8.1 Set DHCP Server
Procedure 5-23
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Network Management to select DHCP
Server/Relay Setting.
3. The DHCP Server/Relay Setting window appears. Click DHCP No.
Figure 5-92 DHCP Server/Relay Setting Window
DHCP number
DHCP Server/Relay Setting option window appears.

4. Select DHCP Server from the Server/Relay drop-down list, and specify the
remaining options:
Figure 5-93 DHCP Server/Relay Option Window
Table 5-17 DHCP Server/Relay Setting Parameters
Server/Relay Disable Not to use DHCP.
DHCP Server Set DHCP Server.
DHCP Relay Do not select this choice here.
Bridge No. (IP (available No and Registered and available Bridge numbers (IP addresses) is/are
Address) IP addresses) listed to be selected.
DHCP Server Address —— This option is enabled when the choice is DHCP Relay.
IP Address Range 192.168.xxx.xxx Specify the starting address of the range of Class C Private IP
(Start) Address.
IP Address Range 192.168.yyy.yyy Specify the ending address of the range of Class C Private IP
(End) Address.
Exception (Start) ***.***.***.*** Specify the starting address of the exceptional IP Address
range.
Exception (End) ***.***.***.*** Specify the ending address of the exculpation IP Address
range,
Security Any No security (allows any MAC address)
Only Registered Allows only clients that have the registered MAC Addresses to
lease IP address.

5. Click the Detail link (lower right of the option window).
6. DHCP Server Detail Setting option window appears. Specify the parameters:
Figure 5-94 DHCP Server Detail Setting Option Window
Table 5-18 DHCP Server Detail Setting Parameters

Lease Time 0 to 72 [h] Specify a period of leasing IP Address. [unit: hour]
Default Gateway Same as Bridge Set the same Default Gate Way as that of Bridge Interface to
Address Interface lease. The Bridge numbers have been selected by the Network
Management procedures.
Specify Specify the Default Gateway Address.
Disabled No Default Gateway will be leased.
DNS Server Address Used Selects to use DNS Server.
Not Used Selects not to use DNS Server.
Primary —— When the option above (DNS Server Address) selects Used,
these options are enabled. Specify the Primary and Secondary
Secondary ——
addresses of DNS Server.
Other Option Used To set more parameters below, select Used.
Not Used To ignore setting the parameters below, select Not Used.
ID 0 to 255 Select an ID number as the additional information.

Table 5-18 DHCP Server Detail Setting Parameters

Type IP Address Selecting this option allows to enter the IP Address into the
Value field below.
String Selecting this option allows to enter the alpha-numeral
characters into the Value field below.
Octet String Selecting this option allows to enter the information by octet
strings into the Value field below.
Value —— Enter the additional information by the selected method above.
7. When completed, click the OK button to close the DHCP Server Detail Setting
option window.
8. Click the OK button to close the DHCP Server/Relay Setting option window.
10. The DHCP Server/Relay Setting window updates the information. Confirm the
display for the modified filter information.


5.8.2 Set DHCP Relay
Procedure 5-24 Set DHCP Relay
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Network Management to select DHCP
Server/Relay Setting.
3. The DHCP Server/Relay Setting window appears. Click DHCP No..
DHCP number
DHCP Server/Relay Setting option window appears.

4. Select DHCP Relay from the Server/Relay drop-down list, and specify the
remaining options:
Figure 5-98 DHCP Server/Relay Option Window
Table 5-19 DHCP Server/Relay Setting Parameters
Server/Relay Disable Not to use DHCP.
DHCP Server Do not select this choice here.
DHCP Relay Set DHCP Relay.
Bridge No. (IP Address) (available No and Registered and available Bridge numbers (IP addresses)
IP addresses) is/are listed to be selected.
DHCP Server Address 192.168.xxx.xxx This option is enabled when the choice is DHCP Relay.
IP Address Range (Start) —— These options are disabled for DHCP Relay setting.
IP Address Range (End) ——
Exception (Start) ——
Exception (End) ——
Security ——

Information dialog box appears.

displayed information.

5.8.3 MAC Address
5.8.3.1 Add MAC Address
Procedure 5-25
1. In the WebLCT menu frame, expand Network Management Setting to select

DHCP Server/Relay Setting.
2. The DHCP Server/Relay Setting window appears. Click Add MAC Address
tool button.
Add MAC Address tool button
The Add MAC Address option window appears.

3. Specify appropriate values.
Figure 5-102 Add MAC Address Option Window
Table 5-20 Add MAC Address Parameters
MAC Address aa:bb:cc:dd:ee:ff Specify MAC Address.
Distribution Auto IP Address is assigned automatically.

Rule
Reject Rejects the specified MAC Address.
Fixed Fixes the address manually. Selecting this option

enables the IP Address option below.
IP Address xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx Class C Private Address for Fixed distribution.
The DHCP Server/Relay Setting window updates the information.

6. Confirm the display for the added MAC Address information.

5.8.3.2 Modify MAC Address
Procedure 5-26

2. The DHCP Server/Relay Setting window appears. Click the number of target
MAC Address to modify.
click
The Modify MAC Address option window appears.

3. Modify the value(s).
Figure 5-106 Modify MAC Address Option Window
Table 5-21 Modify MAC Address Parameters
MAC Address aa:bb:cc:dd:ee:ff Specify MAC Address.
Distribution Auto IP Address is assigned automatically.

Rule
Reject Rejects the specified MAC Address.
Fixed Fixes the address manually. Selecting this

option enables the IP Address option below.
IP Address xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx Class C Private Address for Fixed distribution.
The DHCP Server/Relay Setting window updates the information.

6. Confirm the display for the modified MAC Address information.

5.8.3.3 Delete MAC Address
Procedure 5-27

2. The DHCP Server/Relay Setting window appears. Click the Delete MAC
Address tool button.
Delete MAC Address tool button
The Delete MAC Address option window appears.

3. Tick a box of the target MAC Address to remove. Ticking a box on top selects all
the registered MAC Addresses.
Figure 5-110 Delete MAC Address Option Window
Tick this box

to select all

display for the removed MAC Address(es).

5.8.3.4 Release IP Address Forcibly
Procedure 5-28

2. The DHCP Server/Relay Setting window appears. Click Forced Release IP

Address tool button.
Forced Release IP Address tool button
The Modify MAC Address option window appears.

3. Tick a box of the target IP Address to release its assignment. Ticking a box on top
selects all the registered addresses.
Figure 5-115 Delete MAC Address Option Window
Tick this box

to select all

display for the released IP Address.

5.9 Adjust Current Date and Time

Procedure 5-29
1. In the MENU frame on the left, expand the Network Management Setting to
select Date/Time Setting. The Date/Time Setting window appears.
2. Click the Modify tool button.
Figure 5-119 Date/Time Setting Window
Modify tool button
3. Date/Time Setting dialog box appears. Enter the appropriate values. See Table
5-22 also:
Figure 5-120 Date/Time Setting Box

5-80/END NETWORK MANAGEMENT
Table 5-22 Configuration Data to Upload
Data Description
Date Enter a date [month/day/year].
Time Enter the current time [hour:minute:second].
Time Zone Set the Time Zone by adding/reducing hours to/from GMT.
Range: Hours [+15 to –15] and Minutes [00 to 59].
Display PC Time Tick this box to synchronize the clock of WebLCT and that of
local PC.
6. The Date/Time Setting

window updates the information. Check the date and
time settings:
Figure 5-122 Date/Time Setting Window

PROVISIONING 6-1
6. PROVISIONING
6.1 Overview
The setup procedures provided here are for furthering the system’s fundamental
configuration upon completion of the equipment setup. The setting items are listed as
follows:
 Set MODEM Function

Configures the port, radio switch, ATPC/MTPC power, etc., for MODEM.
 Set ETH Function

Configures the Ethernet Port, VLAN ETH OAM, RSTP, QOS, Link Loss
Forwarding, etc.
 Set Equipment Clock and Synchronization
Sets the internal clock, external clock, and timing source.
 Assign Alarm/AIS Settings

Sets the alarm severity and relevant settings of AIS.
 Assign PMON/RMON Settings

Sets the threshold of PMON (except Ethernet)/ RMON (Ethernet).
For details, refer to the relevant sections accordingly.

6-2/END PROVISIONING

Set MODEM Function 7-1
7. Set MODEM Function
Users can configure the port, radio switch, ATPC/MTPC power, etc., for MODEM:
 MODEM Port Setting

Specifies the port name of each MODEM.
 TX Power Setting
Specifies the threshold of TX power and RX power in MTPC/ATPC configuration.
 ALM Mode Setting

Specifies the ATPC power mode and ALM mode for RF communication failure.

7-2 Set MODEM Function
7.1 MODEM Port Setting

Specify the Port Name to each MODEM:
Procedure 7-1
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then its submenu MODEM
Function Setting to select MODEM Port Setting. The MODEM Port Setting
window appears.
3. Click a MODEM to configure:
Figure 7-1 MODEM Port Setting Window
click
MODEM Port Setting option window appears.

4. Assign the appropriate name to the MODEM:

Figure 7-2 MODEM Port Setting Option Window
Table 7-1 MODEM Port Setting Parameter
Port Name (text field) Specify a Port Name. Valid value: 0 to 32 characters long.
Local Compression Mode
Header Disable Disables Header Compression function.

Compression
Mode Enable Enables Header Compression function.
Remote Compression Mode
Header (read only) Indicates the retrieved information.

Compression
Mode


7. The MODEM Port Setting window updates the information. Confirm the
Figure 7-4 MODEM Port Setting Window (1/2: on the left)
Figure 7-5 MODEM Port Setting Window (2/2: scroll to the right)

7.2 TX Power Setting

Specify the thresholds of TX Power and RX Power in MTPC/ATPC configuration.
7.2.1 ATPC Mode
Procedure 7-2
Function Setting to select TX Power Setting. The TX Power Setting window
appears.
3. Click a MODEM Link to configure:

Figure 7-6 TX Power Setting Window
click
4. TX Power Setting option window appears. Assign the appropriate value to each
parameter:
Figure 7-7 TX Power Setting Option Window

Table 7-2 TX Power Setting Parameters (ATPC)
ATPC Range (MAX) Sets the maximum level of TX Power for ATPC
(Range of values depends Mode. [unit: dBm]
ATPC Range (MIN) on the modulating method.) Sets the minimum level of TX Power for ATPC
Mode. [unit: dBm]
MTPC TX Power —— (Not editable)
RX Threshold –90 to –30 Set the input threshold level for when the
destination end is in ATPC Mode.

7. The TX Power Setting window updates the information. Verify the displayed
parameters.

7.2.2 MTPC Mode
Procedure 7-3
Function Setting to select TX Power Setting. The TX Power Setting window
appears.

click
4. TX Power Setting option window appears. Assign the appropriate value to each
parameter:
Figure 7-11 TX Power Setting Option Window

Table 7-3 TX Power Setting Parameters (MTPC)
ATPC Range (MAX) ——— (Not editable)
ATPC Range (MIN) ——— (Not editable)
MTPC TX Power (Range of values depends Set the TX Power level in MTPC Mode.
on the modulating
method.)
RX Threshold –90 to –30 Set the input threshold level for when the
destination end is in ATPC Mode.

The TX Power Setting window updates the information.
7. Verify the displayed parameters.


7.3 ALM Mode Setting

Specify the ATPC Power Mode.
Procedure 7-4
Function Setting to select ALM Mode Setting. The ALM Mode Setting window
appears.

Figure 7-14 ALM Mode Setting Window
click
4. ALM Mode Setting option window appears. Assign the appropriate value to each
parameter:
Figure 7-15 ALM Mode Setting Option Window

7-10/END Set MODEM Function
Table 7-4 ALM Mode Setting Parameters
ATPC Power Mode MAX Increases the TX Power to the maximum value.
MIN Decreases the TX Power to the minimum value.
Hold Holds the TX Power at the current value.
NOTE: When the MTPC Mode is selected, ATPC Power Mode option is disabled.

7. The ALM Mode Setting window updates the information. Verify the displayed
parameters.
Figure 7-17 ALM Mode Setting Window

Set ETH Function 8-1
8. Set ETH Function
8.1 Overview
The ETH Function Setting provides the following options:
 Equipment Setting
Equipment Setting provides the Bridge Setting, Max Frame Size Setting, and FDB
Aging Time (under the Other Setting option). Bridge function is also known as the
switching function, which enables the device in the multiple network segments can
communicate with each other. User can configure the FDB (forward database)
aging time, default VLAN ID and VLAN mode here.
 ETH Port Setting

This function provides the abilities that configure the attributes of the Ethernet port
on the front panel of iPASOLINK, including port name, line speed, Mode, Flow
Control etc.
 VLAN Setting
VLAN (Virtual Local Area Network) enables multiple devices that are separated
physically can communicate as they are located in a same broadcast domain and
also protect the data from sending to other domain even they may connect
physically.
This function provides the abilities of creating, configuring and deleting the VLAN.
 FDB Setting
iPASOLINK can learn the MAC address of the Ethernet frame dynamically and
save the port — MAC address mapping information into FDB (Forwarding
DataBase) based on 802.1d for each VLAN. User can also add the static mapping
information manually by this function.
 ETH OAM Setting

iPASOLINK supports Ethernet OAM function based on ITU-T Y.1731 and
802.1ag, which enables network operators to measure the Ethernet link quality such
as delay, throughput, jitter, loss, etc., and is helpful for the maintenance and
troubleshooting.
 RSTP Setting (RSTP Port)

iPASOLINK supports RSTP (Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol), which prevents from
the layer 2 level link loop by a faster manner comparing to the legacy STP protocol.

8-2 Set ETH Function
Users can set the priority of the bridge; specify the role of the Ethernet port and
other parameters.
 MSTP Setting (MSTP Port)

MSTP (Multiple Spanning-Tree Protocol) defined by the IEEE802.1s is the
spanning-tree protocol working with the logical instances. One instance can include
multiple VLANs. Blocking port is decided per logical instance, and then physically
configured redundant Ethernet Topology can be utilized efficiently.
In addition to the standard MSTP features, iPASOLINK supports the root-guard
feature that prevents an unexpected node being the root node, and the BPDU-guard
feature that discards a BPDU frame if it arrives.
NOTE: MSTP and ERP do not operate simultaneously at the same
equipment.
 ERP Setting
High-speed protection switch and load balancing are realized by G.8032 Ethernet
Ring Protection. The maintenance can be done with minimum service affecting by
the administrative operation, such as manual/forced switching.
 Load balancing works under the normal operation, and the higher priority traffic
can be secured by QoS management.
 Fast Switch-over (<50ms) with 3.3ms period, hardware based ETH-CC.
 Administrative operation:
– Forced switching
– Manual switching
– Multi-Ring
– Revertive / Non-revertive
The combination of logical ring set-up and load balancing achieves double capacity
transmission.
 Link Aggregation
Link Aggregation achieves high capacity and resiliency transport with bundling
several radio links. The distribution algorithm distributes the packet according to:
 L2 based: Source & Destination MAC, VLAN ID, Ethernet type, Physical Port
ID.
 L3&L4 based: Source & Destination IP, Source & Destination TCP/UDP Port
Number
 MPLS label based: Tunnel Label & VC Label
Also, ETH Ports support Both of LACP and Non-LACP operation with carrier class
1:1 LACP Protection.

 Radio Traffic Aggregation: Packet and Physical Layer

(Link Aggregation)
iPASOLINK has two types of Radio Traffic Aggregation: Packet Layer and
Physical Layer. The feature of Radio Traffic Aggregation (Packet Layer) is similar
to that of Link Aggregation without LACP.
Radio Traffic Aggregation (Physical Layer) function achieves the high capacity and
resiliency transport with bundling two Modem links.
 Fragments packets for the variable length, and distributes the fragmented packets
to two radio links fairly with a patent pending algorithm.
 Provides redundancy to the radio link. The traffic can be carried by the remaining
links if the bandwidth decreases due to a failure.
 Using Radio Traffic Aggregation (Physical Layer) and XPIC simultaneously, the
high-capacity transport is enabled by a single-antenna.
 QoS/Classification Setting
iPASOLINK supports QoS control function that provides different priority to
different applications, users, or data flow or to guarantee a certain level of
performance to a data flow. User can configure Class Classification, Ingress
Policer, Egress QoS and SP, TDM E1 QoS on MODEM to realize differential
service strategy.
 Filter Settings
This function provides layer2 filtering parameter database based user-plane
discarding filter for solving security issue.
 Parameters: multiple combination of MAC DA/SA, CoS, Ether Type, VLAN ID
with "any" or "wildcard" description
 Filter profile based easy to use configuration
 L2CP Transparent Setting

L2CP Transparent transport function is useful for L2CP tunneling, especially MEF
9 Compliant ETH Private Line (EPL) Service. Transported L2CP protocols can be
specified by checking boxes independently.
 Mirroring Setting
Port Mirroring enables to monitor the traffic at another (mirrored) port without
traffic of source port interruption. Ingress, egress or both direction of the port to be
mirrored to the destination port can be specified.
 Port Isolate Setting

Port isolation can restrict the transmission even within the same VLAN. Ports
which are configured as port isolation cannot communicate with another same

VLAN port. Also, broadcast traffic is not transmitted. This function can protect the
user traffic from the attacks such as being executed from inside own network (same
subnet).
 LLF Setting
LLF (Link Loss Forwarding) is the function that mandatory shuts down the port on
the destination NE if local NE detects unidirectional link problem.
 Broadcast Storm Control Setting

This function discards flooding frames in a specific interface without transferring.
This function can set also flooding transferring control in unit of ETH port
including MODEM port. By specifying the bandwidth of broadcast frame,
multicast frame, and unknown address unicast frame collectively, frames beyond
the specified band are discarded at the circuit input.

8.2 Equipment Setting
8.2.1 Bridge Setting
Procedure 8-1
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then its submenu ETH
Function Setting to select Equipment Setting. The Equipment Setting
window appears.
3. Click the Bridge Setting link on the option box.
Figure 8-1 Equipment Setting Window
Bridge Setting
Bridge Setting option window appears.


Figure 8-2 Bridge Setting Option Window
Table 8-1 Bridge Setting Parameters
VLAN Mode 802.1q Allows the port for different VLANs to communicate with
each other through a Layer-3 network device.
802.1ad Allows the switches in a service provider network to

transparently carry customer’s Layer-2 control frames,
separate from the service provider’s traffic and from other
traffic in the service provider’s network.
Default VID 1 to 4094 Enter the default VID of the equipment. [default: 1]
Default VLAN TPID (C-Tag) 0x Specifies the TPID (Tag Protocol Identifier) value of VLAN.
8100 to FFFF [default: 8100 (in mode 802.1q)]
Default VLAN TPID (S-Tag) Specifies the TPID (Tag Protocol Identifier) value of VLAN.
[default: 88a8 (in mode802.1ad)]


7. The Equipment Setting window updates the information. Verify the displayed
parameters.

8.2.2 Max Frame Size Setting
Procedure 8-2
window appears.
3. Click the Max Frame Size Setting link on the option box.
Max Frame Setting
Max Frame Size Setting option window appears.

NOTE: For the system using the 802.1ad mode, the S-Tag size plus 4
bytes should be added to the value to be set.
Figure 8-6 Max Frame Size Setting Option Window
Table 8-2 Max Frame Size Setting Parameters
10GbE/GbE MAX 64 to 9600 Specifies the maximum frame size for a 10GbE/
Frame Size GbE (Giga-bit Ethernet) port. [unit: byte]
FE MAX Frame Size 64 to 2000 Specifies the maximum frame size for an FE (Fast
Ethernet) port. [unit: byte]


parameters.

8.2.3 Other Setting
Procedure 8-3
window appears.
3. Click the Other Setting link on the option box.

Other Setting
Other Setting option window appears.


Figure 8-10 Other Setting Option Window
Table 8-3 Other Setting Parameters
Aging On/Off On Enables the FDB (Forwarding Data Base) to delete

the learnt MAC Address if it is not updated for a
certain period specified by the FDB Aging Time.
Off Disables the Aging function.
FDB Aging Time 5 to 163680 Specifies the aging time period when the Aging
function is enabled. [unit: second]



parameters.

8.3 ETH Port Setting

Procedure 8-4
Function Setting to select ETH Port Setting. The ETH Port Setting window
appears.
3. Click the desired Port No. to configure.

Figure 8-13 ETH Port Setting Window
Port No.
ETH Port Setting option window appears.


Figure 8-14 ETH Port Setting Option Window
Table 8-4 ETH Port Setting Parameters (1 of 2)
Port Usage Enable Enable the port administratively.
Disable Shut down the port administratively.
Port Name (text field) Enter the Ethernet Port name. Valid value is zero to 32 characters long.
10GbE Usage Enable Specifies to use the port as 10 Gbit/s Ethernet interface.
Disable Specifies not to use the port as 10 Gbit/s Ethernet interface.
Media Type Electrical Specifies the SFP Port to the Electrical use
Optical Specifies the SFP Port to the Optical use.
Speed AUTO Sets Autonegotiation to select the speed at establishing each link.
Selecting AUTO disables Duplex and MDI and MDIX options below.
10Mbps Specifies 10 Mbit/s rate.

Table 8-4 ETH Port Setting Parameters (2 of 2)
Duplex Full Fixed to Full duplex mode only.
MDI and MDIX MDI Specifies the port media type. This option is disabled when the Speed
option selects AUTO.
MDIX
Flow Control Enable Enables the Flow Control function.
Disable Disables the Flow Control function.
Sync ETH Enable Sets to Enable or Disable the Synchronous Ethernet.
Disable NOTE: When the RJ45 port supporting the 1Gbit/s enables Sync ETH,
specifying this port to the Equipment Clock Reference forcibly assigns
and fixes this port to Slave. In this circumstance, if the opposing site
has the same settings as well, the Ethernet link will not be able to get
established.
LLDP Usage Enable Selects to use LLDP.
Disable Selects not to use LLDP.
LLDP Mode Standard Enables to run the standard DP MAC.
Proprietary Enable to run NEC proprietary LLDP MAC. This option is helpful to
MAC locate an iPASOLINK where L2SW discarding standard LLDP frames is
in between two iPASOLINKs’ management ports.
ALS Usage Enable Sets to enable/disable the Automatic Laser Shutdown function. This
option is available for optical ports only.
Disable
ALS Interval 60 [s] Sets the delay time to release the port from the ALS state when the
alarm is cleared. [unit: second, default: 60 seconds]
180 [s[
300 [s]

7. The ETH Port Setting window updates the information. Verify the displayed
parameters.

Figure 8-16 ETH Port Setting Window (1/2: scroll to the left)
Figure 8-17 ETH Port Setting Window (2/2: scroll to the right)

8.4 VLAN Setting
8.4.1 Add VLAN/S-VLAN ID
Procedure 8-5
Function Setting to select VLAN Setting. The VLAN Setting window appears.
3. In the VLAN List tabbed page, click the Add VLAN ID button on the tool bar.
Figure 8-18 VLAN Setting Window — VLAN List Tab (example: 802.1q)
VLAN List tab
Add VLAN ID tool button
The Add VLAN ID option window appears.

4. Specify VLAN ID (for 802.1q) or S-VLAN ID (for 802.1ad) and VLAN Service
Name:
Figure 8-19 Add VLAN ID Option Window (example: 802.1q)
Table 8-5 Add VLAN ID Parameters
VLAN ID [For 802.1q] Enter VLAN ID.

1 to 4094
S-VLAN ID [For 8021.ad] Enter S-VLAN ID.
VLAN Service Name (text field) Enter VLAN Service Name. Valid value is 1 to 32
characters long.
NOTE: Multiple VLAN IDs can be entered using comma(s) and/or hyphen as
shown below:
VLAN ID:1,2,3,1000-4094
VLAN Service Name:(VLAN Name)
i) By the example above, VLAN IDs of 1, 2, 3, and 1000 to 4094, that is, 3098
IDs in total are registered. The order of entering IDs has no special rule, which
means that entering in the order of 1000-4094,1,3,2 is available as well.
ii) The VLAN ID entry field in the Filter option box indicates 1–20 by default,
which is only to limit the number of VLAN IDs to display in the beginning.
Entering a specific number or a range (e.g., 4000–4094 for VLAN IDs 4000 to
4094) retrieves VLAN IDs as entered. To display all, remove the entry to leave
the field blank, and click the Search button.
iii) When registering multiple VLAN IDs, -xxxx (xxxx: 0001 to 4094) is
automatically added to each VLAN Service Name. The maximum number of
characters for a VLAN Service Name is 27.
iv) If (an) automatically generated VLAN Service Name(s) within the multiple
VLAN IDs to be registered already exist(s), that/those VLAN ID(s) will be
registered without VLAN Service Name(s).

However, for a single entry, the entered VLAN Service Name will be registered
as it is though the name has already been registered.
If (a) VLAN ID(s) within the multiple VLAN IDs to be registered already
exist(s), that/those VLAN ID(s) is/are ignored (in other words, not to overwrite
the existing IDs), but the remaining VLAN IDs will be registered.

7. The VLAN Setting window updates the information. Verify the displayed
parameters.
Figure 8-21 VLAN Setting Window— VLAN List Tab (example: 802.1q)

8.4.2 Modify VLAN Service Name
Procedure 8-6
3. In the VLAN List tabbed page, select the target object by clicking the VLAN
Service Name.
Figure 8-22 VLAN Setting — VLAN List Tab (example: 802.1q)
VLAN List tab select a target object
Modify VLAN Service Name option window appears.

4. Enter the modified/new name into the VLAN Service Name text box, then click
the OK button.
Figure 8-23 Modify VLAN Service Name Option Window (example: 802.1q)

parameters.
Figure 8-25 VLAN Setting Window (example: 802.1q)

8.4.3 Delete VLAN/S-VLAN ID
Procedure 8-7
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand ETH Function
Setting to select VLAN Setting. The VLAN Setting window appears.
3. In the VLAN List tabbed page, click the Delete VLAN ID tool button on the tool
bar.
VLAN List tab
Delete VLAN ID tool button
The Delete VLAN ID option window appears.

4. Enter the VLAN ID / S-VLAN ID or VLAN Service Name to be removed:

Figure 8-27 Delete VLAN ID Option Window — by VLAN ID (example: 802.1q)
Multiple numbers (range, and/or individuals) can be

entered as well.
e.g., Range: 1–15
Individuals: 1,4,15
Figure 8-28 Delete VLAN ID Option Window — by VLAN Service Name

NOTE: A VLAN ID that has (an) assignment(s) cannot be removed. Check
other settings if the target VLAN ID is not removed from the list.



parameters.

8.4.4 VLAN Setting (802.1Q Mode)
Procedure 8-8
3. In the VLAN Setting tabbed page, click a port number (listed under the Port) to
register VLAN settings.
Figure 8-32 VLAN Setting Window — VLAN Setting Tab
VLAN Setting tab Port Numbers
VLAN Setting option window appears.

4. From the Port Type drop-down list, select a Port Type, Access, Tunnel or
Trunk, and specify the required parameters according to the selected port type:
Figure 8-33 VLAN Setting Option Window
Port Type drop-down list
NOTE: For MODEM, Trunk is the only choice to select.

 Port Type: Access

Figure 8-34 VLAN Setting Option Window — Access
 Click a radio button of the target VLAN ID under the Untag Frame Assignment
(Access Port) for an access port.
 The untagged frames pass through the ports selected here.
 Incoming tagged frames, except for those with matching VLAN IDs, are
discarded at the ports selected here.

 Port Type: Tunnel

Figure 8-35 VLAN Setting Option Window — Tunnel
 Tick the check box of the VLAN that is to configure the port type: Tunnel.
 At the ports selected here, any frame types, either untagged or tagged with any
VLAN ID, are unconditionally tagged (Outer tag) with the VLAN ID, which is
checked in the list.
 When the port is configured as Tunnel, all the check boxes in L2CP Transparency
windows are enabled.

 Port Type: Trunk

Figure 8-36 VLAN Setting Option Window — Trunk
 Tick the check boxes of the VLANs that are to configure the port type: Trunk.
 At the ports selected here, tagged frames with the VLAN IDs that are checked in
the list are allowed to pass through.
 An untagged frame will be assigned with the VLAN ID of the selected VLAN in
Untag Frame Assignment column.
 Other types of frames are discarded.

Table 8-6 VLAN Setting Parameters
Port/VLAN Configuration (read only) Indicates the information of selected port.
VLAN Assignment
VLAN Mode 802.1Q Indicates the VLAN Mode of the selected port.
Port Type Access Allows untagged frames and tagged frames with matching
VLAN IDs to pass through.
Tunnel Allows both untagged and tagged frames to pass through.
Trunk Allows the selected tagged and untagged frames to pass

through. An untagged frame will be assigned with the
specified VLAN ID.
X VLAN Assignment (button) Clicking here removes ticks from all check boxes.
Clear
Enable (check box) Tick the check box to select a VLAN to assign the selected
port type configuration.
Untag Frame Assignment (radio button) Clicking the radio button assigns a VLAN ID to the untagged
(Access Port) frame.
Swap Enable (check box) Tick the check box to enable the swap mode on the selected
VLAN, which enables the External Used VLAN filed below.
External Used VLAN (see below) Specifies VLAN ID to swap to. See Figure 8-37 below.
Figure 8-37 Set External VLAN to Swap to
➀ ➁
➀ Tick a check box to enable External Used VLAN.

➁ Click the link.
➂ Enter the VLAN ID.
➃
➃ Click OK button.

5. When completed, click the OK button of the VLAN Setting option window.
Figure 8-38 VLAN Setting Option Window (Trunk)

The VLAN Setting window returns.

8.4.5 VLAN Setting (802.1ad Mode)
Procedure 8-9
Setting to select VLAN Setting. The VLAN Setting window appears.
3. In the VLAN Setting tabbed page, click a port number (listed under the Port) to
register VLAN settings.
VLAN Setting tab

Port Numbers
VLAN Setting option window appears.

4. Select a Port Type, and specify the required parameters according to the selected
port type:
Port Type
NOTE: When the target port is MODEM Port, S-Trunk is the only choice to
select.

 Port Type: C-Access

Figure 8-42 VLAN Setting Option Window — C-Access
 The untagged frames pass through the ports selected here.

 Incoming tagged frames, except for those that the outer tag is C-Tag, and that the
S-VLAN ID matches, are discarded at the ports selected here.
Table 8-7 VLAN Setting Parameters — C-Access
VLAN Assignment
VLAN Mode 802.1ad Indicates the VLAN Mode of the selected port.
Port Type C-Access Allows untagged frames, C-Tagged frames and frames with
matching S-VLAN ID to pass through.
X VLAN Assignment Clear (button) Clicking here removes ticks from all check boxes.
Enable —— (This option is disabled.)
C-Tag Frame Assignment (radio button) Clicking the radio button selects a VLAN ID to the untagged
(C-Access Port) frame.
C-VLAN ID ——— ———

 Port Type: S-Trunk

Figure 8-43 VLAN Setting Option Window — S-Trunk
 Tick the check boxes of the VLANs that are to configure the port type: S-Trunk.
 At the ports selected here,
– Tagged frames with S-VLAN ID that are checked in the list are forwarded.
– For untagged frames, S-VLAN of the selected VLAN in the Untag Frame
Assignment column will be assigned, then be forwarded.
– Other types of frames are discarded.
Table 8-8 VLAN Setting Parameters — S-Trunk
VLAN Assignment
Port Type S-Trunk Allows selected tagged frames and untagged frames to pass
through. For an untagged frame, the specified S-VLAN ID is
applied.
X VLAN Assignment Clear (button) Clicking here removes ticks from all check boxes.
Enable (check box) Tick the check box to select a VLAN to assign the selected
port type configuration.
C-VLAN ID ——— ———

 Port Type: C-Bridge

Figure 8-44 VLAN Setting Option Window — C-Bridge
click
 Tick the check boxes of the VLANs that are to configure the port type: C-Bridge.
 At the ports selected here, tagged frames with S-VLAN ID that are checked in the
list will be allowed to pass through.
 The C-Tagged frames will be assigned with an S-VLAN ID of the selected
VLAN in C-tagFrame Assignment column.
 The other frames will be discarded.
Figure 8-45 Modify C-VLAN ID Option Window
i) To enter the C-VLAN ID, click the

Undefined link under the C-VLAN ID.
The C-VLAN ID option window
appears.
ii) Enter the ID or the appropriate value.
iii) Click the OK button. The VLAN Setting

option window updates the C-VLAN ID
Information.

Table 8-9 VLAN Setting Parameters — C-Bridge
VLAN Assignment
Port Type C-Bridge Allows the selected tagged frames to pass through. Untagged
frames are discarded. For an outer tag with matching C-VLAN
ID, S-Tag corresponding to the C-Tag will be applied, then pass
through.
X VLAN Assignment Clear —— Removes (a) tick(s) in check box(es) below (cancels
selections).
Enable (check box) Tick the check box to select a VLAN to assign the selected port
type configuration.
C-VLAN ID Undefined Indicates the specified values.
1 to 40


The VLAN Setting window updates the information.


8.5 FDB Setting
8.5.1 FDB Setting (Equipment)
Procedure 8-10 FDB Setting (Equipment)
Setting to select FDB Setting. The FDB Setting window appears.
3. In the FDB Setting tabbed page, click the Equipment link.

Figure 8-49 FDB Setting — FDB Setting Tab
Equipment link
FDB Setting (Equipment) option window appears.


Figure 8-50 FDB Setting (Equipment) Option Window
Table 8-10 FDB Setting Parameters
Learning MAX Size 1 to 32384 Specify the maximum size or the learning MAC
Address entries.
Learning Limit Mode Forwarding If the incoming frame that is from a new MAC
Address exceeds the maximum size of FDB, the
frame without learning this source MAC Address will
be forwarded.
Discard If the incoming frame that is from a new MAC

Address discarded.
Learning Limit Trap Enable Enables the equipment to send a trap if the Learning
MAC Address reaches the specified MAX size.
Disable Disables the action above.

The FDB Setting window updates the information.


Figure 8-52 FDB Setting Window — FDB Setting Tab

8.5.2 FDB Setting (VLAN ID)
8.5.2.1 Service Tab
Procedure 8-11
Function Setting to select FDB Setting. The FDB Setting window appears.
3. In the FDB Setting tabbed page, select Service tab, then click on the desired
VLAN ID number to configure.
Service tab VLAN ID
FDB Setting option window appears.

4. Specify the maximum size and mode for learning MAC Address:
Figure 8-54 FDB Setting Option Window
Table 8-11 FDB Setting (VLAN ID) Parameters
Learning MAX Size 0 to 32512 Specify the maximum size or the learning MAC
Address entries.
Learning Limit Mode Forwarding If the incoming frame that is from a new MAC
Address exceeds the maximum size of FDB, the
frame without learning this source MAC Address
will be forwarded.
Discard If the incoming frame that is from a new MAC

Address discarded.




8.5.2.2 Port Tab
Procedure 8-12
3. In the FDB Setting tabbed page, select Port tab, then click on the desired Port
number to configure.
Port tab
Port Number
FDB Setting option window appears.

4. Specify the maximum size and mode for learning MAC Address:
Figure 8-58 FDB Setting Option Window
Table 8-12 FDB Setting (VLAN ID) Parameters
FDB Learning Enable Select to enable/disable the FDB Learning.

Selecting Enable enables the Learning
Disable MAX Size filed below.
Learning MAX Size (Port) 0 to 32384 Specify the maximum size or the learning
MAC Address entries.




8.5.3 Static Entry Setting
8.5.3.1 Add Static Entry
Procedure 8-13
3. In the Static Entry tabbed page, click the Add tool button.
Figure 8-61 FDD Setting Window — Static Entry Tab
Add tool button
Static Entry (Add) option window appears.

4. Specify the appropriate value to each parameter:

Figure 8-62 Static Entry (Add) Option Window
Table 8-13 FDB Setting (Static Entry) Parameters
Item (Available part) Names of available (registered) part are

shown in the drop-down list. Select the
target part.
Port (Available port) Available (registered) ports are shown in

the drop-down list. Select the target port.
MAC Address xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx Enter the object MAC Address.
Enable (radio button) Tick the check box to assign the port to
the specified VLAN.



Figure 8-64 FDB Setting Window — Static Entry Tab

8.5.3.2 Modify Static Entry
Procedure 8-14
3. Select the Static Entry tab, then click the Entry No. of the target to modify.
Entry No.
Static Entry (Static Entry No. xxx) option window for the selected object
appears.

4. Edit the MAC Address, then click the OK button.

Figure 8-66 Static Entry Option Window

6. The FDB Setting window updates the information. Verify the displayed
information.

8.5.3.3 Delete Static Entry
Procedure 8-15
3. Select the Static Entry tab, then click the Delete tool button.
Figure 8-69 Static Entry Setting Window
Delete tool button
Static Entry (Delete) option window for the selected object appears.

4. Tick the check box of the target object, then click the OK button. Ticking the
check box on the title bar selects all.
Figure 8-70 Static Entry Option Window



7. The FDB Setting window updates the information. Verify the displayed
information.

8.6 ETH OAM Setting

 OAM: Operation, Administration & Maintenance
 MEG: Maintenance Entity Group
 MEP: MEG End Point
 MIP: MEG Intermediate Point
8.6.1 OAM MEG Tab
8.6.1.1 Add MEG Index

Procedure 8-16
Function Setting to select ETH OAM Setting. The ETH OAM Setting window
appears.
3. In the OAM MEG tabbed page, click the Add MEG tool button.
Figure 8-74 ETH OAM Setting Window — OAM MEG Tab
Add MEG tool button
OAM MEG Setting (Add) option window appears.


Figure 8-75 OAM MEG Setting (Add) Option Window
Table 8-14 OAM MEG Setting Parameters
MEG Index 1 to 128 Set MEG Index number.
Maintenance Domain Name (text field) Maximum length in total of Maintenance Domain
Name and Short MA Name is 43 characters long.
Short MA Name (text field)
MEG Level 0 to 7 Specify the MEG level.
CCM Enable Enable to output/monitor CCM.
Disable Disable to output/monitor CCM.
ETH-CC Period 3.3 [ms] Set the period of ETH-CC (Continuity Check)
Message.
10 [ms]
100 [ms]
1 [s]
10 [s]
60 [s]
CCM Priority 0 to 7 Specify the priority of the CCM


The ETH OAM Setting window updates the information.


8.6.1.2 Modify MEG Index
Procedure 8-17
appears.
3. In the OAM MEG tabbed page, click the MEG Index number.
click MEG Index
OAM MEG Setting (Modify) option window appears.

Figure 8-79 OAM MEG Setting (Modify) Option Window
Table 8-15 OAM MEG Setting (Modify) Parameters
CCM Enable Enable to output/monitor CCM.
Disable Disable to output/monitor CCM.
ETH-CC Period 3.3 [ms] Set the period of ETH-CC (Continuity Check)
Message.
10 [ms]
100 [ms]
1 [s]
10 [s]
60 [s]
CCM Priority 0 to 7 Specify the priority of the CCM




8.6.1.3 Delete MEG Index
Procedure 8-18
Setting to select ETH OAM Setting. The ETH OAM Setting window appears.
3. Select the OAM MEG tab, then click the Delete MEG tool button.
Delete MEG tool button
OAM MEG Setting (Delete) option window appears.
4. Enter the MEG Index number of the target to be removed, then click the OK
button.
Figure 8-83 OAM MEG Setting (Delete) Option Window



7. The ETH OAM Setting window updates the information. Confirm that the target
OAM MEG has been removed.

8.6.2 OAM MEP Tab
8.6.2.1 Add MEP Index
Procedure 8-19
appears.
3. In the OAM MEP tabbed page, click the Add MEP button.
Figure 8-87 ETH OAM Setting Window — OAM MEP Tab
Add Index tool button
OAM MEP Setting (Add) option window appears.

4. Add Peer MEP ID first:

Figure 8-88 OAM MEP Setting (Add) Option Window
i) Enable radio buttons ii) Add Peer MEP button
i) From the list in the MEG Configuration option box, click the Enable radio
button of the target to select.
ii) Click Add Peer MEP button in the Peer MEP Configuration option box. The
Peer MEP Add option window appears.
iii) Enter the Peer MEP ID to add.

Figure 8-89 Peer MEP Add Option Box

Table 8-16 Peer MEP Add Option Parameters
Peer MEP ID 1 to 8191 Assign MEP ID of the peer equipment
iv) Click the OK button. The Peer MEP Configuration option box updates the
entries.
5. Specify the remaining parameters in the OAM MEP Setting (Add) option
window:
Figure 8-90 OAM MEP Setting (Add) Option Window

Table 8-17 OAM MEP Setting (Add) Parameters
MEP Configuration
MEP Index 1 to 128 Specify a local MEP Index number.
MEP ID 1 to 8191 Specify an ID to the MEG Index.
Item (Available part) Select the target part.
Port (Available port) Select a port.
Direction Up MEP Specifies the direction of service from Line to L2SW.
Down MEP Specifies the direction of service from L2SW to Line.
Enable (radio button) Click to associate an Ethernet OAM Message with a

VLAN.
MEG Configuration
Enable (radio button) Click to associate an MEP with an MEG Configuration.
Peer MEP Configuration
Add Peer MEP (button) Click to open the Peer MEP Add option window.
Enable / Peer MEP ID (check box, list) This field lists the Peer MEP ID(s) registered by MEG
Configuration.
6. When completed, click the OK button. Confirmation dialog box appears.



9. Confirm that the newly added MEP Index information is displayed.


8.6.2.2 Modify MEP Index
NOTE: Under the following conditions, the MEP Index cannot be modified:
 MEP ID is modified to the value that is currently registered to Peer MEP ID.
 Peer MEP ID is modified to the value that is currently registered to MEP ID.
When the modifications such as ones above are needed, delete the MEP
Index that contains the target ID, then newly register the MEP Index with the
desired values.
Procedure 8-20
Setting to select ETH OAM Setting. The ETH OAM Setting window appears.
3. In the OAM MEP tabbed page, click the MEP Index number of the target to be
modified.
MEP Index
OAM MEP Setting (Modify) option window appears.

4. Modify the parameters:

Figure 8-95 OAM MEP Setting (Modify) Option Window
Table 8-18 OAM MEP Index Parameters

MEP Configuration
MEP Index 1 to 128 Specify a local MEP Index number.
MEP ID 1 to 8191 Specify an ID to the MEG Index.
Direction Up MEP Specifies the direction of service from Line to L2SW.
Down MEP Specifies the direction of service from L2SW to Line.
Enable (radio button) Click to associate an Ethernet OAM Message with a VLAN.
MEG Configuration
Enable (radio button) Click to associate an MEP with an MEG Configuration.
Peer MEP Configuration

Add Peer MEP (button) Click to open the Peer MEP Add option window.
Enable / Peer MEP ID (check box, list) This field lists the Peer MEP ID(s) registered by MEG
Configuration.



8. Confirm that the modified parameter(s) is/are displayed.


8.6.2.3 Delete MEP Index
Procedure 8-21
appears.
3. In the OAM MEP tabbed page, click the Delete MEP button of the target to be
removed.
OAM MEP tab

Delete MEP button
OAM MEP Setting (Delete) option window appears.

4. Select an MEP Index number of the target to be removed.

Figure 8-100 OAM MEP Setting (Delete) Option Window
6. Confirmation dialog box appears. Click the OK button.


8. Confirm that the target OAM MEP Index has been removed.

8.6.3 OAM MIP Tab
8.6.3.1 Add MIP Index
Procedure 8-22
appears.
3. In the OAM MIP tabbed page, click the Add MIP tool button.
Figure 8-104 ETH OAM Setting Window — OAM MIP Tab
Add MIP tool button
OAM MIP tab
OAM MIP Setting (Add) option window appears.


Figure 8-105 OAM MIP Setting (Add) Option Window
Table 8-19 OAM MIP Index Parameter
MIP Configuration
MIP Index 1 to 32 Specify an MIP Index number.
MEG Level 0 to 7 Specify an MG Level to the MIP.
Item (Available Part) Select the target part.
Port (Available Port) Select a port.
(Data retrieved by MIP Configuration)
Enable (check box) Tick (click to leave a tick in) a check box to associate
an MEP with a VLAN.
When completed, click the OK button. Information dialog box appears.


6. ETH OAM Setting window updates the information. Verify the displayed
information.

8.6.3.2 Modify MIP Index
Procedure 8-23 Modify OAM MIP Index
appears.
3. In the OAM MIP tabbed page, click on the MIP Index number of the target.
OAM MIP tab MIP Index
OAM MIP Setting (Modify) option window appears.

4. Modify the parameter(s):

Figure 8-109 OAM MIP Setting (Modify) Option Window
Table 8-20 OAM MIP Index Parameter
MIP Configuration
MIP Index 1 to 128 Specify an MIP Index number.
MEG Level 0 to 7 Specify an MEG Level to the MIP.
(Data retrieved by MIP Configuration)
Enable (radio button) Click to associate an MEP with a VLAN.


7. The ETH OAM Setting window updates the information. Confirm that the
information of modified parameter(s) is displayed.

8.6.3.3 Delete MIP Index
Procedure 8-24
appears.
3. In the OAM MIP tabbed page, click on the Delete MIP tool button.
OAM MIP tab

Delete MIP tool button
4. OAM MIP Setting (Delete) option window appears. Select the MIP Index number
of the target, then click the OK button.
Figure 8-113 OAM MIP Setting (Delete) Option Window



7. The ETH OAM Setting window updates the information. Confirm that the target
OAM MIP Index has been removed.

8.6.4 LINK OAM Setting
Following procedure enables the Link OAM function:
Procedure 8-25
Function Setting to select ETH OAM Setting.
3. The ETH OAM Setting window appears. In the Link OAM tabbed page, click the
port number of the target.
Figure 8-117 ETH OAM Setting Window — Link OAM Tab
Link OAM Tab Port numbers
Link OAM Setting option window appears.


Figure 8-118 Link OAM Setting Option Window
Table 8-21 Link OAM Setting Parameter
Local DTE Information
Item (read only) Indicates the information of the selected object.
Port (read only)
Port Name (read only)
Link OAM Enable Enable/Disable the use of Link OAM function.
Disable
Link OAM Mode Active Uses active Link OAM (indicates the discovery process).
Passive Uses passive Link OAM (does not initiates discovery process).
Dying Gasp Enable Enable/Disable to issue Dying Gasp notification.
Disable
Critical Event Enable Enable/Disable to issue Critical Event notification.
Disable

Table 8-21 Link OAM Setting Parameter
Remote DTE Information
Unidirectional (read only) Indicates the DTE information of the destination equipment.
Remote Loopback (read only)
Link Event (read only)
MAC Address (read only)

7. The ETH OAM Setting window updates the information. Verify the displayed
information.
Figure 8-120 ETH OAM Setting Window — Link OAM Tab

8.7 RSTP/MSTP Setting

 STP: Spanning Tree Protocol
 RSTP: Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
 MSTP: Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol
NOTE: STP/RSTP Tunnel function cannot be enabled on a port if it enables RSTP.
8.7.1 Select STP Mode for Setting Procedure
The setting windows for RSTP Mode and MSTP Mode differ. Select the appropriate
window for the mode using the following steps before starting the setting procedures.
Procedure 8-26
Function Setting to select RSTP/MSTP Setting. The RSTP/MSTP Setting
window appears.
3. Click Modify STP Mode button.

Figure 8-121 RSTP / MSTP Setting Window
Modify STP Mode button

4. The STP Mode Setting option window appears. Select RSTP or MSTP from the
STP Mode drop-down list.
Figure 8-122 STP Mode Setting Option Window

RSTP / MSTP Setting window of the selected mode appears:
Figure 8-124 RSTP / MSTP Setting Window (example: for RSTP Mode)
Indicates selected mode.

8.7.2 RSTP Port
8.7.2.1 Modify RSTP Port
Procedure 8-27
window appears.
3. Check if the indicating mode is RSTP, then click Modify STP Port tool button.
 If the indicated STP Mode is not RSTP, change the mode using procedure in
8.7.1 Select STP Mode for Setting Procedure.
Figure 8-125 RSTP / MSTP Setting Window (for RSTP Mode)
Indicates RSTP
Modify STP Port tool button
The STP Port Setting option window (for RSTP mode) appears.


Figure 8-126 RSTP Port Setting Option Window
Table 8-22 RSTP Port Setting Parameter

Enable (check box) Tick the check box to select the target object.
Item (read only) Shows the information.
Port (read only)
Port Name / LAG Name (read only
STP Port Path Cost Auto Enables the function to automatically calculate the path costs.
Manual Selects to manually calculate and enter the path costs.
STP Port Path Cost 1 to 200000000 This filed is enabled by setting STP Port Path Cost to Manual.
(Value) Enter the cost manually.
STP Port Priority 0 to 240 Specifies the STP Port Priority. [granularity: 16]
Edge Port Enable Sets the target port to Edge Port.
Disable Removes the Edge Port setting from the target port.

The RSTP / MSTP Setting window updates the information.

7. Verify the displayed parameters:

Figure 8-128 RSTP Setting Window

8.7.2.2 Modify Detailed RSTP Parameter
Procedure 8-28
Function Setting to select RSTP / MSTP Setting. The RSTP / MSTP Setting
window appears.
3. Check if the indicating mode is RSTP, then click Modify Detail STP Parameter
tool button.
 If the indicated STP Mode is not RSTP, change the mode using procedure in
Figure 8-129 RSTP / MSTP Setting Window (for RSTP Mode)
Modify Detail STP Parameter

tool button
Indicates RSTP
The Detail STP Parameter Setting option window appears.


Figure 8-130 Detail STP Parameter Setting Option Window
Table 8-23 Detail RSTP Parameter Setting
Bridge Priority (RSTP) 0 to 61440 Sets STP Priority of the bridge. [granularity: 4096]
STP Bridge MAX Age 6 to 40 Sets the period to store the BPDU Configuration.
Bridge acknowledges that a topology change has
occurred when the MAX Age passes putting the
BPDU aged out. [unit: second]
STP Bridge Hello Time 1 Sets the period for sending the BPDU Configuration
from Root Bridge. [unit: second]
2
STP Bridge Forward Delay 4 to 30 Sets the delay period to execute the change from the
Listening Port to Learning Port.
 The value of this option should be greater than that
of the STP Bridge MAX Age.
[unit: second]
STP TX Hold Count 1 to 10 Sets the number of BPDUs that can be sent per
second.


7. The RSTP / MSTP Setting window updates the information. Verify the displayed
information:
Figure 8-132 RSTP Setting Window
Updated Information

8.7.3 MSTP Port
8.7.3.1 Modify MSTP Port
NOTES:
1. MSTP and ERP do not operate simultaneously on the same system. (To
enable MSTP, ERP should be disabled.)
2. All VLANs belong to IST by default.
3. In the IEEE 802.1ad mode, MSTP operation is disabled on ports that are
assigned to C-Access or C-Bridge.
4. Default values for Timers and Hops are recommended to use. [Default
values for timers are compliant with the recommendations.]
5. VLANS that are assigned to instances and that are to ports are not
interdependent. VLANs should be assigned to all ports that are associated
with the MSTP equipment. If not, signals may not be transmitted through the
path though it is concluded by the protocol.
Procedure 8-29
window appears.
3. Check if the indicating mode is MSTP, then click Modify STP Port tool button.
 If the indicated STP Mode is not MSTP, change the mode using procedure in
Figure 8-133 RSTP / MSTP Setting Window (for MSTP Mode)
Indicates MSTP
Modify STP Port button

4. The STP Port Setting option window appears. Assign the appropriate value to
each parameter:
Figure 8-134 MSTP Port Setting Option Window (Selecting IST Tab)

Figure 8-135 MSTP Port Setting Option Window (Selecting MSTI Tab)
(example: MSTI1)

Table 8-24 MSTP Port Setting Parameter (1 of 2)
STP Mode: MSTP Indicates MSTP.
Region Name (text field) Enter the Region Name. Valid value is 1 to 32
characters long.
Revision No. 0 to 65535 Specify the Revision Number.
BPDU Guard Timer Usage Use Select to use or not to use the BPDU. Selecting Use
enables BPDU Guard Timer option below.
Not Use
BPDU Guard Timer 10 to 1000000 Set BPDU Guard Timer. [unit: second]
IST tab
CIST Regional Root (read only) Indicates the CIST Regional Root Bridge Priority and
Bridge Priority / ID ID of the selected port.
Bridge Priority 1 to 61440 Select a Bridge Priority. [granularity: 4096]
Member VLAN (read only) Indicates the member VLAN IDs of the selected port.
Port (read only)
Port Name /LAG Name (read only
STP Port Path Cost Auto Enables the function to automatically calculate the
path costs.
Manual Selects to manually calculate and enter the path

costs.
STP Port Path Cost 1 to 200000000 This filed is enabled by setting STP Port Path Cost
(Value) to Manual. Enter the cost manually.
STP Port Priority 0 to 240 Specifies the STP Port Priority.
Edge Port Enable Sets the target port to Edge Port.
Disable Removes the Edge Port setting from the target port.
BPDU Guard Enable Enables/Disables the BPDU Guard usage.
Disable
Root Guard Enable Enables/Disables the Root Guard usage.
Disable

Table 8-24 MSTP Port Setting Parameter (2 of 2)
MSTI1, MSTI2, MSTI3, MSTI4 tabs
MSTI1 - MSTI4 Enable Enables/Disables the usage of selected MSTI

(options below).)
Disable
MSTI Regional Root (read only) Indicates the Regional Root Bridge Priority and ID of
Bridge Priority / ID the selected port.
Instance No. 1 to 4093 Enter the number to select the instance.
Bridge Priority (MSTI) 0 to 61440 Select a Bridge Priority. [granularity: 4096]
Member VLAN (read only) Indicates the member VLAN IDs of the selected port.
Port (read only)
Port Name / LAG Name (read only
STP Port Path Cost Auto Enables the function to automatically calculate the
path costs.
Manual Selects to manually calculate and enter the path

costs.
STP Port Path Cost 1 to 200000000 This filed is enabled by setting STP Port Path Cost
(Value) to Manual. Enter the cost manually.
STP Port Priority 0 to 240 Specifies the STP Port Priority.

[0, 16, 32, 48, 66, 80,
96, 112, 128, 144, 160,
176, 192, 208, 224, 240]

The RSTP / MSTP Setting window updates the information.

7. Verify the displayed parameters:

Figure 8-137 MSTP Setting Window (IST Tab)
Figure 8-138 MSTP Setting Window (MSTI Tab)

8.7.3.2 Modify Detail MSTP Parameter
Procedure 8-30
window appears.
3. Check if the indicating mode is MSTP, then click Modify Detail STP Parameter
button.
 If the indicated STP Mode is not MSTP, change the mode using procedure in
Figure 8-139 RSTP / MSTP Setting Window (for MSTP Mode)
Indicates MSTP Modify Detail STP Parameter

tool button
The Detailed STP Parameter Setting option window appears.


Figure 8-140 Detail STP Parameter Setting Option Window
Table 8-25 Detail STP Parameter Setting
STP Bridge MAX Age 6 to 40 Sets the period to store the BPDU Configuration.
Bridge acknowledges that a topology change has
occurred when the MAX Age passes putting the
BPDU aged out. [unit: second]
STP Bridge Hello Time 2 A period for sending the BPDU Configuration from
Root Bridge. The value is fixed to 2 seconds.
STP Bridge Forward Delay 4 to 30 Sets the delay period to execute the change from the
Listening Port to Learning Port.
 The value of this option should be greater than a
half of the STP Bridge MAX Age values plus 1.
[unit: second]
STP TX Hold Count 1 to 10 Sets the number of BPDUs that can be sent per
second.
STP MAX Hop Count 1 to 40 Specifies hop counts.


7. The RSTP / MSTP Setting window updates the information.Verify the displayed
information:
Figure 8-142 MSTP Setting Window
Updated Information

8.8 ERP Setting

NOTES:
1. ERP (ETH-Ring Protection) and MSTP cannot be enabled simultaneously.

(To enable ERP, MSTP should be disabled.)
2. ETH-Ring Protection can be configured by the Ethernet Ports whose VLAN

Port Type is the Trunk (802.1Q) or S-Trunk (802.1ad).
8.8.1 Configure ERP
Procedure 8-31
Function Setting to select ERP Setting. The ERP Setting window appears.
3. Click the Modify ERP Mode tool button.

Figure 8-143 ERP Setting Window
Modify ERP Mode tool button

4. ERP Mode Setting option window appears. Select Enable by clicking its radio
button, then click the OK button.
Figure 8-144 ERP Mode Setting Option Window

6. The ERP Setting window enables the Add ERP tool button. Click the Add ERP
tool button.
indicates Enable
Add ERP tool button
Step 1 ERP Setting option window appears.

7. Set the appropriate values:

Figure 8-147 Step 1 ERP Setting Window
Table 8-26 Step 1 ERP Setting Parameters (1 of 2)
Ring ID 01 to 16 Assign the ID number of the Ring.
Ring Name (text field) Enter the Ring name to apply. Valid value is 1 to 32 characters long.
Ring Type Major Ring Select a ring type that differs
Sub-Ring See Figure 8-148 Definition of Ring Types for reference to select a
valid ring-type.
Upper Ring 01 to 16 Specify an ID of Upper Ring to which the Sub-Ring connects. This
ID option is enabled when the Ring Type is Sub-Ring (Interconnection
Node). Assignment with Ring Port0 must be unique in the Sub-
Ring.

Table 8-26 Step 1 ERP Setting Parameters (2 of 2)
Ring Port0
Item (Available part) Specify an interconnecting port.
Port (Available ports) An assignment to the same Sub-Ring using the same port can be
made one time only. (No multi-instance Sub-Ring.)
Port Name (read only)
Ring Port1 [This option is not editable for a Sub-Ring (Interconnection Node).]
Item (Available part) Select the part.
Port (Available ports) Specify the port.
Port Name (read only) Indicates the selected port’s name.
RPL Owner Enable The RPL Owner node is an ETH Ring node adjacent to the RPL that
is responsible for blocking its end of the RPL under normal
Disable conditions. Only one RPL Owner node should exist in the Ring.
RPL Port Port0 Specify the RPL Port. This option is enabled when the RPL Owner
setting is enabled.
Port1
Revertive Revertive Revertive mode switches the Active port back to the original port
Mode when recovered. Non Revertive mode does not. This option is
Non Revertive enabled when the RPL Owner setting is enabled.
WTR Timer 1 [min] to 12 [min] A period to wait before restoring back when the system recovered
from the failure. This option is enabled when the RPL Owner setting
is enabled. [default: 5 min]
Guard Time 10 to 2000 [ms] The Guard Timer is active whenever an ETH Ring node receives an
indication that a local switching request has cleared. [unit:
millisecond; default: 500 ms]
Virtual Enable Enable or Disable the usage of Virtual Channels within the Sub-
Channel Ring. The value of this option must be the same at all nodes that
Disable configure the Sub-Ring or Sub-Ring (Interconnection Node).
Flush Event Enable This option is available for a Sub-Ring (Interconnection Node)
only. Enabling this option allows the Major Ring to carry out the FDB
Disable Flush if any event causing a ring switch occurs within the Sub-Ring.
This option must be enabled in the configuration by the specific
topologies as shown in <Arial_9XRi>Figure 8-149, however, it is
recommended to enable the option anyway unless any strong
reason to disable the option exists.

Figure 8-148 Definition of Ring Types
Major Ring
Ring ID = 1 Sub-Ring 1
Ring ID = 2
Sub-Ring 2
Ring ID = 3
Major Ring
Sub-Ring
Sub-Ring
Sub-Ring (Interconnection Node)
Upper Ring ID = 1
Sub-Ring (Interconnection Node)
Upper Ring ID = 1
Figure 8-149 Specific Topologies Requiring FDB Flush
Topologies that Must Enable Flush Event Option:
i) A failure that causes a ring switch occurs within the Sub-Ring, where the Major
Ring has a blockage on the link shared with the Sub-Ring.
Major Ring Sub-Ring
FDB Flush Required
ii) A failure that causes a ring switch occurs within the Sub-Ring, where (a)
Node(s) exist(s) on the shared link.
FDB Flush Required
Major Ring Sub-Ring
8. When completed, click the Next button. Step 2 ERP VLAN Setting option
window appears.

9. Assign the appropriate values, then click the Next button:

Figure 8-150 Step 2 ERP VLAN Setting Option Window
Table 8-27 Step 2 ERP VLAN Setting Parameters
Control VLAN ID 1 to 4094 A VLAN ID is used for R-APS transmission. Control VLAN ID
for each Ring must be unique. To use Virtual Channels within
the Sub-Ring, this Control VLAN ID must be registered for
the Traffic VLAN ID of the Upper Ring.
Control MAC Address 01 to FF Specify the last two digits of the address.
R-APS Message Priority 0 to 7 VLAN CoS field of R-APS frame. [default: 7]
R-APS Message MEG Level 0 to 7 MEG level of R-APS message. [default: 7]
Traffic VLAN ID
Enable (check box) Tick the check box to enable the use of Traffic VLAN ID

10. Step 3 ERP LOC Detection MEP Index Setting option window appears. Assign
the appropriate values, then click the Next button.
Figure 8-151 Step 3 ERP LOC Detection MEP Index Setting Option Window
Table 8-28 Step 3 ERP LOC Detection MEP Index Setting Parameters
LOC Detection Enable Enables to detect failures for switching the Ring using
ETH-CC. To carry out the switching under 50 ms, this
setting is required with 3.3 ms ETH-CC setting.
Disable Disables the LOC Detection.
Ring Port0
LOC Detection (radio button) Click (select) to enable the use of MEP Index.
MEP Index
Ring Port1
LOC Detection (radio button) Click (select) to enable the use of MEP Index. This
MEP Index option does not need to be set for Sub-Ring
(Interconnection Node).

11. Step 4 Setting Confirmation Screen window appears to show the specified
information. Verify the displayed information, then click the OK button.
Figure 8-152 Step 4 Setting Confirmation Screen


13. The ERP Setting window updates the information. Verify the displayed
information.

8.8.2 Modify ERP Setting
Procedure 8-32
3. Click the Ring ID link of the target.

click Ring ID
Step 1 ERP Setting option window appears.
 Go to 8.8.1 Configure ERP, and proceed with the procedure from Step 7. to
Step 13.

8.8.3 Delete ERP Setting
Procedure 8-33
3. Click the Delete REP tool button.

Delete REP tool button
The Delete REP option window appears.

4. From the Ring ID drop-down list, select the Ring ID to be deleted, then click the
OK button.
Figure 8-157 Delete ERP Option Window


7. ERP Setting window updates the information. Verify the displayed information.
Registration has been removed.

8.9 Link Aggregation

8.9.1 Add Link Aggregation
NOTE: For the Radio System, LAG should be assigned by the Radio Traffic
Aggregation that is provided in the Radio Configuration. See the subsection
4.3 Radio Configuration for details.
Procedure 8-34
Setting to select Link Aggregation Setting. The Link Aggregation Setting
window appears.
3. Click the Add LAG tool button.
Figure 8-161 Link Aggregation Setting Window
Add LAG button
NOTE: When the Radio Group for the Radio

Traffic Aggregation has been registered,
the registered information is listed as well.

4. The Add LAG option window appears. Assign the LAG:

Figure 8-162 Add LAG Option Window
Table 8-29 Add LAG Option Parameters (1 of 2)
Link Aggregation Group
LAG (read only) Indicates the type of registered ETH GRP.
LAG Name (text field) Enter the Link Aggregation Group name to apply. Valid value is 0 to
32 characters long.
Mode LACP-Active Outputs frames along the configured links regardless of settings on
the other side. Selecting this value enables the TX Interval option.
[This option is for ETH
GRP only.] LACP-Passive Outputs or not to output depending on the settings on the other side;
outputs frames if the other side’s control value is Active.Selecting
this value enables the TX Interval option.
Static Static operation mode using no LACP. Selecting this value enables
Revertive option.
TX Interval Short Sets the an output interval of LACPDUs mode for one second.
[For LACP Mode only.]
Long Selects an output interval of LACPDUs mode for 30 seconds.

Table 8-29 Add LAG Option Parameters (2 of 2)
Revertive Revertive Switches the active port back to the original port when recovered.
[For Static Mode only.]
Non Revertive Does not switch the active port back even if recovered.
Distribution L2 Base Distribution is based on the Source & Destination MAC, VLAN ID,
Rule Ethernet Type and Physical Port ID.
L3 Base Distribution is based on the Source & Destination IP, Source &
Destination TCP/UDP Port number.
Link Aggregation Port
LAG Not Used To assign the LAG, select ETH GRP.
ETH GRP
Port Role Active Specify each port to Active/Standby. At least one port must be the
Active.
Standby
5. When the parameters are specified, click the OK button.

The Link Aggregation Setting window updates the window.



8.9.2 Modify LAG Registration
Parameters that can be modified are LAG Name and Distribution Rule only.
Procedure 8-35
window appears.
3. Click the Modify Link Aggregation tool button.

Modify Link Aggregation button
Link Aggregation Setting option window appears.

4. Modify parameters:
Figure 8-166 Link Aggregation Setting Option Window
select LAG
i) Select the target LAG (Link Aggregation Group) from the LAG drop-down list.
ii) Modify applicable parameters.
iii) Click the OK button when completed.

The Link Aggregation Setting window updates the window.



8.9.3 Delete LAG Registration
Procedure 8-36
window appears.
3. Click the Delete LAG tool button.

Delete LAG tool button
The Delete LAG option window appears.

4. Tick a check box of the LAG to be removed, then click the OK button. Ticking
the check box on the title bar selects all.
Figure 8-170 Delete LAG Option Window
check box

The Link Aggregation Setting window updates the information.



8.10 QoS/Classification Setting

 Classify Setting Tab
iPASOLINK supports QoS based on MEF10 and REC4115, which classifies the
traffic into eight or four classes with the proper Internal Priority according to the
predetermined profile. Except for the default profile, a user can configure up to
three additional profiles, which provides a capability of realizing the flexible and
user-orientated QoS strategy. The Internal Priority is used for the following
purposes:
i) Properly identifies the ingress traffic according to the predetermined Priority.
ii) Maps the eight classes of ingress traffic to four or eight classes at queuing the
egress traffic.
iii) Copies the original internal priority to the encapsulated frame to prevent the
traffic priority from changing unexpectedly. (VLAN C-tag CoS/VLAN S-tag
CoS)
Three modes are available for QoS Classification.
1. Equipment Based QoS Mode (default)

QoS classification policies are determined by per-equipment basis. One
classification profile is activated, and up to three profiles are stored on the
equipment configuration. In this mode, most outer QoS field of the packet can be
specified for the classification policy.
2. Port Based QoS Mode

QoS classification policies are determined by per-port basis. In this mode, inner
QoS field of the packet can be specified for the classification policy.
3. VLAN ID Based QoS Mode

QoS classification policies are determined by per-VLAN ID basis. In this mode,
VLAN ID field of the packet can be specified for the classification policy.
 Policer Setting Tab

At the ingress traffic, the internal priority is assigned to the frame to perform the
flow control according to the predetermined policer and the Yellow or Green
Marker that is applied to the frame to define whether to discard or forward the
frame.
 Shaper Setting Tab

At the egress traffic, frames are queued according to the internal priority where the
Yellow or Green Marker is applied to determine whether to discard or forward the
frame.

8.10.1 Classify Setting Tab
8.10.1.1 Set Classification Mode
Procedure 8-37
Function Setting to select QoS/Classification Setting. The QoS/
Classification Setting window appears.
3. Click the Classification Mode option.

Figure 8-173 QoS/Classification Setting Window
Classification Mode
The Classification Mode option window appears.

4. Select the mode from the Classification Mode drop-down list:

Figure 8-174 Classification Mode Option Window
Table 8-30 Classification Mode Options
Classification Mode Equipment Based QoS Mode QoS classification policies are determined by per-
equipment basis. One classification profile is
activated, and up to three profiles are stored on the
equipment configuration. In this mode, most outer
QoS field of the packet can be specified for the
classification policy.
Port Based QoS Mode QoS classification policies are determined by per-port
basis. In this mode, inner QoS field of the packet can
be specified for the classification policy.
VLAN ID Based QoS Mode QoS classification policies are determined by per-
VLAN ID basis. In this mode, VLAN ID field of the
packet can be specified for the classification policy.

7. The Classification Setting window updates the information. Verify that the
selected mode is indicated.

8.10.1.2 Edit Profile
Procedure 8-38
3. Verify that the Classification Mode indicates Equipment Based QoS Mode.
To change the mode, proceed with 8.10.1 Classify Setting Tab.
4. Click the Edit Profile tool button.

 Clicking the Default Port Priority or Overwrite options opens the same option
window.
Edit Profile tool button
The Edit Classification Profile option window appears.

5. Edit Classification Profile option window appears. Specify parameters, then

click the OK button:
Figure 8-177 Edit Classification Profile Option Window
Table 8-31 Edit Classification Profile Options
Profile (available profile #) Indicates the registered profile #. Select

the profile to edit.
Profile Name (text field) Enter the profile name.
Mapping Field CoS Uses VLAN (CoS) of received frame for

Classification.
TC Uses MPLS (Traffic Class) of received

frame for Classification.
DSCP Uses IP Address (DSCP) of received

frame for Classification.
Classify Classify Internal Priority 0 to 7 Specifies the priority of internal use

Priority frames to map.
Color Green The priority is mapped to color green.

[default]
Yellow The priority is mapped to color yellow.


7. QoS/Classification Setting window updates the information.

Figure 8-179 QoS Classification Setting Window

8.10.1.3 Specify Attributes of Equipment Based QoS Mode
Procedure 8-39
3. Verify that the Classification Mode indicates Equipment Based QoS Mode.
4. Click the Mapping Mode option.

 Clicking the Default Port Priority or Overwrite options opens the same option
window.
Mapping Mode Overwrite Default Port Priority
The Select Mapping Mode option window appears.

5. Specify the parameters.

Figure 8-181 Select Mapping Mode Option Window
Mapping Mode Transparent Uses the CoS as the equipment internal priority.
Profile (Equipment) Maps the equipment internal priority according to the

Classification Profile.
Default Port Priority 0 to 7 Specifies the default priority.
Priority Overwrite (check box) Tick a box to enable the overwrite settings, which
allows the equipment internal priority following the
Classification to overwrite the QoS value of the output
frame.

The QoS/Classification Setting window updates the information.

Figure 8-183 QoS Classification Setting Window

8.10.1.4 Specify Attributes of Port Based QoS Mode
Procedure 8-40
3. Verify that the Classification Mode indicates Port Based QoS Mode.
4. Click the link in the Port fields of the target object.

click


Fixed Uses the Default Priority as the equipment internal

priority.
(Profile No.) Maps the equipment internal priority according to the

frame.



8.10.1.5 Specify Attributes of VLAN ID Based QoS Mode
Procedure 8-41
3. Verify that the Classification Mode indicates VLAN ID Based QoS Mode.
4. Click the link of the target VLAN ID.

click


Fixed Uses the Default Priority as the equipment internal

priority.
(Profile No.) Maps the equipment internal priority according to the

frame.



8.10.2 Policer Setting Tab
8.10.2.1 Add Policer Index
Procedure 8-42
Function Setting to select QoS/Classification Setting.
3. The QoS/Classification Setting window appears. In the Policer Setting tabbed

page, click Add Policer Index tool button.
click Policer Setting tab
The Add Policer Index option window appears.


 Specify the parameters in Add Policer Index option window.
 Click the Policer Profile Detail tool button to open the Policer Profile Detail
Setting option window, then specify the parameters there.
 Click the OK button of the Policer Profile Detail Setting option window.
 Click the OK button of the Add Policer Index option window.
Policer Profile Detail Setting

Option Window
click
Policer Profile Detail tool button
Add Policer Index Option Window

Table 8-35 Add Policer Index Options
Policer Index 1 to 256 Enter the Index number to assign.
Item (part/LAG providing Select the item providing the target port.
available port)
Port (available ports) Select the target port.
CoS 0 to 7, Any Select the target CoS.
Policer Profile No. 1 to 64 Select a number to assign the Policer Profile No.
VLAN ID (check box) Tick a box to enable the following options.
Enable (radio button) Click a radio button of the VLAN to be enabled.
VLAN ID (read only) Indicates the registered VLAN IDs.
VLAN Service Name (read only) Indicates the VLAN Service Names of the registered
VLAN.
Table 8-36 Policer Profile Detail Setting Options
EIR 0 to 10000000 Specifies the Excess Information Rate. [unit: kbit/s]
CIR 0 to 10000000 Specifies the Committed Information Rate. [unit: kbit/s]
EBS 0 to 128 Specifies the Excess Burst Size. [unit: kbit/s]
CBS 0 to 64 Specifies the Committed Burst Size [unit: kbit/s]



8.10.2.2 Modify Policer Index
Parameters of CoS, Policer Profile No., VLAN ID and Policer Profile Detail
Setting (EIR, CIR, EBS, CBS) can be modified.
Procedure 8-43

page, click the link of target Policer Index number.
click
The Policer Setting option window appears.


 Specify the parameters in Add Policer Index option window.
 Click the Policer Profile Detail tool button to open the Policer Profile Detail
Setting option window, then specify the parameters there.
 Click the OK button of the Policer Profile Detail Setting option window.
 Click the OK button of the Add Policer Index option window.
Policer Profile Detail Setting

Option Window
click
Policer Profile Detail tool button
Policer Setting Option Window

Table 8-37 Add Policer Index Options
Policer Index (read only) Indicates the selected index number.
Item (read only) Indicates the port type assigned to the selected index.
Port (read only) Indicates the port number assigned to the selected index.
CoS 0 to 7, Any Select the target CoS to modify
Policer Profile No. 1 to 64 Select a number to modify the Policer Profile No.
VLAN ID (check box) Tick a box to enable the following options.
Enable (radio button) Click a radio button of the VLAN to be enabled.
VLAN ID (read only) Indicates the registered VLAN IDs.
VLAN Service Name (read only) Indicates the VLAN Service Names of the registered VLAN.
EIR 0 to 10000000 Modify the Excess Information Rate. [unit: kbit/s]
CIR 0 to 10000000 Modify the Committed Information Rate. [unit: kbit/s]
EBS 0 to 128 Modify the Excess Burst Size. [unit: kbit/s]
CBS 0 to 64 Modify the Committed Burst Size [unit: kbit/s]



8.10.2.3 Delete Policer Index
Procedure 8-44

page, click the Delete Policer Index tool button.
Delete Policer Index tool button
The Delete Policer Index option window appears.

4. Enter the Policer Index number to delete, then click the OK button.
Figure 8-201 Delete Policer Index Option Window

6. When the process is completed, another Information dialog box appears. Click
the OK button to proceed.
7. The QoS/Classification Setting window updates the information.


8.10.2.4 Policer Profile Setting
Procedure 8-45

page, click the Policer Profile Setting tool button.
Policer Profile Setting tool button
The Policer Profile Setting option window appears.

4. Click the link of the target profile number.

Figure 8-206 Policer Profile Setting Option Window
click
5. Policer Profile Detail Setting option window appears. Edit the values, then click
the OK button.
Figure 8-207 Policer Profile Detail Setting Window

EIR 0 to 10000000 Modify the Excess Information Rate. [unit: kbit/s]
CIR 0 to 10000000 Modify the Committed Information Rate. [unit: kbit/s]
EBS 0 to 128 Modify the Excess Burst Size. [unit: kbit/s]
CBS 0 to 64 Modify the Committed Burst Size [unit: kbit/s]

7. Policer Profile Setting option window updates the information. Click the Close
button.
NOTE: QoS/Classification Setting window may require to click the

Refresh tool button to update its information.
Figure 8-209 Policer Profile Setting Option Window

8.10.3 Shaper Setting Tab
8.10.3.1 QoS Class and Shaper Setting
Procedure 8-46
3. The QoS/Classification Setting window appears. In the Shaper Setting tabbed

page, click the link of Number of Queue or VLAN Shaper.
click
The Number of Queue Setting option window appears.

4. Specify the parameters, then click the OK button.

Figure 8-211 Number of Queue Setting Option Window
Table 8-40 Number of Queue Setting Options
Number of Queue 4 Classes QoS Specifies that the number of Shaper Classes is four, which enables
eight Shaper Groups including the Remaining Groups.
8 Classes QoS Specifies that the number of Shaper Classes is eight, which enables
four Shaper Groups including the Remaining Group. [default]
VLAN Shaper Enable Enables the VLAN Shaper settings.
Disable Disables the VLAN Shaper settings.
The priority in each mode is defined according to the following table:
Priority 8-Class 4-Class
7 7 3
6 6 3
5 5 2
4 4 2
3 3 1
2 2 1
1 1 0
0 0 0



Figure 8-213 QoS/Classification Setting

8.10.3.2 Edit Profile
Procedure 8-47

page, click the Edit Profile tool button.
Edit Profile tool button
The Edit Queue Profile option window appears.


Figure 8-215 Edit Queue Profile Option Window
Table 8-41 Number of Queue Setting Options (1 of 2)
Profile No. 1 to 15 Specify the Shaper Queue Profile number.
Profile Name (text field) Enter the profile name within 0 to 32 characters long
Drop Mode WTD Specifies Weighted Tail Drop (WTD) for the method to discard frames.
WRED Specifies Weighted Random Early detection (WRED)
Egress Queue 0 to 7 Indicates the Egress Queue number.
MAX Rate 1 to 10000 Enter the maximum bandwidths guaranteed rate. It is recommended to
set 3 or greater when changing the Queue Length from the default value.
[unit: Mbit/s; default: 1000]
MIN Rate 0 to 10000 Enter the minimum bandwidths guaranteed rate.


Table 8-41 Number of Queue Setting Options (2 of 2)
Scheduling Mode SP Specifies Strict Priority (SP) for Scheduler setting, which gives prior frame
process to target Shaper than that of DWRR specified Shaper Group.
[default]
DWRR Specifies the Deficit Weighted Round Robin (DWRR) for Scheduler
setting. The frame process is carried out according to the weight rate
specified by the DWRR Weight value.
Selecting DWRR enables the DWRR Weight parameter on the right.
DWRR Weight 1 to 127 Set the priority for DWRR Scheduling Mode. This parameter is disabled
when the Scheduling Mode selects SP.
Queue Length 16 to 65536 Specifies the Egress Queue size for the Service Class. [unit: k byte;
default: 64]
 The default value is recommended for GbE Port.
 The value 128 or greater is recommended for 10GbE Port.
The available value range differs depending on the state:
Table 8-42
State [M byte] Range of Value
2 16 to 1024
16 16 to 16384
64 16 to 165536
When the external packet buffer is disabled, the value greater than 1024
cannot be specified.
WTD Yellow TH 10 to 100 Specifies the WTD (Weighted Tail Drop) threshold value to the color
yellow. [unit: %; default: 100]
WRED Yellow TH 10 to 100 Specifies the WRED (Weighted Random Early Detection) threshold value
to the color yellow. [unit: %; default: 70]
WRED Green TH 10 to 100 Specifies the WRED (Weighted Random Early Detection) threshold value
to the color green. [unit: %; default: 70]
Figure 8-216 Egress Queue (example: 1xSP+3xDWRR)
Class3
Class2
WTD Yellow Frame

Threshold 70% (default) Class1
Queue Length (16 – 1024 kbytes)

Class0



8.10.3.3 Edit Egress Shaper Rate
Procedure 8-48

page, click the link in the Shaper Rate field.
click
The Port Shaper Rate Setting option window appears.

4. Select the rate, then click the OK button.

Figure 8-220 Port Shaper Rate Setting Option Window
Egress Shaper Rate 1 to 10000 Specify the egress shaper rate. [unit: Mbit/s]

6. The QoS/Classification Setting window updates the Shaper Rate

information.

8.10.3.4 Modify Queue Profile
Procedure 8-49

page, click the link in the Grp. field.
click
The Select Queue Profile option window appears.


Figure 8-224 Select Queue Profile Option Window
Priority Queue (available profile #) Select a Priority Queue Profile number to modify.
Profile
MAX Rate 1 to 10000 Enter the maximum bandwidths guaranteed rate.

MIN Rate 0 to 10000 Enter the minimum bandwidths guaranteed rate.

Scheduling Mode SP Specifies Strict Priority (SP) for Scheduler setting, which gives
prior frame process to target Shaper than that of DWRR
specified Shaper Group. [default]
DWRR Specifies the Deficit Weighted Round Robin (DWRR) for

Scheduler setting. The frame process is carried out according
to the weight rate specified by the DWRR Weight value.
Selecting DWRR enables the DWRR Weight parameter on the
right.
DWRR Weight 1 to 127 Set the priority for DWRR Scheduling Mode. This parameter is
disabled when the Scheduling Mode selects SP.



8.10.3.5 Edit Shaper Group Member
Procedure 8-50

page, click the link in the VLAN field.
click
Shaper Group Member List option window appears.

4. Click the Edit Shaper Group Member tool button.

Edit Shaper Group Member tool button
5. The Edit Shaper Group Member option window appears. Specify the
parameters, then click the OK button.

VLAN ID (registered VLAN Select a Priority Queue Profile number to modify.

#)
Shaper Group 1 to 7 Specifies a selected VLAN to the Shaper Group.
Remaining Selected VLAN is not assigned to any Shaper Groups.

7. Click the Close button of the Shaper Group Member List option window. The
QoS/Classification Setting window returns.

8.11 Filter Settings
8.11.1 Filter List Tab
8.11.1.1 Add Filter List
Procedure 8-51
Function Setting to select Filter Setting. The Filter Setting window appears.
3. In the Filter List tabbed page, click the Add tool button:
Figure 8-232 Filter Setting Window — Filter List Tab
Filter List tab

Add tool button
Add Filter Entry option window appears.

4. Specify the filter conditions, then click the OK button.

Figure 8-233 Add Filter Entry Option Window
Table 8-46 Add Filter Entry Parameters
Filter Type (read only) Indicates the filter type.
Filtering Rule
Filtering Mode (read only) Indicates the filtering mode.

Source MAC Any Selecting Any specifies no particular source MAC address to filter.
Address
(text field) Unticking (removing a tick from) the Any check box enables the text field
below. Enter the Source MAC Address (xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx) to filter.
Destination MAC Any Selecting Any specifies no particular destination MAC address to filter.
Address
(text field) Unticking (removing a tick from) the Any check box enables the text field
below. Enter the Destination MAC Address (xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx) to filter.
CoS Any Selecting Any specifies no particular CoS value to filter.
0 to 7 Unticking (removing a tick from) the Any check box enables the text field
below. Enter the CoS value to filter.
VLAN ID Any Selecting Any specifies no particular VLAN ID to filter.
1 to 4094 Unticking (removing a tick from) the Any check box enables the text field
below. Enter the VLAN ID to filter.
Ethernet Type Any Selecting Any specifies no particular Ethernet Type to filter.
0x0000 to Unticking (removing a tick from) the Any check box enables the text field
0xFFFF below. Enter the Destination MAC Address to filter.


6. The Filter Setting window (Filter Lithe newly added entry.


8.11.1.2 Modify Filter List
Procedure 8-52
3. In the Filter List tabbed page, click the Entry Index number of the target filter:
Entry Index Filter List tab
Modify Filter Entry option window appears.

4. Modify the filter conditions. See Table 8-46 Add Filter Entry Parameters for
descriptions regarding the parameters.
Figure 8-237 Modify Filter Entry Option Window
5. When the modification is completed, click the OK button. Information dialog

box appears.

The Filter Setting window (Filter List tab) updates the information.



8.11.1.3 Delete Filter List
Procedure 8-53
3. In the Filter List tabbed page, click the Delete tool button.
Figure 8-240 Filter Setting — Filter List Tab
Delete tool button

Filter List tab
Delete Filter Entry option window appears.

4. Tick a check box of the target filter, then click the OK button. Ticking a box on
top selects all.
Figure 8-241 Delete Filter Entry Option Window





8.11.2 Profile List Tab
8.11.2.1 Add Profile List
Procedure 8-54
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then its submenu expand
ETH Function Setting to select Filter Setting. The Filter Setting window
appears.
3. In the Profile List tabbed page, click the Add tool button:
Figure 8-245 Filter Setting Window — Profile List Tab
Add tool button

Profile List tab
Add Filter Profile option window appears.

4. Tick (leave a tick in a) Select check box(es) of the profile(s) to add, and specify
Filter Profile Name and Filtering Mode.
Figure 8-246 Add Filter Profile Option Window
Table 8-47 Add Filter Entry Parameters
Profile Index (read only) The index number is automatically applied.
Filter Profile Name (text field) Enter the profile name. Up to
Filtering Mode Deny
Permit
5. Click the OK button

The Filter Setting window (Profile List tab) updates the information.



8.11.2.2 Modify Profile List
Procedure 8-55
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then its submenu expand
ETH Function Setting to select Filter Setting. The Filter Setting window
appears.
3. In the Profile List tabbed page, click the Profile Index number of the target
profile.
click
Profile List tab
Modify Filter Profile option window appears.

4. Modify parameters, then click the OK button.

Figure 8-250 Modify Filter Profile Option Window

The Filter Setting window (Profile List tab) updates the information.



8.11.2.3 Delete Profile List
Procedure 8-56
Setting to select Filter Setting. The Filter Setting window appears.
3. Click the Profile List tab, then click the Delete tool button.
Delete tool button
Profile List tab
Delete Filter Entry option window appears.

4. Tick (click to leave a tick in) a check box of the target filter, then click the OK
button. Ticking a box on top selects all.
Figure 8-254 Delete Filter Entry Option Window





8.11.3 Port Filter Settings
Procedure 8-57
3. In the Port Filter Setting List tabbed page, click the Port number of the target
port.
Figure 8-258 Filter Setting Window — Port Filter Setting List Tab
Port Filter Setting List tab

Port Number
Ingress Filter Setting option window appears.
4. Select a Profile Index to apply, then click the OK button.

Figure 8-259 Ingress Filter Setting Option Window
NOTE: In the Profile Index drop-down list, the listed items excluding
Not Used have been created at the procedure earlier in the
Filter Settings.

6. The Filter Setting window (Port Filter Setting List tab) updates the information.

8.12 L2CP Transparent Setting

Procedure 8-58
Function Setting to select L2CP Transparent Setting. The L2CP Transparent
3. Click the Port number of the target.

Figure 8-262 L2CP Transparent Setting Window
click
L2CP Transparent Setting option window appears.

4. Select a Protocol to be tunneled, then click the OK button.

Figure 8-263 L2CP Transparent Setting Option Window
Table 8-48 L2CP Transparent/Mirroring Setting Parameters
L2 Protocol Transparency
Tunnel (check Tick a box of protocol to enable its PDU to transparent

Enable box) without processing.
NOTE: STP/RSTP Tunnel is not supported on the RSTP enabled port.

The window returns to L2CP Transparent Setting window.

Figure 8-265 L2CP Transparent Setting Window

8.13 Mirroring Setting
NOTE: The available frame size to operate the mirroring function is the maximum
frame size minus 16 bytes. See 8.2.2 Max Frame Size Setting for the
specified maximum frame size.
Procedure 8-59
Function Setting to select Mirroring Setting. The Mirroring Setting window
appears.

Figure 8-266 Mirroring Setting Window
Modify tool button
Mirroring Setting option window appears.

4. Set card(s) for mirroring, then click the OK button.

Figure 8-267 Mirroring Setting Option Window

The window returns to Mirroring Setting window.

Figure 8-269 Mirroring Setting Window

8.14 Port Isolate Setting

Procedure 8-60
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then submenu ETH
Function Setting to select Port Isolate Setting. The Port Isolate Setting
window appears.
3. Click the Port number of the target.

Figure 8-270 Port Isolate Setting Window
Port number
Port Isolate Setting option window appears.

4. Set or disable the Port Isolate, then click the OK button.

Figure 8-271 Port Isolate Option Window
Table 8-49 Port Isolate Parameters
Port Isolate Disable Disables the Port Isolate function.
Isolate GRP# Select the group number to enable Port Isolate.

6. The Port Isolate Setting window updates the information. Verify the displayed
information.
Figure 8-273 Port Isolate Setting Window

8.15 LLF Setting
8.15.1 Add LLF Group
Procedure 8-61
Function Setting to select LLF Setting. The LLF Setting window appears.
3. Click the Add LLF button.

Figure 8-274 LLF Setting Window and LLF Setting (Add) Option Window
Add LLF tool button
The LLF Setting (Add) option window appears.

4. Assign the appropriate value to each parameter, then click the OK button.
Figure 8-275 LLF Setting (Add) Option Window
Table 8-50 LLF Setting Parameters (1 of 2)
LLF GRP ID 1 to 16 Specifies the LLF Group ID Number.
Trunk Port Setting
Item (available Selects the target equipment.

equipment)
Port (available port) Selects the target port.

Table 8-50 LLF Setting Parameters (2 of 2)
Send LLF Signal Enable Enables sending the LLF Signals.

(This option is currently not editable.)
Ignore Received LLF Enable Ignores a received LLF Signal.

Signal
Disable Accepts received LLF Signal.
Edge Port Setting
—— (check box) Tick the check box to set the port as Edge Port.
OAM Send Port Setting OAM Send Port Setting option is added for the operation regarding IEEE802.3ah
(LINK OAM), which is currently not supported by iPASOLINK EX/A. All check
boxes must be unticked. If checked, LLF function does not operate properly, e.g.,
LLF will not shut down an Ethernet Port by detecting a Trunk Port failure.
5. Following dialog box appears. Click the OK button to proceed.


7. The LLF Setting window updates the information.

Figure 8-278 LLF Setting Window

8.15.2 Modify LLF Group
Procedure 8-62
3. Click an LLF GRP ID number of the target LLF. The LLF Setting (Modify)
option window appears.
LLF GRP numbers
The LLF Setting (Modify) option window appears.

4. Modify the settings, then click the OK button.

Figure 8-280 LLF Setting (Modify) Option Window
Table 8-51 LLF Setting (Modify) Parameters (1 of 2)
LLF GRP ID (read only) Indicates the selected LLF GRP ID number.
Trunk Port Setting
Item (available Selects to change the target equipment.

equipment)
Port (available port) Selects to change the target port.
Send LLF Signal Enable Enables sending the LLF Signals.

(This option is currently not editable.)
Disable

Table 8-51 LLF Setting (Modify) Parameters (2 of 2)
Ignore Received LLF Enable Ignores a received LLF Signal.

Signal
Disable Accepts received LLF Signal.
Edge Port Setting
—— (check box) Tick the check box to set the port as Edge Port.
OAM Send Port Setting OAM Send Port Setting option is added for the operation regarding IEEE802.3ah
(LINK OAM), which is currently not supported by iPASOLINK EX/A. All check boxes
must be unchecked. If checked, LLF function does not operate properly, e.g., LLF
will not shut down an Ethernet Port by detecting a Trunk Port failure.

6. The LLF Setting window updates the information.Verify the displayed

information.

8.15.3 Delete LLF Group
Procedure 8-63
3. Click the Delete LLF GRP button:

Delete LLF tool button
LLF Setting (Delete) option window appears.
4. Select the LLF GRP ID number of the target to be removed, then click the OK
button:
Figure 8-284 LLF Setting (Modify) Option Window


6. Information dialog box appears. Click the OK button to proceed:

7. The LLF Setting window updates the information. Verify the displayed
information.

8.16 Broadcast Storm Control Setting
Following procedure sets the input rate for the broadcast storm control, and enables/
disable the Broadcast Storm Control per Ethernet port (including MODEM port).
8.16.1 Set Broadcast Strom Control Rate
Procedure 8-64
Function Setting to select Broadcast Storm Control Setting. The Broadcast
Storm Control Setting window appears.
3. Click the Broadcast Storm Control Rate.

Figure 8-288 Broadcast Storm Control Setting Window
Broadcast Storm Control Rate
The Broadcast Storm Control Rate option window appears.

4. Specify the input rate of the target frames for Broadcast Storm Control, then click
the OK button:
Figure 8-289 Broadcast Storm Control Rate Option Window
Table 8-52 Broadcast Storm Control Rate Parameters
Broadcast Storm Control Rate 1 to 1000 Mbps Sets the input rate of the frame for the
Broadcast Storm Control.
[unit: Mbps]

6. The Broadcast Storm Control Setting window, updates the Broadcast Storm
Control Rate value.

8.16.2 Specify Broadcast Strom Control Settings
Procedure 8-65
Function Setting to select Broadcast Storm Control Setting. The Broadcast
Storm Control Setting window appears.
3. Click the target port to set the Port number.

Port number
Broadcast Storm Control option window appears.

4. Set Enable or Disable the Broadcast Storm Control by clicking its radio button,
then click the OK button:
Figure 8-293 Broadcast Storm Control Option Window

6. The Broadcast Storm Control Setting window updates the information. Verify
the displayed information.

8-208/END Set ETH Function

Set Equipment Clock and Synchronization 9-1
9. Set Equipment Clock and Synchronization
The procedures here sets the Internal/External Clock, and the Timing Source
Selection. This operation menu provides the following:
Equipment Clock Setting

Selects the Clock and Timing Source.
PTP Mode Setting

Specifies the PTP Mode, Transport Mode, etc.
PTP Domain Setting (to be supported in future version)

Provides the PTP Master Settings.

9-2 Set Equipment Clock and Synchronization
9.1 Equipment Clock Setting
9.1.1 Specify/Modify Equipment Clock Setting
Procedure 9-1
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then its submenu
Equipment Clock/Synchronization Setting to select Equipment Clock
Setting. The Equipment Clock Setting window appears.
3. Click the Modify tool button:
Figure 9-1 Equipment Clock Setting Window
Modify tool button
Equipment Clock Setting option window appears.

4. Assign the appropriate value to each parameter, then click the OK button.
Figure 9-2 Equipment Clock Setting Option Window
Table 9-1 Equipment Clock Setting Parameters (1 of 2)
Equipment CLK Sync The mode is for the network synchronization. When
Mode the radio synchronization is required, use this mode.
Async Equipment Clock uses the Internal Clock. Clock

sources will not configure the synchronization.
Master Sets the equipment clock as the Master Clock to

provide timing signals to synchronize Slave Clocks.
Slave Sets the equipment clock as a Slave Clock to be

synchronized with the Master Clock. Selecting Slave
enables the option box below and WTR Time option.
Clock Source QL Mode Sets to select the clock source by its quality level
Selective Mode (SSM). If the quality values are the same, priority
values are used to compare.
PL Mode Sets to select the clock source by its priority level,

signal fail, or an external command.
Timing Source No Entry Select a clock source.

For GbE Line CLKTP, only one of SFP Ports can be
Line CLK (MODEM) selected.
PTP Line CLK
Port (available port #) Select a Port number of the target that can extract the
clock information.
Priority Level 1 to 12 Sets the priority of the timing source manually.
SSM Usage Used Sets to use the Line SSM.
Not Used Sets not to use the Line SSM.

Table 9-1 Equipment Clock Setting Parameters (2 of 2)
Forced SSM Value QL-PRC Selects the Primary Reference Clock. Required when
QL-SSU-A the Line SSM Usage is set to Not Used:
QL-SSU-B
QL-SEC
Overwrite
Quality Level Quality
SSM Code
QL-PRC HIGH 0010
QL-SSU-A : 0100
QL-SSU-B : 1000
QL-SEC LOW 1011
WTR Timer 0 [s] Sets the Wait to Restore time that is a period to wait
for enabling the timing source when recovered.
10 [s]
20 [s]
30 [s]
1 [min] to 15 [min]
(by a minute)
5. Warning dialog box appears. Click the OK button of the dialog box.
6. Information dialog box appears. Click the OK button of the dialog box to
proceed.
The Equipment Clock Setting window updates the information.

Figure 9-5 Equipment Clock Setting Window
(left end)
(right end)

9.2 PTP Mode Setting
9.2.1 Modify PTP Mode
Procedure 9-2
Equipment Clock/Synchronization Setting to select PTP Mode Setting. The
PTP Mode Setting window appears.
3. Click the Modify PTP Mode tool button:

Figure 9-6 PTP Mode Setting Window
Modify PTP Mode tool button
Step 1 PTP Mode Setting option window appears.


Figure 9-7 Step 1 PTP Mode Setting Option Window
Table 9-2 PTP Mode Setting Parameters
PTP ModeNOTE Boundary Clock (BC) Enables the PTP Mode (Boundary Clock mode) settings..
Transparent Clock Enables to PTP Mode (Transparent Clock mode) settings.

(TC)
Disable Disables the PTP Mode settings.
PTP Profile IEEE 1588v2 Sets the PTP Profile to IEEE 1588v2.
G.8275.1 Sets the PTP Profile to G.8275.1.
Transport Mode PTP over Ethernet Transport Mode is fixed to PTP over Ethernet, which
operates in the mode according to the IEEE1588-2008
Annex F.
Communication Multicast Communication Mode is fixed to Multicast traffic, which

Mode operates in the mode according to the IEEE 1588-2008
Annex F.
Multicast Type Non Forwardable Select the Multicast Destination Address to use, which
should be associated with that of the opposing site
Forwardable equipment.
NOTE: PTP function (TC mode and BC mode) is supported for 1Gbps or
10Gbps transmission.
6. Warning dialog box appears. Click the OK button of the dialog box to proceed.

Step 2 PTP Detail Setting option window appears.

Figure 9-9 Step 2 PTP Detail Setting Option Window
Table 9-3 PTP Detail Setting Parameters
Clock Model PTP Only Clock Model is fixed to PTP Only.
Domain Number 0 to 127 Specify PTP Domain Number that should be associated with
that of the opposing site equipment.
(24 to 43)
 When PTP Profile selects G.8275.1, the available
numbers are limited to 43 from 24 in compliance with
G.8275.1.
PTP Priority Priority 1 Value 0 to 255 Specifies the priority to PTP packet, which should be associ-
ated with that of opposing site equipment.
Priority 2 Value 0 to 255
Local Priority 1 to 255

(Clock) Value
DSCP 0 to 63 Specify the DSCP value according to the network configura-

tion to use. This option is voided when Transport Mode
selects PTP over Ethernet.
PTP Hold Off Time 1 to 86400 Specifies the value of Holdoff Timer, which is a period to
release the Holdover state when the PTP function recovers
from the locked state. [unit: second]

proceed.
9. The PTP Mode Setting window updates the PTP Parameters information.Verify
the displayed information.

rebooted when parameter(s) is/are changed.

9.2.2 Add/Modify PTP Logical Interface
NOTE: The maximum number of the Logical Interfaces to register differ depending
on the specified PTP Message Rate value. Contact NEC for the further
information.
Procedure 9-3
3. Click the reference number in the PTP Logical Interface option box:
click
PTP Logical Interface Setting option window of the selected number appears.


Figure 9-13 PTP Logical Interface Setting Option Window
Table 9-4 PTP Logical Interface Setting Parameters (1 of 2)
Interface Name (text field) Name the interface to register.
IP Address x.x.x.x Enter the IP Address. This option is voided when

Transport Mode selects PTP over Ethernet.
Subnet Mask x.x.x.x Enter the Subnet Mask address. This option is voided
when Transport Mode selects PTP over Ethernet.
CoS 0 to 7 Specify the Class of Service value.
VLAN ID
Enable (radio button) (available VLAN IDs) Select a VLAN ID to enable.
Physical Port
Used (radio button) (available Port items.) Select a n ETH Port number to use.

Table 9-4 PTP Logical Interface Setting Parameters (2 of 2)
PTP Message Rage
Sync Message 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128 [unit: fps] When the PTP Profile selects
G.8275.1, the values for these
Delay_Req Message 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128 [unit: fps] options are fixed; not user-
changeable.
Announce Message 0.5, 1, 2, 4 [unit: fps]
proceed.
7. The PTP Mode Setting window updates the PTP Logical Interface information.
(left end)
(right end)



9.2.3 Delete PTP Logical Interface
Procedure 9-4
3. Click the Delete PTP Logical Interface tool button.

Delete PTP Logical Interface

tool button
Delete Interface option window of the selected number appears.

4. Select the interface number to remove, then click the OK button.

Figure 9-17 Delete Interface Option Window

proceed.
7. The PTP Mode Setting window updates the PTP Logical Interface information.


9-16/END Set Equipment Clock and Synchronization

Assign Alarm/AIS Settings 10-1
10. Assign Alarm/AIS Settings
Use the following procedures to configure the alarm severity, colors, and the relevant
settings of AIS events.
Correlation Settings
Users can modify the conditions to mask alarms (if displaying/clearing alarms on
LCT or LED).
Alarm Severity Setting

Users can modify the severity level of each alarm, such as critical, major, minor,
and warning, reported by iPASOLINKiPASOLINK EX Advanced: SET NETWORK AND SYSTEM
PROVISIONING EX/A.
BER Threshold Setting

Specify the threshold of BER alarm of (High/Low) input.

10-2 Assign Alarm/AIS Settings
10.1 Correlation Settings

Procedure 10-1
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then its submenu Alarm/
AIS Setting to select Correlation Setting. The Correlation Setting window
appears.
Figure 10-1 Correlation Setting Window
Modify tool button
Correlation Setting option window appears.
4. Set the appropriate polarity:

Figure 10-2 Correlation Setting Option Window

Table 10-1 Correlation Setting Parameters
Alarm Correlation On Masks the lower level alarms.
Off Releases the lower level alarms.
6. Click the OK button of the dialog box to proceed.

7. The Correlation Setting window updates the information. Verify the displayed
information.
Figure 10-4 Correlation Setting Window

10.2 Alarm Severity Setting

Using the following procedure, alarm severity levels can be assigned to conditions
that iPASOLINK has.
Procedure 10-2
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand Alarm/AIS
Setting to select Alarm Severity Setting. The Alarm Severity Setting window
appears.
3. Click the target object tab to select, and click the Modify tool button:
Figure 10-5 Alarm Severity Setting Window — RF Tab
Modify tool button click a tab
Alarm Severity Setting option window appears.
4. Assign the severity level by selecting the level from the Alarm Status drop-down
list:

Figure 10-6 Alarm Severity Setting Option Window (Example: RF)
Table 10-2 Alarm Status Values (Severity Levels)
Parameter Value Description (Intended Condition)
(Alarm Item) Critical A service-affecting condition that requires an immediate corrective

action.
Major A service-affecting condition that requires an urgent corrective action.
Minor An existence of non-service-affecting failure that should take a

corrective action to prevent more serious service-affecting failure.
Warning A potential or impending service affecting failure. Action should be

taken to further diagnose (if necessary), and correct the problem in
order to prevent more serious service affecting failure.
Table 10-3 Alarm Severity Setting — RF
RF Alarm Item Default State Your Assignment
TX Power Major
RX Level Major
Table 10-4 Alarm Severity Setting — MODEM (1 of 2)
MODEM Alarm Item Default State Your Assignment
LOF Major
Frame ID Major
High BER Major
Low BER Minor
Early Warning Warning
RDI Warning
UAE Warning
AMBR Range Mismatch Major

Table 10-4 Alarm Severity Setting — MODEM (2 of 2)
Compression Setting Mismatch Major
RTP Mode Setting Mismatch Major
Table 10-5 Alarm Severity Setting — Main
Module Major
Module - BB Major
Temperature Major
LTI Major
CLK FAIL Minor
CLK Drift Minor
SSM FAIL Minor
License Mismatch Major
Loss Sync Major
Loss Announce Major
Unusable Major

Table 10-6 Alarm Severity Setting — TCN
RF OFS Minor
RF BBE Minor
RF ES Minor
RF SES Minor
RF SEP Minor
RF UAS Minor
RX Level (MIN) Minor
SFP TX Power Minor
SFP RX Power Minor
RX Drop Events Minor
RX Undersize Pkts Minor
RX Fragments Minor
RX CRC Alignment Errors Minor
RX Oversize Pkts Minor
TX Collisions Minor
Table 10-7 Alarm Severity Setting — ETH (1 of 2)

ETH-OAM LOC Major
ETH-OAM RDI Major
ETH-OAM Mismerge Minor
ETH-OAM Unexpected MEP Minor
Link OAM Down Major
Remote Link Fault Major
Remote Dying Gasp Major
Remote Critical Event Major
LAN Link Major
ETH LOS Major
ETH TF Major
ETH LF Major
ETH RF Major

Table 10-7 Alarm Severity Setting — ETH (2 of 2)

SFP Type Mismatch Major
SFP Removed Major
See the Maintenance manual also for alarms that iPASOLINK can report, and their
meanings.


The Alarm Severity Setting window updates the information.

7. Verify the 287displayed information.

Figure 10-8 Alarm Severity Setting Window

10.3 BER Threshold Setting

Use the following procedures to specify the threshold of BER alarm of (High/Low)
input.
10.3.1 MODEM (1+0)
Procedure 10-3
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then expand Alarm/AIS
Setting to select BER Threshold Setting. The BER Threshold Setting window
appears.
3. Click the MODEM link:

Figure 10-9 BER Threshold Setting Window
click
4. BER Threshold Setting (MODEM) option window appears. Assign the

appropriate settings, then click the OK button.
Figure 10-10 BER Threshold Setting (MODEM) Option Window

Table 10-8 BER Threshold Setting (MODEM) Parameters
High BER 1E-3 Specifies the High BER Threshold of Microwave.
1E-4
1E-5
Low BER 1E-6 Specifies the Low BER Threshold of Microwave.
1E-7
1E-8
1E-9
proceed.
6. The BER Threshold Setting window updates the information. Verify the
Figure 10-12 BER Threshold Setting Window

10-12/END Assign Alarm/AIS Settings

Assign PMON/RMON Settings 11-1
11. Assign PMON/RMON Settings
Use the following procedures to set the relevant configuration of PMON (except
Ethernet port) and RMON (Ethernet port), including threshold values.
The PMON/RMON Setting provides the following menus:
RMON Threshold Setting

Threshold setting of PMON (except Ether port).
RMON Threshold Setting

Threshold setting of RMON (Ether port).
 Other Threshold Settings

Settings of TCN Level for RX Level, SFP Optical Power, and Temperature
threshold.
VLAN Counter Setting

Adding VLAN Counter (VLAN Counter Report) and Shaper Group Counter.
iPASOLINK EX Adanced: SET NETWORK AND SYSTEM PROVISIONING GGS-000547-01E

11-2 Assign PMON/RMON Settings
11.1 RMON Threshold Setting
Procedure 11-1
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Provisioning, then its submenu PMON/
RMON Setting to select PMON Threshold Setting. The PMON Threshold
Figure 11-1 PMON Threshold Setting Window
Modify tool button
PMON Threshold Setting RF - MODEM option window appears.
GGS-000547-01E iPASOLINK EX Adanced: SET NETWORK AND SYSTEM PROVISIONING

4. Assign the appropriate settings, the click the OK button.

Figure 11-2 PMON Threshold Setting Option Window
Table 11-1 PMON Threshold Setting (MODEM / SW GRP Tab) Parameters (1 of 2)
RF BBE 15min Occur 0 to 696074000 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF BBE
condition for a 15-Minute period.
Range of the values depends on the modulation
method.
Recover 0 to 696074000 Specifies the threshold value to clear the RF BBE for a
15-minute period.
method.
1day Occur 0 to Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF BBE

66823104000 condition for a 1-Day period.
method.
Recover 0 to Specifies the threshold value to clear the RF BBE

66823104000 condition for a 1-Day period.
method.
RF ES 15min Occur 0 to 900 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF ES

Recover 0 to 900 Specifies the threshold value to clear the RF ES for a

15-minute period.
1day Occur 0 to 86400 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF ES

condition for a 1-Day period.
Recover 0 to 86400 Specifies the threshold value to clear the RF ES


Table 11-1 PMON Threshold Setting (MODEM / SW GRP Tab) Parameters (2 of 2)
RF SES 15min Occur 0 to 900 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF SES
Recover 0 to 900 Specifies the threshold value to clear the RF SES for a
15-minute period.
1day Occur 0 to 86400 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF SES

Recover 0 to 86400 Specifies the threshold value to clear the RF SES

RF SEP 15min Occur 0 to 900 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF SEP
Recover 0 to 900 Specifies the threshold value to clear the RF SEP for a
15-minute period.
1day Occur 0 to 86400 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF SEP

Recover 0 to 86400 Specifies the threshold value to clear the RF SEP

RF UAS 15min Occur 0 to 900 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF UAS
Recover 0 to 900 Specifies the threshold value to clear the RF UAS for a
15-minute period.
1day Occur 0 to 86400 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF UAS

Recover 0 to 86400 Specifies the threshold value to clear the RF UAS

RF OFS 15mintes Occur 0 to 900 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF OFS
Recover 0 to 900 Specifies the threshold value to clear the RF OFS for a
15-minute period.
1day Occur 0 to 86400 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RF OFS

Recover 0 to 86400 Specifies the threshold value to clear the RF OFS

proceed.

The PMON Threshold Setting window updates the information.

Figure 11-4 PMON Threshold Setting Window

11.2 RMON Threshold Setting

Procedure 11-2
RMON Setting to select RMON Threshold Setting. The RMON Threshold

Figure 11-5 RMON Threshold Setting Window
Modify tool button
RMON Threshold Setting option window appears.

4. Assign the appropriate settings, then click the OK button:

Figure 11-6 RMON Threshold Setting Option Window
Table 11-2 RMON Threshold Setting Parameters
RX Drop Events 15 minutes 0 to 133929000 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RX Drop
Event condition for a 15-minute period.
1 day 0 to 4294967294 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RX Drop

Events condition for a 1-day period.
RX Undersize Pkts 15 minutes 0 to 133929000 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RX

Undersize Pkts condition for a 15-minute period.
1 day 0 to 4294967294 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RX

Undersize Pkts condition for a 1-day period.
RX Fragments 15 minutes 0 to 133929000 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RX

Fragments condition for a 15-minute period.

Fragments condition for a 1-day period.
RX CRC Alignment 15 minutes 0 to 133929000 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RX CRC
Errors Alignment Error for a 15-minute period.
1 day 0 to 4294967294 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RX CRC

Alignment Error for a 1-day period.
RX Oversize Pkts 15 minutes 0 to 133929000 Specifies the threshold value to detect an RX

Oversize Pkts condition for a 15-minute period.

Oversize Pkts condition for a 1-day period.
TX Collisions 15 minutes 0 to 133929000 Specifies the threshold value to detect a TX

collision for a 15-minute period.
1 day 0 to 4294967294 Specifies the threshold value to detect a TX

collision for a 1-day period.

proceed.
6. The RMON Threshold Setting window updates the information. Verify the
Figure 11-8 RMON Threshold Setting Window

11.3 Other Threshold Settings

11.3.1 RX Level TCN (Threshold Crossing Notification)
Procedure 11-3
RMON Setting to select Other Threshold Setting. The Other Threshold
3. Click the link of the target object.

Figure 11-9 Other Threshold Setting Window
click
4. Other Threshold Setting option window appears. Assign the appropriate

settings, then click the OK button:
Figure 11-10 Other Threshold Setting Option Window

Table 11-3 Other Threshold Setting Parameters
RX Level TCN Threshold –99 to –30 Specifies the threshold value to generate TCN
RX Level alarm. [unit: dBm]
proceed.
6. The PMON Threshold Setting window updates the information. Verify the

11.3.2 SFP Optical Power TCN (Threshold Crossing Notification)
Procedure 11-4
RMON Setting to select Other Threshold Setting. The Other Threshold
3. Click the link of the target object.

click
4. Other Threshold Setting option window appears. Assign the appropriate

settings, then click the OK button:
Figure 11-14 Other Threshold Setting Option Window

Table 11-4 Other Threshold Setting Parameters
SFP TX Power TCN –40 to 8.1 Specifies the threshold value to generate TCN
Threshold SFP TX Power alarm. [unit: dBm]
SFP RX Power TCN –40 to 8.1 Specifies the threshold value to generate TCN
Threshold SFP RX Power alarm. [unit: dBm]
proceed.
6. The PMON Threshold Setting window updates the information. Verify the

11.4 VLAN Counter Setting
11.4.1 VLAN Counter Select
11.4.1.1 Add VLAN Counter
Procedure 11-5
RMON Setting to select VLAN Counter Setting. The VLAN Counter Setting
window appears.
3. In the VLAN Counter Select tabbed page, click Add Counter tool button:
Figure 11-17 VLAN Counter Setting Window — VLAN Counter Select Tab
VLAN Counter Select tab
Add Counter tool button
VLAN Counter Setting — VLAN Counter Select (Add) option window appears.


Figure 11-18 VLAN Counter Select (Add) Option Window
Table 11-5 VLAN Counter Select Parameters
Item (available Part) Select a target part to specify.
Port (available Port) Select a target port to specify.
Enable (radio button) Clicking the radio button enables to count the frames that
pass through the selected VLAN.
5. Information dialog box appears. Click OK button of the dialog box to proceed.
The VLAN Counter Setting window updates the information.


Figure 11-20 VLAN Counter Setting Window

11.4.1.2 Modify VLAN Counter
Procedure 11-6
window appears.
3. In the VLAN Counter Select tabbed page, click the reference number of the
target VLAN Counter:
Figure 11-21 VLAN Counter Setting Window — VLAN Counter Select Tab
VLAN Counter Select tab
click
VLAN Counter Setting — VLAN Counter Select (Modify) option window

appears.


Figure 11-22 VLAN Counter Select (Modify) Option Window
Table 11-6 VLAN Counter Select Parameters
Item (available part) Select a target part to specify.
Port (available port) Select a target port to specify.
The VLAN Counter Setting window updates the information.



11.4.1.3 Delete VLAN Counter
Procedure 11-7
window appears.
3. In the VLAN Counter Select tabbed page, click the Delete Counter tool button:
Delete Counter tool button
4. The Delete VLAN Counter option window appears. Select a VLAN Counter No.
to be removed, then click the OK button:
Figure 11-26 Delete VLAN Counter Option Window
5. Click the OK button of the dialog box.

proceed.
7. The VLAN Counter Setting window updates the information. Verify the

11.4.2 Shaper Group Counter Select
11.4.2.1 Add Shaper Group Counter
Procedure 11-8
window appears.
3. In the Shaper Group Counter Select tabbed page, click Add Counter tool
button:
Figure 11-30 VLAN Counter Setting Window — Shaper Group Counter Select
Tab
Add Counter tool button
Shaper Group Counter Select tab
VLAN Counter Setting — Shaper Group Counter Select (Add) option window
appears.


Figure 11-31 Shaper Group Counter Select (Add) Option Window
Table 11-7 Shaper Group Counter Select Parameters
Item (available Part) Select a target part to specify.
Port (available port) Select a target port to specify.

11.4.2.2 Delete Shaper Group Counter
Procedure 11-9
window appears.
3. In the Shaper Group Counter Select tabbed page, click the Delete Counter
tool button:
Figure 11-34 VLAN Counter Setting Window — Shaper Group Counter Select
Tab
Delete Counter tool button
4. The Delete Shaper Group Counter option window appears. Select a VLAN
Counter No. to be removed, then click the OK button:
Figure 11-35 Delete Shaper Group Counter Option Window

11-24/END Assign PMON/RMON Settings

proceed.

GGS-000548-01E r1
June 2016
iPASOLINK EX
Advanced
OPERATION &
MAINTENANCE
NEC Corporation
GGS-000548-01E
GGS-000548-01E
Printed in Japan
CONTENTS –i–
OPERATION & MAINTENANCE
CONTENTS
1. GENERAL 1-1
2. PRECAUTION 2-1
3. ROUTINE MAINTENANCE 3-1
3.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.2 Current Metering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

3.2.1 Metering Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3.2.2 View/Change Current Metering Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
3.3 Performance Monitoring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

3.3.1 View PM Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
3.3.2 MODEM PMON Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
3.3.2.1 PM Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
3.3.2.2 Monitoring Points. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
3.3.3 ETH RMON Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
3.3.3.1 PM Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
3.3.4 VLAN Counter Report — VLAN Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
3.3.4.1 PM Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
3.3.4.2 Monitoring Points. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
3.3.5 VLAN Counter Report — Shaper Group Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
3.3.5.1 PM Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
3.3.6 PM Counter Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
3.3.6.1 MODEM PM Counter Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
3.3.6.2 Ethernet Interface PM Counter Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
3.3.7 TCN Threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
3.3.7.1 MODEM TCN Threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
3.3.7.2 MODEM RX Level TCN Default Threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
iPASOLINK EX Advanced: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000548-01E

June 2016
– ii – CONTENTS
3.3.7.3 MODEM RF BBE TCN Threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18

3.3.7.4 SFP TCN Threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
3.3.7.5 Ethernet Interface TCN Threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
4. CONTROL ITEMS 4-1
4.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

4.1.1 Maintenance Control Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.2 Before Starting Maintenance Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

4.2.1 Change to Maintenance Mode (for WebLCT Operation). . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
4.3 Loopback Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

4.3.1 L2 Loopback Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
4.3.2 Link OAM Loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
4.4 Switching Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12

4.4.1 Manual Switch Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
4.4.2 RSTP/MSTP Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
4.4.3 ERP Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
4.4.3.1 Execute ERP Switching Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
4.4.3.2 Execute Loop Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
4.4.4 LAG Revert Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
4.4.5 Timing Source Switch Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
4.4.5.1 Unlock the Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
4.4.5.2 Switch Timing Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
4.5 MODEM Maintenance Control (Radio Control). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28

4.5.1 ATPC Manual Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
4.5.2 TX Mute Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
4.5.2.1 TX Mute Control on Local Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
4.5.2.2 TX Mute Control Operation on Remote Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
4.5.3 CW Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
4.5.4 Carrier Search. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
4.6 Laser Shutdown Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45

4.6.1 Laser Shutdown Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
4.6.2 ALS Manual Switch Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
4.7 Equipment Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50
GGS-000548-01E iPASOLINK EX Advanced: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE

4.7.1 Reset H/W. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50

4.7.2 Reset F/W . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53
4.7.2.1 Reset CPU (BB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53
4.7.2.2 Reset CPU (RF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55
4.8 Maintenance Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-57
4.9 Equipment Utility. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-64

4.9.1 Backup Database [Export (NE --> Storage) Utility] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65
4.9.2 Update Database [Update (Storage --> NE) Utility] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-68
4.9.2.1 Update Program File — BB Firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-69
4.9.2.2 Update Program File — RF Firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74
4.9.2.3 Update FPGA Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-79
4.9.2.4 Update Configuration Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-83
4.9.2.5 Update Controller Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-87
4.9.2.6 Update MODEM Parameter Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-91
4.9.2.7 Update SSL Server Certificate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-96
4.9.3 Switch (Swap) Program ROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-99
4.9.3.1 Switch (Swap) BB ROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-99
4.9.3.2 Switch RF ROM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-101
4.9.4 Check USB Memory Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-103
4.9.5 Log Clear Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-104
4.9.6 Restore Factory Default Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-105
4.10 Inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-107

4.10.1 Equipment Inventory Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-107
4.10.2 Software License Key Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-111
4.10.3 User Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-113
5. CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE 5-1
5.1 Equipment Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

5.1.1 Reporting Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5.1.2 Alarm Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5.2 View Current Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

5.2.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
5.2.2 Display Current Status Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
5.2.2.1 Active Alarm Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

– iv – CONTENTS
5.2.2.2 Event Log Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

5.2.2.3 Equipment Tab and List of Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
5.2.2.4 ETH Tab and List of Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
5.2.3 Save the Displayed Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
5.3 Alarm Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14

5.3.1 iPASOLINK EX/A Controls and Indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
5.3.1.1 iPASOLINK EX/A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
5.4 Trouble Shooting Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15

5.4.1 BB Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
5.4.2 RX Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
5.4.3 TX Section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
5.5 Trouble Clearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18

5.5.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
5.5.2 Making Contact with NEC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
5.5.3 Objects and Their Condition Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
5.5.4 Clearing Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
ALS ............................................................................................................ 5-22
AMBR Range Mismatch............................................................................. 5-22
ATPC Power Mode .................................................................................... 5-22
CLK Drift .................................................................................................... 5-22
CLK FAIL ................................................................................................... 5-23
CLK Status Changed ................................................................................. 5-23
Clock Class ................................................................................................ 5-24
Clock ID ..................................................................................................... 5-24
Compression Setting Mismatch ................................................................. 5-24
Current Status............................................................................................ 5-25
Early Warning ............................................................................................ 5-25
Equipment Start-up Status......................................................................... 5-25
ETH LF....................................................................................................... 5-25
ETH LOS.................................................................................................... 5-26
ETH RF ...................................................................................................... 5-26
ETH TF ...................................................................................................... 5-27
ETH-OAM LOC .......................................................................................... 5-27
ETH-OAM Mismerge.................................................................................. 5-28
ETH-OAM RDI ........................................................................................... 5-29
ETH-OAM Unexpected MEP ..................................................................... 5-29
ETH-Ring Cause ........................................................................................ 5-30
ETH-Ring Multi RPL Owner Detect............................................................ 5-30
ETH-Ring Port0 Loop Detect ..................................................................... 5-30
ETH-Ring Port0 R-APS Timeout................................................................ 5-30
ETH-Ring Port0 Status .............................................................................. 5-30
ETH-Ring Port1 Loop Detect ..................................................................... 5-30

CONTENTS –v–
ETH-Ring Port1 R-APS Timeout................................................................ 5-31

ETH-Ring Port1 Status .............................................................................. 5-31
ETH-Ring Status ........................................................................................ 5-31
FDB Full ..................................................................................................... 5-31
Flow Control ............................................................................................... 5-31
Frame ID .................................................................................................... 5-31
Grandmaster / Clock ID ............................................................................. 5-32
Grandmaster / Clock Priority 1 ................................................................... 5-32
Grandmaster / Clock Priority 2 ................................................................... 5-32
Grandmaster / Clock Quality Accuracy ...................................................... 5-32
Grandmaster / Clock Quality Class ............................................................ 5-32
Grandmaster / Port ID ................................................................................ 5-33
High BER ................................................................................................... 5-33
LACP Status .............................................................................................. 5-33
LAG LINK ................................................................................................... 5-33
LAG LLF Status ......................................................................................... 5-34
LAG Port Loop Detect ................................................................................ 5-34
LAG Port Status ......................................................................................... 5-34
LAN Link .................................................................................................... 5-34
License Mismatch ...................................................................................... 5-35
Link OAM Down ......................................................................................... 5-35
LLF............................................................................................................. 5-36
LLF Message Timeout ............................................................................... 5-36
LLF OAM Received.................................................................................... 5-36
LOF ............................................................................................................ 5-36
Loss Announce .......................................................................................... 5-37
Low BER .................................................................................................... 5-37
LTI.............................................................................................................. 5-38
Maintenance .............................................................................................. 5-38
MDI/MDI-X ................................................................................................. 5-38
Module ....................................................................................................... 5-38
Module-BB ................................................................................................. 5-39
Mute Status................................................................................................ 5-39
Own Clock ID ............................................................................................. 5-39
PTP Clock Quality Level ............................................................................ 5-39
PTP Mode Setting Mismatch ..................................................................... 5-39
PTP Radio Clock Status ............................................................................ 5-40
PTP Source Status .................................................................................... 5-40
PTP Sync. Time ......................................................................................... 5-40
Quality Level .............................................................................................. 5-40
RDI............................................................................................................. 5-40
Remote Critical Event ................................................................................ 5-41
Remote Dying Gasp................................................................................... 5-41
Remote Errored Frame .............................................................................. 5-41
Remote Errored Frame Period................................................................... 5-41
Remote Errored Frame Seconds Summary............................................... 5-42
Remote Errored Frame Symbol Period...................................................... 5-42
Remote Link Fault ...................................................................................... 5-42
RX Level .................................................................................................... 5-42
RX Modulation ........................................................................................... 5-43

– vi/END – CONTENTS
SFP Port Type ........................................................................................... 5-43

SFP Removed............................................................................................ 5-43
SFP Type Mismatch................................................................................... 5-44
Speed & Duplex ......................................................................................... 5-44
SSM Fail .................................................................................................... 5-44
Temperature .............................................................................................. 5-45
Total FDB Full ............................................................................................ 5-45
Trap Suppression Status ........................................................................... 5-45
TX Modulation ............................................................................................ 5-45
TX Power ................................................................................................... 5-46
UAE............................................................................................................ 5-46

GENERAL 1-1
1. GENERAL
This chapter provides information regarding the routine and corrective maintenance
for the iPASOLINK EX Advanced (hereinafter iPASOLINK EX/A) of the 71-76 / 81-
86 GHz Packet Digital Radio System.
The information includes the following with their instructions and procedures:
 Precautions for maintenance
 Procedures for routine maintenance tasks
 Procedures for switching control operation
 Descriptions and procedures for corrective maintenance tasks

1-2/END GENERAL

PRECAUTION 2-1
2. PRECAUTION
The maintenance personnel should report his/her arrival and departure from a station
to the relevant station. Following precautions must be carefully observed during
maintenance.
 Warning
1. Once the equipment is powered on, wait at least 5 minutes before turning its
power off. Repeatedly turning the power on and off within a short interval may
cause the equipment damaged.
2. Contact NEC before downloading programs using WebLCT. Equipment may not
function correctly if the download takes place improperly.
 Caution
1. Before starting the maintenance work, the equipment should be set into the
Maintenance Mode through WebLCT.
2. Information on the maintenance and the control such as Mute, CW, LB, etc. is
released if the power is turned off.
3. If each setup item of NE SETUP or SYSTEM OPERATION is changed during

operation, traffic will be momentarily interrupted.
4. After the equipment starts up, allow the equipment to warm up for at least 30
minutes.

2-2/END PRECAUTION

ROUTINE MAINTENANCE 3-1
3. ROUTINE MAINTENANCE
3.1 Overview
Following procedures are provided for the routine maintenance and checks, which
ensures the equipment to operate properly, and prevents the equipment and system
from being damaged.
Before starting these checking procedures, carefully observe the precautions

described in the 2. PRECAUTION section.

3-2 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE
3.2 Current Metering
3.2.1 Metering Items
Following items can be set to measure:
Item Description
MODEM TX Power Indicates the RF output power level.
RX Level Indicates the RF input power level.
Power Supply Indicates the voltage level of Power Supply.
BER Indicates the value of BER measurement.
TX Modulation Indicates the current TX Modulation.
RX Modulation Indicates the current RX Modulation.
SFP SFP TX Power Indicates the optical output power of SFP.
SFP RX Power Indicates the optical input power of SFP.
GGS-000548-01E IPASOLINK EX ADVANCED: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE

3.2.2 View/Change Current Metering Setting

Procedure 3-1
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Metering to select Current Metering.
3. The Current Metering window appears. To view or change the metering

setting, click the link of target object.
Figure 3-1 Current Metering Window
click
The Current Metering option window appears.

4. Click the Normal Speed / High Speed radio button provided for the Refresh
Cycle option to specify the period of retrieving data:
Figure 3-2 Current Metering Option Window (MODEM)
Figure 3-3 Current Metering Option Window (SFP)
Table 3-1 Current Metering Parameter
Refresh Cycle Normal Speed (10sec) Refreshes measured value every 10 seconds.
High Speed (3sec) Refreshes measured values every 3 seconds.
NOTES:
1. If a parameter indicates the abnormal value, check the Current Status and the
performance monitor (Current/History PMON/RMON Report), and operate the
loopback test to isolate the alarmed sections from the normal sections.
2. RX LEVEL varies depending on the received RF signal level.
3. Power Supply voltage varies depending on the length of cable.
5. Click the Cancel button on the option window.


3.3 Performance Monitoring

The Performance Monitoring (PM) is used to identify and isolate the problem if
occurred at a particular line or path. This function also monitors the quality of lines
and paths. All Performance Monitoring parameters are collected every minute and
accumulated to 15-minute and 24-hour (1 day) statistics.
 Red-colored field indicates the value of TCN report.
 Yellow-colored field indicates that the system is in the Maintenance Mode.
 A value with an asterisk (*) is invalid, which could not appropriately be
obtained due to the failed condition (alarm), etc.
3.3.1 View PM Reports

Procedure 3-1
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand PMON/RMON Report to select the
desired object. Example below selects MODEM PMON Report.
Figure 3-4 PMON/RMON Report — MODEM PMON Report Window

3.3.2 MODEM PMON Report
Figure 3-5 MODEM PM Report

 Clicking the link opens its detailed data.

3.3.2.1 PM Items
Table 3-2 PM Items for MODEM
Monitor Type Description Spec.
RF BBE Background Block Error The sum of the background block error. ITU-T G.826
RF ES Errored Second The cumulative time in which more than ITU-T G.826
one block error per second was detected.
RF SES Severely Errored Second The cumulative time in which the BER of a ITU-T G.826
one second period exceeded a set
percentage (30%).
RF SEP Severely Errored Period The cumulative time in which the BER of a ITU-T G.826
one second period exceeded 10E-3.
RF UAS Unavailable Second The cumulative time in which the unit ITU-T G.826
remained inoperative.
RF OFS Out of Frame Second The total number of seconds of Out of ITU-T G.826
Frame condition, which is generated in 15
minute-blocks. (OFS is applied to the Total
only).
RX Level (MAX) The minimum and maximum reception ITU-T G.826

level.
RX Level (MIN)
TX Power (MAX) The minimum and maximum output power. ——

TX Power (MIN) ——
TX Modulation Modulating value at radio transmission. ——
RX Modulation Modulating value at radio reception. ——
3.3.2.2 Monitoring Points
Figure 3-6 Monitoring Point and Range for Line Failure
1 2
Facility Monitoring Item Monitoring Point Monitoring Range
Near-End
RF BBE, ES, SES-, UAS, OFS 1 2➜1

Figure 3-7 Monitoring Point and Range for Receiving Level
1 2
Near-End
RF RX Level (MAX)
1 1
RX Level (MIN)
Figure 3-8 Monitoring Point and Range for Transmitting Level
1 2
Near-End
RF TX Power (MAX)
2 2
TX Power (MIN)
Figure 3-9 Monitoring Point and Range for Modulating Level
1 2
Near-End
RF TX Modulation 2 2
RX Modulation 1 1

3.3.3 ETH RMON Report

Figure 3-10 Ethernet Interface PM Report

3.3.3.1 PM Items
Table 3-3 PM Items for Ethernet Interface (Sheet 1 of 2)
RX Octs The total number of octets received on the interface, RFC1757

including framing characters.
TX Octs The total number of octets transmitted out of the interface, RFC1757
including framing characters.
RX Pkts A count of packets received (including bad packets, all RFC1757

Unicast, Broadcast packets, and Multicast packets).
TX Pkts The total number of packets transmitted. RFC1757
RX Drop Events A count of drop packets. RFC1757
RX Undersize Pkts A count of packets received that were less than 64 octets RFC1757
long and were otherwise well formed
RX Fragments A count of error frames of less than 64 octets in received data RFC1757
length.
RX 64Octs A count of received packets that were 64 octets in length RFC1757

(including error packets).
TX 64Octs A count of transmitted packets that are 64 octets in length RFC1757

(including error packets).
RX 65 to 127Octs A count of received packets that were between 65 and 127 RFC1757
octets in length (including error packets)
TX 65 to 127Octs A count of transmitted and received packets that were RFC1757

between 65 and 127 octets in length (including error
packets).
RX128 to 255Octs A count of received packets that were between 128 and 255 RFC1757
octets in length (including error packets).
TX128 to 255Octs Number of transmitted packets that were between 128 and RFC1757
255 octets in length (including error packets).
TX 256 to 511Octs A count of transmitted packets that were between 256 and RFC1757
RX 1024 to 1518Octs A count of received packets that were between 1023 and RFC1757

Table 3-3 PM Items for Ethernet Interface (Sheet 2 of 2)
RX CRC Alignment Errors A count of reception alignments of FCS error frames. RFC1757
RX Oversize Pkts A count of frames received on a particular interface that RFC1757

exceeds the maximum data length.
TX Oversize Pkts A count of frames transmitted that exceeds the maximum RFC1757
data length (1519 octets).
RX Jabbers A count of error frames bigger than 1519 octets in receive RFC1757
data length.
RX Multicast Pkts A count of good multicast packets received (excluding RFC1757

broadcast packets).
TX Multicast Pkts The total number of packets that higher-level protocols RFC1757
requested to be transmitted to a multicast address.
RX Broadcast Pkts A count of good broadcast packets received. RFC1757
TX Broadcast Pkts The total number of packets that are higher-level protocols RFC1757
requested to be transmitted to a broadcast address.
TX Collisions A count of collisions on this Ethernet segment. RFC1757
RX Unknown TPID A count of abandoned frames included in unsetting TPID RFC1757

frames received, or number of frames abandoned by
Broadcast Storm Control function.
RX Unknown VID A count of abandoned frames included in unsetting VID RFC1757

frames received.
RX MAC Limit A count of frames discarded due to exceeding MAC learning RFC1757
Limit.
RX Filter Discard A count of frames abandoned by input filtering function. RFC1757
TX Filter Discard A count of frames abandoned by output filtering function. RFC1757
RX QoS Discard A count of frames abandoned by Policing function of input RFC1757

port.
TX Queue# Discard A count of QoS frames discard by transmission Queue#. RFC1757

[# denotes the queue level 0 to 7.]
NOTE: TX Queue# Discard does not include Ageout Drop.
SFP RX Power (MIN) The minimum received power at SFP Port. ——
SFP TX Power (MIN) The minimum transmitted power at SFP Port. ——

3.3.4 VLAN Counter Report — VLAN Counter

Figure 3-11 VLAN Counter PM Report
(leftmost filed)
(rightmost filed)

3.3.4.1 PM Items
Table 3-4 PM Items for Ethernet Interface
VLAN TX Octets The total number of octets transmitted on the interface. ——
VLAN RX Octets The total number of octets received on the interface. ——
VLAN TX Frames The total number of transmitted VLAN frames. ——
VLAN RX Frames The total number of received VLAN frames.
VLAN RX QoS The total number of received VLAN frames that have been
Discard Frame discarded by the policing function per VLAN.
3.3.4.2 Monitoring Points
Figure 3-12 Monitoring Point for VLAN Counter
PORT 2 / VLAN 200

PORT 1 / VLAN 200 MONITORING POINT
MONITORING POINT
PORT 1 PORT 2
INGRESS EGRESS
VLAN 100 VLAN 200

VLAN 300

3.3.5 VLAN Counter Report — Shaper Group Counter

Figure 3-13 Shaper Group Counter PM Report
(leftmost field)
(rightmost field)
3.3.5.1 PM Items
Table 3-5 PM Items for Ethernet Interface
TX Octets The total number of transmitted octets. ——
TX Frame The total number of transmitted frames. ——
TX Queue # Discard Frame The total number of QoS discarded frames that are leveled to ——
Queue # per VLAN.
[# denotes the queue level 0 to 7]

3.3.6 PM Counter Ranges
3.3.6.1 MODEM PM Counter Range

Table 3-6 MODEM PM Counter Range
Monitor Type 15 Min PM Counter Range 24H PM Counter Range
RF OFS 0 to 900 0 to 86400
RF BBE Value depends on radio setting Value depends on radio setting

(CS and Modulation). (CS and Modulation).
RF ES 0 to 900 0 to 86400
RF SES 0 to 900 0 to 86400
RF SEP 0 to 900 0 to 86400
RF UAS 0 to 900 0 to 86400
3.3.6.2 Ethernet Interface PM Counter Range

Table 3-7 LAN PM Counter Range (Sheet 1 of 2)
RX Octs 0 to 18446744073709551615 0 to 18446744073709551615
TX Octs 0 to 18446744073709551615 0 to 18446744073709551615
RX Pkts 0 to 18446744073709551615 0 to 18446744073709551615
TX Pkts 0 to 18446744073709551615 0 to 18446744073709551615
RX Drop Events 0 to 133929000 0 to 4294967294
RX Undersize Pkts 0 to 133929000 0 to 4294967295
RX Fragments 0 to 133929000 0 to 4294967295
RX 64Octs 0 to 18446744073709551615 0 to 18446744073709551615
TX 64Octs 0 to 18446744073709551615 0 to 18446744073709551615
RX 65 to 127Octets 0 to 18446744073709551615 0 to 18446744073709551615
TX 65 to 127Octets 0 to 18446744073709551615 0 to 18446744073709551615
RX 128 to 255Octets 0 to 18446744073709551615 0 to 18446744073709551615
TX 128 to 255Octets 0 to 18446744073709551615 0 to 18446744073709551615
RX 256 to 511Octets 0 to 18446744073709551615 0 to 18446744073709551615
TX 256 to 511Octets 0 to 18446744073709551615 0 to 18446744073709551615
RX 512 to 1023Octets 0 to 18446744073709551615 0 to 18446744073709551615
TX 512 to 1023Octets 0 to 18446744073709551615 0 to 18446744073709551615

Table 3-7 LAN PM Counter Range (Sheet 2 of 2)
RX Pkts 1024 to 1518Octets 0 to 18446744073709551615 0 to 18446744073709551615
TX Pkts 1024 to 1518Octets 0 to 18446744073709551615 0 to 18446744073709551615
RX CRC Alignment Errors 0 to 133929000 0 to 4294967294
RX Oversize Pkts 0 to 133929000 0 to 4294967294
TX Oversize Pkts 0 to 4294967294 0 to 4294967274
RX Jabbers 0 to 4294967294 0 to 4294967294
RX Multicast Pkts 0 to 4294967294 0 to 4294967294
TX Multicast Pkts 0 to 4294967294 0 to 4294967294
RX Broadcast Pkts 0 to 4294967294 0 to 4294967294
TX Broadcast Pkts 0 to 4294967294 0 to 4294967294
TX Collisions 0 to 133929000 0 to 4294967294
RX Unknown TPID 0 to 18446744073709551615 0 to 18446744073709551615
RX Unknown VID 0 to 18446744073709551615 0 to 18446744073709551615
RX MAC Limit 0 to 18446744073709551615 0 to 18446744073709551615
RX Filter Discard 0 to 18446744073709551615 0 to 18446744073709551615
TX Filter Discard 0 to 18446744073709551615 0 to 18446744073709551615
RX QoS Discard 0 to 18446744073709551615 0 to 18446744073709551615
TX Queue0 Discard 0 to 18446744073709551615 0 to 18446744073709551615
SFP RX Power –40.0 to +8.1 –40.0 to +8.1
SFP TX Power –40.0 to +8.1 –40.0 to +8.1

3.3.7 TCN Threshold
3.3.7.1 MODEM TCN Threshold

Table 3-8 MODEM TCN Threshold
Monitor Type 15 Min TCN Threshold 24H TCN Threshold
Range Default Threshold Range Default Threshold
Occur Recovery Occur Recovery
RF OFS 1 to 900 900 90 1 to 86400 65534 650
RF BBE Values depend on the radio setting (CS and Values depend on the radio settings (CS
Modulation). and Modulation).
RF ES 1 to 900 900 90 1 to 86400 65534 650
RF SES 1 to 900 900 90 1 to 86400 65534 650
RF SEP 1 to 900 900 90 1 to 86400 65534 650
RF UAS 1 to 900 900 90 1 to 86400 65534 650
RX LEV –99 to –30 Values depend on the radio –99 to –30 Values depend on the radio
setting (CS and Modulation). setting (CS and Modulation).
3.3.7.2 MODEM RX Level TCN Default Threshold

Table 3-9 MODEM RX LEV TCN Default Threshold
No. Modulation RSL (dBm)

Type
CS = 62.5 M CS = 125 M CS = 250 M CS = 500M CS = 750 M CS = 1000M CS = 2000M
0 QPSK 1/4 –88 –85 –82 –79 –77 –76 –73
1 QPSK 1/2 –85 –82 –79 –76 –74 –73 –70
2 QPSK 1/1 –82 –79 –76 –73 –71 –70 –67
3 8PSK 1/1 –79 –76 –73 –70 –68 –67 –64
4 16QAM 1/1 –76 –73 –70 –67 –65 –64 –61
5 32QAM –73 –70 –67 –64 –62 –61 –58
6 64QAM –70 –67 –64 –61 –59 –58 –55
7 128QAM –67 –64 –61 –58 –56 –55 –52
8 256QAM –64 –61 –58 –55 –53 –52 –49

3.3.7.3 MODEM RF BBE TCN Threshold

Table 3-10 MODEM RF BBE TCN Threshold (Sheet 1 of 2)
Modulation Type 15 Min TCN Threshold 24H TCN Threshold
CS Modulation Range Default Threshold Range Default Threshold
Detect Recovery detect Recovery
62.5 MHz QPSK 1 to 6671000 66710 6671 1 to 640416000 6404160 640416
8PSK 1 to 10006000 100060 10006 1 to 960576000 9605760 960546
16QAM 1 to 13342000 133420 13342 1 to 1280832000 12808320 1280832
32QAM 1 to 16677000 166770 16677 1 to 1600992000 16009920 1600992
64QAM 1 to 20013000 200130 20013 1 to 1921248000 19212480 1921248
128QAM 1 to 23349000 233490 23349 1 to 22415040 22415040 2241504
256QAM 1 to 26684000 266840 26684 1 to 2561664000 25616640 2561664
125 MHz QPSK 1 to 13265000 132650 13256 1 to 1273440000 12734400 1273440
8PSK 1 to 19898000 198980 19898 1 to 1910208000 19102080 1910208
16QAM 1 to 26531000 265310 26531 1 to 2546976000 25469760 2546976
32QAM 1 to 33164000 331640 33164 q to 3183744000 31837440 3183744
64QAM 1 to 39797000 397970 39797 1 to 3820512000 38205120 3820512
128QAM 1 to 46430000 464300 46430 1 to 4457280000 44572800 4457280
256QAM 1 to 53062000 530620 53062 1 to 5093952000 50939520 5093652
250 MHz QPSK 1 to 26563000 265630 36563 1 to 2550048000 25500480 2550048
8PSK 1 to 39845000 398450 39845 1 to 3825120000 38251200 3825120
16QAM 1 to 53126000 531260 53126 1 to 5100096000 51000960 5100096
32QAM 1 to 66408000 664080 66408 1 to 6375168000 63751680 6375168
64QAM 1 to 79690000 796900 79690 1 to 7650240000 76502400 7650240
128QAM 1 to 92971000 929710 92971 1 to 8925216000 89252160 8925216
256QAM 1 to 106253000 1062530 106253 1 to 10200288000 102002880 12022088
500 MHz QPSK q to 53306000 533060 53306 1 to 5117376000 51173760 5117376
8PSK 1 to 79959000 799590 79959 1 to 7676064000 76760640 7676064
16QAM 1 to 106612000 1066120 106612 1 to 10234752000 102347520 10234752
32QAM 1 to 133265000 1332650 133265 1 to 12793440000 127934400 12793440
64QAM 1 to 159918000 1599180 159918 1 to 15352128000 153521280 15352128
128QAM 1 to 186572000 1865720 186572 1 to 17910912000 179109120 17910912
256QAM 1 to 213225000 2132250 213225 1 to 20469600000 204696000 20469600

Table 3-10 MODEM RF BBE TCN Threshold (Sheet 2 of 2)
Modulation Type 15 Min TCN Threshold 24H TCN Threshold
CS Modulation Range Default Threshold Range Default Threshold
Detect Recovery detect Recovery
750 MHz QPSK 1 to 80753000 807530 80753 1 to 7752288000 77522880 7752288

(High
Capacity 8PSK 1 to 121130000 1211300 121130 1 to 11628480000 116284800 11628480
Mode)
16QAM 1 to 161507000 1615070 161507 1 to 15504672000 155046720 15504672
32QAM 1 to 201884000 2018840 201884 1 to 19380864000 193808640 19380864
64QAM 1 to 242261000 2422610 242261 1 to 23257056000 232570560 23257056
128QAM 1 to 282638000 2826380 282638 1 to 27133248000 271332480 27133248
256QAM 1 to 323015000 3230150 323015 1 to 31009440000 310094400 31009440
750 MHz QPSK 1 to 73860000 738600 73860 1 to 7090560000 70905600 7090560

(High
System 8PSK 1 to 110790000 1107900 110790 1 to 10635840000 106358400 10635840
Gain
16QAM 1 to 147720000 1477200 147720 1 to 14181120000 141811200 14181120
Mode)
32QAM 1 to 184650000 1846500 184650 1 to 17726400000 177264000 17726400
64QAM 1 to 221580000 2215800 221580 1 to 21271680000 212716800 21271680
128QAM 1 to 258510000 2585100 258510 1 to 24816960000 248169600 24816960
256QAM 1 to 295440000 2954400 295440 1 to 28362240000 283622400 28362240
1000 MHz QPSK 1 to 108921000 1089210 108921 1 to 1045646000 104564160 10456416
8PSK 1 to 163381000 1633810 163381 1 to 15684576000 156845760 15684576
16QAM 1 to 217842000 2178420 217842 1 to 20912832000 209128320 20912832
32QAM 1 to 272302000 2723020 272302 1 to 26140992000 261409920 26140992
64QAM 1 to 326763000 3267630 326763 1 to 31369248000 313692480 31369248
128QAM 1 to 381224000 3812240 381224 1 to 36597504000 365975040 36597504
256QAM 1 to 435684000 4365840 435684 1 to 41825664000 418256640 41825664
2000 MHz QPSK 1 to 198878000 1988780 198878 1 to 19092288000 190922880 19092288
8PSK 1 to 298317000 2983170 298317 1 to 28638432000 286384320 28638432
16QAM 1 to 397757000 3977570 397757 1 to 38184672000 381846720 38184672
32QAM 1 to 497196000 4971960 497196 1 to 47730816000 477308160 47730816
64QAM 1 to 596635000 5966350 596635 1 to 57276960000 572769600 57276960
128QAM 1 to 696074000 6960740 696074 1 to 66823104000 668231040 66823104
256QAM — — — — — —

3-20/END ROUTINE MAINTENANCE
3.3.7.4 SFP TCN Threshold
Table 3-11 SFP TCN Threshold
Rx Power (MIN) –40.0 to+8.1 –40.0 –40.0 to +8.1 –40.0
Tx Power (MIN) –40.0 to+8.1 –40.0 –40.0 to +8.1 –40.0
3.3.7.5 Ethernet Interface TCN Threshold
Table 3-12 LAN TCN Threshold
RX Drop Event 1 to 133929000 133929000 0 to 4294967294 4294967294
RX Undersize Packets 1 to 133929000 133929000 0 to 4294967294 4294967294
Rx Fragment Packets 1 to 133929000 133929000 0 to 4294967294 4294967294
RX CRC 1 to 133929000 133929000 0 to 4294967294 4294967294

Alignment Error
RX Oversize Packets 1 to 133929000 133929000 0 to 4294967294 4294967294
TX Collisions 1 to 133929000 133929000 0 to 4294967294 4294967294

CONTROL ITEMS 4-1
4. CONTROL ITEMS
4.1 Overview
Following lists the control items available by the WebLCT, which is operational in
the Maintenance mode only. Note that operating these control items may cause a
traffic interruption if the system is in service.
Following are the Maintenance items provided by WebLCT:
4.1.1 Maintenance Control Menu
WebLCT Menu Section Providing the Description/Procedure
Loopback Control 4.3 Loopback Operation
L2 Loopback Control 4.3.1 L2 Loopback Control

(Loopback 1 / Loopback 2)
Link OAM Loop Back Control 4.3.2 Link OAM Loopback
Protection Control 4.4 Switching Control
RSTP/MSTP Control 4.4.2 RSTP/MSTP Control
ERP Control 4.4.3 ERP Control
LAG Revert Control 4.4.4 LAG Revert Control
Timing Source Switch Control 4.4.5 Timing Source Switch Control
MODEM Maintenance Control 4.5 MODEM Maintenance Control (Radio Control)
4.5.1 ATPC Manual Control
4.5.2 TX Mute Control
4.5.3 CW Control
4.5.4 Carrier Search
Laser Shutdown Control 4.6 Laser Shutdown Control
4.6.1 Laser Shutdown Control
4.6.2 ALS Manual Switch Control
H/W F/W Reset Control 4.7 Equipment Reset
H/W Reset Control 4.7.1 Reset H/W
F/W Reset Control 4.7.2 Reset F/W
Maintenance Test 4.8 Maintenance Test
ETH OAM LB / LT / DM / LM Control

4-2 CONTROL ITEMS
WebLCT Menu Section Providing the Description/Procedure
PMON/RMON Report 3.3 Performance Monitoring
MODEM PMON Report 3.3.2 MODEM PMON Report
ETH RMON Report 3.3.3 ETH RMON Report
VLAN Counter Report 3.3.4 VLAN Counter Report — VLAN Counter

3.3.5 VLAN Counter Report — Shaper Group Counter
Metering 3.2 Current Metering
Current Metering
Equipment Utility 4.9 Equipment Utility
Export (NE –> Storage) Utility 4.9.1 Backup Database [Export (NE --> Storage) Utility]
Update (Storage –> NE) Utility 4.9.2 Update Database [Update (Storage --> NE) Utility]
Program ROM Switching 4.9.3 Switch (Swap) Program ROM
USB Memory Utility 4.9.4 Check USB Memory Utility
Log Clear Function 4.9.5 Log Clear Function
Shipment 4.9.6 Restore Factory Default Settings
User Account See 2.2 User Management in the Operation manual.
Inventory 4.10 Inventory
Equipment Inventory Information 4.10.1 Equipment Inventory Information
Software License Information 4.10.2 Software License Key Information
User Description 4.10.3 User Description
Software License Setup See 2.1 Setup Software License in the Set Network and
System Provisioning manual.
GGS-000548-01E iPASOLINK EX Advanced: Operation & Maintenance

CONTROL ITEMS 4-3
4.2 Before Starting Maintenance Operation
4.2.1 Change to Maintenance Mode (for WebLCT Operation)
Procedure 4-1
1. Launch the WebLCT. See the Operation manual for detailed steps.
2. Click the Maintenance button on the tool bar of WebLCT window.
Figure 4-1 WebLCT Main Window
Maintenance button
MAINT indication
3. Confirm that the MAINT indication on the upper side of WebLCT window
turns orange. This step ends the procedure.

4-4 CONTROL ITEMS
4.3 Loopback Operation

To execute the loopback control, set the system into the Maintenance mode.
Important:
To operate the Loopback Control, the system must be set into the Maintenance
mode.
4.3.1 L2 Loopback Control
This operation carries out the loopbacks for Layer 2 level. Incoming Layer 2 frames
are looped to the source direction with MAC Destination and Source Address Swap.
iPASOLINK EX/A provides two modes for L2 Loopback Control:
 Loopback 1 Mode: Loops frames back at the near side of L2SW.
 Loopback 2 Mode: Loops frames back at the far side of L2SW. The selected
ports must be operative. In this mode, the available frame size to operate L2
loopback is the maximum frame size minus 16 bytes. The maximum frame size is
specified by the 8.2.2 Max Frame Size Setting in the Set Network and
System Provisioning manual.
Procedure 4-2
1. Click the Maintenance tool button on the tool bar of the WebLCT to put the
system into the Maintenance Mode. The MAINT indicator on the tool bar
changes to orange.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand the Maintenance Control, then its
submenu Loopback Control to select L2 Loopback Control.
The L2 Loopback Control window appears.

CONTROL ITEMS 4-5
3. Click Loopback Control.
Figure 4-2 L2 Loopback Control Window
click
L2 Loopback Control >> Step 1 option window appears.
4. Select a port to execute the Loopback operation, then click the OK button.
Figure 4-3 L2 Loopback Control >> Step 1 Option Window
L2 Loopback Control >> Step 2 option window appears.

4-6 CONTROL ITEMS

Figure 4-4 L2 Loopback Control >> Step 2 Option Window
Table 4-1 L2 Loopback Control Parameters

Loopback Port Loopback Operates a port loopback.
Mode
VLAN Loopback Operates a VLAN loopback.
L2 Loopback Loopback1 Loops back at the near side of the L2 Switch.
Loopback2 Loops back at the far side of the L2 Switch. In this mode, the available
frame size to loop back is the maximum size that is specified by Max
Frame Size Setting (see 8.2.2 Max Frame Size Setting in the Set
Network and System Provisioning manual) minus 16 bytes.
Release Time * No Limit Keeps L2 Loopback operations.
90 [s] Sets 90 seconds to wait before restoring.
180 [s] Sets 180 seconds to wait before restoring.
300 [s] Sets 300 seconds (5 minutes) to wait before restoring.
60 [min] Sets 60 minutes to wait before restoring.
12 [h] Sets 12 hours to wait before restoring.

CONTROL ITEMS 4-7
8. L2 Loopback Control window updates the information.
Figure 4-7 L2 Loopback Control Window
9. When the loopback test ends, click Maintenance tool button on the WebLCT
tool bar to exit from the Maintenance Mode.
10. Confirm that the MAINT color turns from orange to white.
This step ends procedure.

4-8 CONTROL ITEMS
4.3.2 Link OAM Loopback
To operate the Link OAM Loopback, the Link OAM Mode must be enabled and be
active. Check or enable the Link OAM function referring to the Set Network and
System Provisioning manual, 8.6.4 LINK OAM Setting.
Figure 4-8 Link OAM Loopback Configuration
iPASOLINK EX/A iPASOLINK EX/A
ETHERNET PORT ETHERNET PORT
LOOPBACK
Procedure 4-3
changes to orange.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand the Maintenance Control, then its
submenu Loopback Control to select Link OAM Loopback Control.
The Link OAM Loopback Control window appears.

CONTROL ITEMS 4-9
3. Click a linked Off in the Loopback Status field.
Figure 4-9 Link OAM Loopback Control Window
click
4. Link OAM Loopback Control option window appears. Click On radio button,
then click the OK button.
Figure 4-10 Link OAM Loopback Control Option Box
5. When Information dialog box appears, click the OK button to proceed.

4-10 CONTROL ITEMS
6. The Link OAM Loopback Control window updates the information. Check that
the status of the selected port indicates On (Active).
 To End Link OAM Loopback Test
7. Click the linked On (Active). The Link OAM Loopback Control option window
appears.
8. Select Off, then click the OK button.
Figure 4-13 Link OAM Loopback Control Option Window

CONTROL ITEMS 4-11
10. The Link OAM Loopback Control window updates the information. Confirm
that the selected port indicates Off now.
11. When completed, click the Maintenance tool button on the WebLCT tool bar
to exit from the Maintenance Mode.
12. Confirm that the MAINT indicator on the tool bar changes from orange to
white.

4-12 CONTROL ITEMS
4.4 Switching Control
Important:
While operating the Switching Control Operation, the system must be set into the
Maintenance mode.
4.4.1 Manual Switch Operation
iPASOLINK EX/A supports the following types of Manual Switches:
 RSTP/MSTP Control
 ERP Control
 LAG Revert Control
 Timing Source Switch Control

CONTROL ITEMS 4-13
4.4.2 RSTP/MSTP Control
This option clears the current STP information, and newly gets the protocol.
Procedure 4-4
2. Click the Maintenance button on the top of the WebLCT window to switch the
state to the maintenance mode. See 4.2.1 Change to Maintenance Mode (for
WebLCT Operation) for operating steps.
3. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Maintenance Control, then its
submenu Protection Control to select RSTP/MSTP Control. The RSTP/MSTP
Control window appears.
4. Click the RSTP Clear or MSTP Clear tool button:
Figure 4-16 RSTP/MSTP Control Window (example: RSTP)
RSTP Clear tool button

4-14 CONTROL ITEMS
proceed.
7. The RSTP Control window updates the information. Verify the displayed
information:
Figure 4-19 RSTP/MSTP Control Window
8. Exit the Maintenance Mode by clicking the Maintenance button on the

window.
9. Check that the MAINT indication turns from orange to white.

CONTROL ITEMS 4-15
4.4.3 ERP Control
4.4.3.1 Execute ERP Switching Operation
Proceed with the following to carry out the ERP Manual/Forced Switching
Operation.
Procedure 4-5
submenu Protection Control to select ERP Control. The ERP Control
window appears.
4. Click the target Ring ID.
Figure 4-20 ERP Control Window
Ring ID
ERP Control (Ring IDn) option window appears.

4-16 CONTROL ITEMS
5. Specify the following:
Figure 4-21 ERP Control Option Window
Manual Control drop-down list and

Block Port radio buttons
 Select the operation type from the Manual Control drop-down list.
 Assign a blocking port.
Table 4-2 ERP Control Parameters
Manual Control Forced SW Executes switching operation forcibly.
Manual SW Executes switching operation according to the condition’s priority.
Clear Clears the status placed by the executed command.
Block Port Ring Port 0 Assigns a blocking port in the Ring.
Ring Port 1
6. When completed, click the OK button of the option window.


CONTROL ITEMS 4-17
proceed.
9. The ERP Control window updates the information. Verify the displayed
information.
(leftmost field)
(rightmost filed)
window.

4-18 CONTROL ITEMS
4.4.3.2 Execute Loop Detection
This option is used to verify the registered ERP.
Procedure 4-6
submenu Protection Control to select ERP Control. The ERP Control
window appears.
4. Click the Loop Detection Restart tool button.
Loop Detection Restart tool button
ERP Control (Loop Detection Restart) option window appears.

CONTROL ITEMS 4-19
5. Tick a check box of the target Ring, then click the OK button. Clicking the
check box on top selects all.
Figure 4-26 ERP Control (Loop Detection Restart) Option Window
check boxes
6. The system starts checking the loop on the selected Ring. When completed,
The ERP Control window updates the window.

4-20 CONTROL ITEMS
8. Check the result in the Loop Detection Status.
Loop Detection Status
 This field normally indicates None.

 If a loop is found, the field indicated Detected. Check the settings.

window.

CONTROL ITEMS 4-21
4.4.4 LAG Revert Control
This option is used to put the original Active ETH Port back in service manually
when recovered from the failure.
Procedure 4-7
submenu Protection Control to select LAG Revert Control. The LAG Revert
Control window appears.
4. Click the target group from the LAG column
Figure 4-29 LAG Revert Control
click to select a target
LAG Revert Control option window appears.

4-22 CONTROL ITEMS
5. Click the OK button of the option window.
Figure 4-30 LAG Revert Control Option Window
OK button
The reverting command is executed.
7. When completed, Information dialog box appears. Click the OK button to end
the procedure.

CONTROL ITEMS 4-23
4.4.5 Timing Source Switch Control
4.4.5.1 Unlock the Mode

Operate this Procedure 4-8 if the equipment is in the Lockout mode. Otherwise, skip
this procedure, and go to Procedure 4-9 provided in 4.4.5.2 Switch Timing
Sources.
Procedure 4-8
submenu Protection Control to select Timing Source Switch Control. The
Timing Source Switch Control window appears.
4. If the target facility is locked (Lock Out indicates On), click the link. If it is not
locked (Lock Out indicates Off), go to 4.4.5.2 Switch Timing Sources
Figure 4-33 Timing Source Switch Control Window
click
Timing Source Switch Control option window appears.

4-24 CONTROL ITEMS
5. Click the Off radio button, then click the OK button.
Figure 4-34 Timing Source Switch Control Option Window
6. Warning dialog box appears. Click the OK button of the dialog box.
proceed.
8. The Timing Source Switch Control window updates the information. Verify that
the Lock Out status of the target object indicates Off now.

CONTROL ITEMS 4-25
9. Operate one of the following:
 To end the procedure:
i) Exit the Maintenance Mode by clicking the Maintenance button on the

window.
ii) Check that the MAINT indication turns from orange to white. This step ends the
procedure.
 To set Timing Source Switch, go to Procedure 4-9 in 4.4.5.2 Switch Timing

Sources, Step 3.

4-26 CONTROL ITEMS
4.4.5.2 Switch Timing Sources
Procedure 4-9
submenu Protection Control to select Timing Source Switch Control. The
Timing Source Switch Control window appears.
4. Click a link in the Timing Source SW Control fields:
NOTE: The target object must NOT be in the Lockout mode.
click
5. Timing Source Switch Control option window appears. Select a switching

mode (Manual SW or Forced SW), then click the OK button.
Figure 4-39 Timing Source Switch Control Option Window

CONTROL ITEMS 4-27
proceed.
8. The Timing Source Switch Control window updates the information. Verify that
the selected switch control is indicated for the target object.

window.

4-28 CONTROL ITEMS
4.5 MODEM Maintenance Control (Radio Control)
There are several maintenance control items that can be set during Maintenance
Mode.
The function of each control is as follows; These windows are not enabled if the
system is not in the Maintenance mode.
 ATPC Manual Control

If TX Power Control Mode is selected to ATPC Mode, execute temporally fixing
control to Transmit Power. Select the value range described in ( ) of ATPC Range that
located in the Provisioning Menu (MODEM Function setting -> TX Power Setting)
for Transmit Power. ATPC Manual Control can be selected from either Auto or
Manual. If Transmit Power requires to temporally fixing control, select Manual then
select fixed value (it will be fixed until Auto is selected).
NOTE: ATPC Manual Control is not effective if MTPC Mode is selected.
 TX Mute Control
Despite the equipment configuration setting, forcing the TX Mute Control to ON will
stop the transmit power of the RF.
If Mute Control is set to OFF, it will cancel the Mute control.
NOTES:
1. If Mute Control is set to off and Mute OFF does not work due to uncontrollable
factors, Mute status will remain on.
2. In case of 1+1 HS configuration, the Mute OFF control does not mute both lines.
Moreover, when forced Mute is controlled in No.1/No.2, Maintenance Mode cannot set
to OFF.
3. When TX Mute is remotely controlled, the setting of the automatic restoration time is
possible. Therefore, TX Mute Release Time should be set.
4. TX Mute Release Time is set together with TX Mute Control by the item that becomes
effective only when TX Mute Control is done from a higher-level device.

CONTROL ITEMS 4-29
 CW Control
CW (no transmission modulation) is controlled.
It is used when the frequency is measured with a frequency counter and when
spurious one is checked.
If you perform the CW control over a pre-made Mute ON, execute CW ON/OFF after
Mute OFF. At this time, when there is a factor that the CW control is not turned ON it
becomes CW control error.
In addition, in case of remote connection and operated Control CW, it may not be
able to recover again. CW Control will restore automatically according to the TX
Mute Release Time parameter.
 TX Modulation Manual Control

The flat rate of the transmission modulation method of the control station in the AMR
mode is temporarily managed.
The modulation method can be set according to the target device regardless of the
AMR Range setting.
This control is done by exchanging request/answer of the control between local/

remote stations as well as LB2.
When the TX Modulation Manual Control setting is returned from Manual to Auto,
the fixed modulation method is returned to QPSK.

4-30 CONTROL ITEMS
4.5.1 ATPC Manual Control
Performing this function (Manual Control) sets the Maintenance Mode to ON.
However, in case of Auto setting and if Maintenance Mode is set to OFF, it will
cancel the "auto setting."
Procedure 4-10
changes to orange.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand the Maintenance Control to select
MODEM Maintenance Control. The MODEM Maintenance Control window
appears.
3. Click Off link in the ATPC Manual Control option.
Figure 4-43 MODEM Maintenance Control Window
click
The MODEM Maintenance Control option window appears.

CONTROL ITEMS 4-31
Figure 4-44 MODEM Maintenance Control Option Window
Table 4-3 ATPC Manual Control
ATPC Manual Control On Enable/Disable ATPC Manual Control.
Off
ATPC Manual Power –1.0 to 10.0 Set the transmit power value. [unit: dBm]
5. Warning dialog box appears.Click the OK button.
The MODEM Maintenance Control window updates the information.

4-32 CONTROL ITEMS
7. Confirm the displayed parameters.
8. When confirmed, click the Maintenance tool button on the WebLCT tool bar to
exit from the Maintenance Mode.
white.

CONTROL ITEMS 4-33
4.5.2 TX Mute Control
4.5.2.1 TX Mute Control on Local Site
Procedure 4-11
changes to orange.
appears.
3. Select Off in the TX Mute Control option.
click

4-34 CONTROL ITEMS
Figure 4-49 MODEM Maintenance Control Box
Table 4-4 TX MuteControl
TX Mute Control On Executes the forced mute.
Off Releases the forced mute. [default]
Release Time No Limit No limitation to auto recovery. This option is not editable.
5. Warning dialog box appears. Click OK button.



CONTROL ITEMS 4-35

white.

4-36 CONTROL ITEMS
4.5.2.2 TX Mute Control Operation on Remote Site
Procedure 4-12
changes to orange.
appears.
3. Select Off in the TX Mute Control option.
click

CONTROL ITEMS 4-37
Table 4-5 TX Mute Control
TX Mute Control On Executes the forced mute.
Off Releases the forced mute. [default]
Release Time 90 [s] Provides 90 seconds before executing the auto-recovery.
180 [s] Provides 180 seconds before executing the auto-recovery.
60 [min] Provides 60 minutes before executing the auto-recovery.
12 [h] Provides 12 hours before executing the auto-recovery.
5. Warning dialog box appears. Click the OK button.

4-38 CONTROL ITEMS
white.

CONTROL ITEMS 4-39
4.5.3 CW Control
Procedure 4-13
NOTE: This function is not operative by the remote session.
changes to orange.
appears.
3. Select Off in the CW Control option.
click

4-40 CONTROL ITEMS
Table 4-6 CW Control Parameters
CW Control On Executes the controlling CW.
Off Releases the controlling CW. [default]
Release Time No Limit Specifies no limitation to auto recovery. (Not recommended.) NOTE: These
values are not
90 [s] Provides 90 seconds before executing the auto-recovery. available for
the local
connection.
60 [min] Provides 60 minutes before executing the auto-recovery.
12 [h] Provides 12 hours before executing the auto-recovery.
6. Information dialog box appears. Click OK button.

CONTROL ITEMS 4-41
7. The MODEM Maintenance Control window updates the information. Verify the
displayed parameters.
white.

4-42 CONTROL ITEMS
4.5.4 Carrier Search
iPASOLINK EX/A searches.fixes the available band by executing the Carrier

Search function.
Procedure 4-14
changes to orange.
appears.
3. Select Off in the Carrier Search option.
click
The Carrier Search option window appears.

CONTROL ITEMS 4-43
4. Set the appropriate values according to your system, then click the Search
button.
Figure 4-64 Carrier Search Option Window
Table 4-7 Carrier Search Parameters to Set
Channel Spacing 62.5 MHz Select the Channel Spacing.
125 MHz
250 MHz
500 MHz
750 MHz
1000 MHz
2000 MHz
TX mute (Opposite Site) Off Disables the Mute Setting at the opposing site.
On (Release Time: 90 [s]) Enables the Mute Setting at the opposing site.

4-44 CONTROL ITEMS

6. The Carrier Search option window shows the search results.

Figure 4-66 Carrier Search Option Window
7. To finish viewing, click the Cancel button.
8. Click the Maintenance tool button on the WebLCT tool bar to exit from the
Maintenance Mode.
white.

CONTROL ITEMS 4-45
4.6 Laser Shutdown Control

This subsection describes the procedures to set up the Laser Management functions.
Following Laser management items can be enabled using WebLCT:
 Laser Shutdown Control

Forcibly shuts down the optical outputs.
 ALS Restart (for Remote Operation only)

For optical interfaces, the ALS (Automatic Laser Shutdown) control performs the
resumption of optical power for a definite period of time.
In addition, this function operates under ALS control execution (optical power
shutdown). If ALS is not activated, this operation is not carried out.

4-46 CONTROL ITEMS
4.6.1 Laser Shutdown Control
Procedure 4-15
changes to orange.
Laser Shutdown Control. The Laser Shutdown Control window appears.
3. Select Off in the Forced Laser Shutdown Control option.

Figure 4-67 Laser Shutdown Control Window
click
4. Laser Shutdown Control option window appears. Set On or Off by clicking its
radio button, then click the OK button.
Figure 4-68 Laser Shutdown Control Option Window
Table 4-8 Forced Laser Shutdown Control
Forced Laser ON Forcibly shuts down the optical outputs.

Shutdown Control
Off Normal operation

CONTROL ITEMS 4-47
5. Warning dialog box appears.Click the OK button.


7. The Laser Shutdown Control window updates the information. Verify the
white.

4-48 CONTROL ITEMS
4.6.2 ALS Manual Switch Control
Procedure 4-16
changes to orange.
Laser Shutdown Control. The Laser Shutdown Control window appears.
3. Select Control in the ALS Restart option.
click
4. Laser Shutdown Control option window appears. Select a proper value for the
ALS Restart parameter, then click the OK button.
Figure 4-73 Laser Shutdown Control Option Window

CONTROL ITEMS 4-49
Table 4-9 ALS Restart
ALS Restart 2s Forcibly issues the optical output for 2 seconds where the
ALS (Automatic Laser Shutdown) is executed.
90s Forcibly issues the optical output for 90 seconds where the
ALS (Automatic Laser Shutdown) is executed.
7. The Laser Shutdown Control window updates the information. Verify the
Figure 4-76 Laser Shutdown Control
white. This step ends the procedure.

4-50 CONTROL ITEMS
4.7 Equipment Reset

Following describes the hardware (H/W) and firmware (F/W) Reset Control of
iPASOLINK EX/A.
Reset control is available only when the system is set in the Maintenance mode. If it
is not in the Maintenance mode, executing the reset control will result in the error
response. Following are the objects that are available to be reset, and some
precautions:
Module Description
H/W Reset Control Equipment Reset Resets the equipment hardware. Main
Ethernet signal will be interrupted during
the resetting process.
F/W Reset Control CPU Reset (RF) Resets CPU (Radio Frequency block FW).
Main signal will be interrupted during the
resetting process.
CPU Reset (BB) Resets CPU (Baseband block F/W). Main

Ethernet signals and NMS Communication
will be interrupted when the resetting
process.
4.7.1 Reset H/W

 Proceeding through the following procedure terminates the WebLCT and restarts
iPASOLINK EX/A.
Procedure 4-17
changes to orange.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand the Maintenance Control, then expand
H/W F/W Reset Control to select H/W Reset Control.
The H/W Reset Control window appears.

CONTROL ITEMS 4-51
3. Click the target object link under the Item column.
Figure 4-77 H/W Reset Control Window
click
H/W Reset Control option window for the selected object appears.
4. Verify the information, and click the OK button.
Figure 4-78 H/W Reset Control Option Window

4-52 CONTROL ITEMS


7. Another Information dialog box appears. Click the OK button to proceed.

8. When the system is ready, launch the WebLCT, then log in to the system.
9. Open the H/W Reset Control window, and verify the information.
Figure 4-82 H/W Reset Control Window
10. Release the Maintenance Mode if necessary.


CONTROL ITEMS 4-53
4.7.2 Reset F/W
4.7.2.1 Reset CPU (BB)
Procedure 4-18
changes to orange.
H/W_F/W Reset Control to select F/W Reset Control.
3. The F/W Reset Control window appears. Click BB link in the Item field.
Figure 4-83 F/W Reset Control Window
click
4. F/W Reset Control (BB) option window appears. Confirm the information
then click OK button.
Figure 4-84 F/W Reset Control (BB) Option Window

4-54 CONTROL ITEMS

Figure 4-85 Warning Box

Figure 4-86 Information Box
7. When the iPASOLINK EX/A restarts, launch the WebLCT and log in to the
iPASOLINK EX/A again.
8. Verify the information displayed in the F/W Reset Control window.

Figure 4-87 F/W Reset Control window
white.

CONTROL ITEMS 4-55
4.7.2.2 Reset CPU (RF)
Procedure 4-19
changes to orange.
H/W_F/W Reset Control to select F/W Reset Control. The F/W Reset Control
window appears.
3. Click the target RF link in the Item field.

click
4. F/W Reset Control option window appears. Confirm the information then
click the OK button.
Figure 4-89 F/W Reset Control (RF) Option Window

4-56 CONTROL ITEMS
5. Warning message dialog box appears. Click the OK button.


The CPU Reset (RF) starts automatically.
7. When the RF is prepared, verify the information displayed in the F/W Reset
Control window.
white.

CONTROL ITEMS 4-57
4.8 Maintenance Test

Perform this procedure to measure the link quality of Ethernet traffic. Prior to
proceeding with the Maintenance Test, following should be considered:
NOTES: When performing this Maintenance Test for ETH OAM DM/LM, proceed
with the followings (1 and 2) prior to starting the test:
1. Verify the connectivity in both directions between the equipment to carry out
the test and the target equipment to measure Delay/Loss using the ETH-CC
frames.
2. Execute the Loss Measurement and Delay Measurement with the
Transmission Count value 1 at the equipment to measure Delay/Loss
against the equipment to carry out the test.
Procedure 4-20
changes to orange.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand the Maintenance Test to select ETH
OAM LB/LT/DM/LM Control. The ETH OAM LB/LT/DM/LM Control window
appears.
3. Click the Modify Test Type tool button, or select the desired Test No.
Figure 4-93 ETH OAM LB/LT/DM/LM Control Window
Test No. Modify Test Type button
ETH OAM LB/LT/DM/LM Control option window appears.

4-58 CONTROL ITEMS
4. Assign a proper value for each parameter, then click the OK button:
 Clicking the Modify Detail Test Parameter tool button opens its detailed
option window. Provided detailed parameters are:
 Transmission Count
 Transmission Period
 PDU Size
 Priority.
Figure 4-94 ETH OAM LB/LT/DM/LM Control Option Window
click

CONTROL ITEMS 4-59
Table 4-10 Maintenance Test Options
ETH OAM LB/LT/DM/LM Control
Type LB Executes LB (Loopback) mode as Ethernet traffic test

type.
LT Executes LT (Line Trace) mode as Ethernet traffic test

type.
DM Executes DM (Delay Measurement) mode as Ethernet

traffic test type.
LM Executes LM (Loss Measurement) mode as Ethernet

traffic test type.
MEP Index 1 to 128 When started from Modify tool button, enter the MEP
Index number. When started from selecting the item
number, this filed indicates the selected number.
Destination MAC Address or xx.xx.xx.xx.xx.xx Enter the MAC Address.

Target MAC Address
Multicast Tick a box to select the Multicast address. LT Mode
does not have this choice.
Modify Detail Test Parameter (for LB, DM or LM Mode)
MEP Index (read only) Indicates the selected item’s information.
Destination MAC Address (read only)
Transmission Count 1 to 127 Specifies the transmission count for the test.
Transmission Period 1 to 10 Specifies the transmission period for the test. Must be
the positive integer. [unit: second]
PDU Size 64 to 9600 Specifies the PDU size for the test. This option is for
LB mode only.
Priority 0 to 7 Specifies the priority.
Modify Detail Test Parameter (for LT Mode)
MEP Index (read only) Indicates the selected item’s information.
Target MAC Address (read only)
Transmission Count 1 to 127 Specifies the transmission count for the test.
TTL 1 to 255 Enter the Time to Live value.
Priority 0 to 7 Specifies the priority.
During the process, a progress bar appears.
The Result window appears.

4-60 CONTROL ITEMS
5. The Result window appears. Confirm the displayed parameters:
Figure 4-95 LB Result Window (Example: LB Result)
6. To save the History Information or Test Result in the local PC, operate the
following:

CONTROL ITEMS 4-61
 History Information
To save the History Information, click the Export CSV File tool button on the tool bar
of the ETH OAM LB/LT/DM/LM Control window.
Figure 4-96 ETH OAM LB/LT/DM/LM Control Window
Export CSV File button
 Test Result
To save the test result, click the Export CSV File tool button on each result window.
Figure 4-97 Test Result Window (example: LB Result Window)
Export CSV File button

4-62 CONTROL ITEMS
7. File Download option window appears. Click the Save button.

Figure 4-98 File Download Option Window
8. Save As option window appears. Select the proper folder of local PC and
then click the Save button.
 Default file name:
History Information: HistoryInformationExport _YYYYMMDDhhmmss.csv
 Test Result:
TestResultExport-LB(or LT)_YYYYMMDDhhmmss.csv
Figure 4-99 Save As Option Window

CONTROL ITEMS 4-63
9. When completed, Download Complete window appears. Click the Close

button.
Figure 4-100 Download Complete Window
10. Confirm that the CSV file is saved in the selected folder.

4-64 CONTROL ITEMS
4.9 Equipment Utility

Following lists the functions to Upload/Download Data:
 Export (NE ➞ Storage) Utility

This function downloads the Equipment Config Data, Network Config Data, User
Config Data, and Inventory Data from an NE to a local storage, such as local PC or
USB memory device, etc.
 Update (Storage ➞ NE) Utility

This function uploads the Program File, FPGA Data, and Config Data from the local
storage (local PC or USB memory device) to the NE. The downloaded data will be
listed under Uncurrent column of Program ROM Switching option window.
 Program ROM Switching

This function switches (swaps) the F/W currently running and that of downloaded
version (listed under Uncurrent).
 USB Memory Utility

This function verifies the USB memory device.
 Log Clear Function

This function deletes the Event Logs and PMON, RMON History data stored in the
equipment.
 Shipment
This function deletes the user defined Provisioning data, which restores the factory
default. This function also can delete all the stored data except the Software keys by
choice.

CONTROL ITEMS 4-65
4.9.1 Backup Database [Export (NE --> Storage) Utility]
Procedure 4-21
1. In the MENU frame on the left, expand the Equipment Utility to select Export
(NE->Storage) Utility. The Export (NE->Storage) Utility window appears.
2. Select the Config Data and a storage tool (Local PC or USB Memory) by
clicking their radio buttons, then click the Execute tool button.
Figure 4-101 Export (NE->Storage) Utility Window

Execute tool button
select data to export

select storage tool
3. Following inquiry message appears. Click the Save button.
Figure 4-102 Inquiry Message
Save As window appears.

4-66 CONTROL ITEMS
4. Select/Specify a directory to save the data, and click the Save button.
Figure 4-103 Save As Window
Table 4-11 Configuration Data to Upload
Data Default File Name
Equipment Configuration Data ********-ex10-equip.cfg
Network Configuration Data ********-ex10-network.cfg
User Configuration Data ********-ex10-user.cfg
PMON History File ex10-pmon-history-********.zip
RMON History File e10-rmon-history-********.zip
Technical Support File ex10-TechFile_HW_*******_**********

ex10-TechFile_SW_*******_**********
5. When data saving process is completed, following message to inform that the
download has completed. Click the View folder button.
Figure 4-104 Message to Inform the State
The folder to which the downloaded file is stored opens.

CONTROL ITEMS 4-67
6. Verify that the data has been successfully saved.
Figure 4-105 Folder to Store Downloaded File (Example)
This step the ends the procedure.

4-68 CONTROL ITEMS
4.9.2 Update Database [Update (Storage --> NE) Utility]
This function uploads the iPASOLINK EX/A software, firmware (Program File
(*.bin)/FPGA), and equipment configuration files (*.cfg) from the local storage
(local PC or USB memory device NOTE) to NE.
NOTE: Connect USB memory device to the USB port at the iPASOLINK EX/A front
when the data is stored on the USB.
Following lists the operations that are available using Update (Storage -> NE)
Utility:
 Program File Download

This function downloads the F/W from the local PC or USB memory device to the
targets. (BB, RF)
 FPGA Data File Download

This function downloads FPGA from the local PC or USB memory device to the
target objects.
 Configuration Data File Download

This function downloads the configuration file (Equipment, Network, User) from the
local PC or USB memory device to iPASOLINK EX/A.
 Controller Data Download

This function updates the Controller IC by downloading the data from the local PC or
USB memory device to the target object.
 MODEM Parameter File Download

This function updates the MODEM parameter file on the MODEM module using the
data stored in the local PC or in USB memory device.
 SSL Server Certificate File Download

This function downloads the SSL Server authentication file.

CONTROL ITEMS 4-69
4.9.2.1 Update Program File — BB Firmware

Important:
1. Ensure that the prepared Program File is supplied by NEC.
2. Check the current version of the Program using the Equipment Inventory
Information.
3. Put the system into the Maintenance Mode before beginning to download
the Program. Do not cancel the Maintenance Mode while the download is in
progress.
 Proceeding through the following terminates the WebLCT and restarts
iPASOLINK EX/A.
Procedure 4-22 BB Firmware
changes to orange.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand the Equipment Utility to select Update
(Storage -> NE) Utility. The Update (Storage -> NE) Utility window appears.
3. Select the Program File radio button and then click the Execute tool button.
Figure 4-106 Update (Storage -> NE) Utility Window
Execute tool button
Program File

4-70 CONTROL ITEMS
4. Program File option window to select an object appears. Select the BB from
drop-down list and then click Next button.
Figure 4-107 Program File Option Window
5. Program File window for selecting the destination appears. In the Import File
option box, select the media (Local PC or USB Memory) from which the file is
transferred, and then click the file icon button ( ) of the selected storage.
Figure 4-108 Program File Option Window for BB
select storage click a file icon
An option window for Choosing File appears.

CONTROL ITEMS 4-71
6. Select the firmware for BB (see below for the file name), and then click the
Open (or OK) button.
 Option Window for Local PC
 Option Window for USB Memory Device
Figure 4-110 Update Utility Option Window

4-72 CONTROL ITEMS
7. The Program File option window displays the selected directory. Click the OK
button.
Figure 4-111 Source Selection Option Window
8. Warning message dialog box appears Click the OK button.
During the process, download progress bar appears.
9. When the download process is completed, the Update Complete! message

dialog box appears. Check (leave a tick in) the Program ROM Switching
check box, and then click the OK button.
Figure 4-113 Update Complete! Dialog Box
Warning message dialog box appears.

CONTROL ITEMS 4-73
10. Click the OK button to proceed. iPASOLINK EX/A will be restarted

automatically.
Figure 4-114 Warning Message Dialog Box
11. Information dialog box appears. Click the OK button. The WebLCT will shut
down to restart automatically.
12. When the iPASOLINK EX/A is restarted and prepared, log in to iPASOLINK
EX/A again.
13. Select Inventory  Equipment Inventory Information from the WebLCT

menu.
14. The Equipment Inventory Information window appears. Verify the Current
version (the version of newly running program) of BB.
Figure 4-116 Equipment Inventory Information Window

4-74 CONTROL ITEMS
4.9.2.2 Update Program File — RF Firmware

Important:
1. Ensure that the prepared Program File was supplied by NEC.
2. Check the current version of Program using the Equipment Inventory
Information window.
3. Put the system into the Maintenance Mode before beginning to download
the RF Program. Do not cancel the Maintenance mode while the download
is in progress.
Procedure 4-23 RF
changes to orange.
3. Select Program File by clicking its radio button, then click the Execute tool
button.
Execute tool button
Program File
Program File option window to select an object appears.

CONTROL ITEMS 4-75
4. Select the object type (RF) from drop-down list, and then click the Next
button.
5. The Program File option window for selecting a source. In the Import File
transferred, and then click the file icon button ( ).
Import File option box file icon
An option window to choose a file appears.

4-76 CONTROL ITEMS
6. Select the RF firmware file (see below for the file name), and click the Open
(or OK) button.
Figure 4-121 Update (Storage -> NE) Utility Option Window

CONTROL ITEMS 4-77
button.
File downloading starts. During the downloading process, the progress bar
shows up.
9. When completed, the Update Complete! message dialog box appears.

10. Select Inventory  Equipment Inventory Information from the WebLCT

menu.

4-78 CONTROL ITEMS
11. The Equipment Inventory Information window appears. Verify the current
version (version of newly running program).
white.

CONTROL ITEMS 4-79
4.9.2.3 Update FPGA Data
NOTE: Proceeding through the following restarts the equipment, which terminates
the WebLCT connection.
Important:
1. Ensure that the data file of FPGA from NEC has already been on the site.
2. Check the F/W versions using the Equipment Inventory Information window.
3. To operate the FPGA data download, the system must be set into the
Maintenance mode; Do not cancel the Maintenance mode while the download
process is in progress.
Procedure 4-24
changes to orange.
3. Select FPGA Data by clicking its radio button, and then click the Execute tool
button.
Execute tool button

FPGA Data

4-80 CONTROL ITEMS
4. The FPGA Data option window for selecting a source appears. In the Import File
transferred, and then click the file icon button ( ).
Figure 4-127 FPGA Data Option Window

Import File option box
file icon
5. An option window for selecting a file appears. Select the FPGA Data file (see
below for the file name), and click the Open (or OK) button.


CONTROL ITEMS 4-81

button.
shows up.

4-82 CONTROL ITEMS
8. When completed, the Update Complete! message dialog box appears. Click
the OK button to execute the auto-revert process.

i) Launch the WebLCT, and log in to the iPASOLINK EX/A again.
ii) Select the Inventory  Equipment Inventory Information from the WebLCT
menu.
10. In the Equipment Inventory Information window, verify the information of

newly running program.

CONTROL ITEMS 4-83
 When the target object is MC-MV, the Maintenance mode has been already
released. This step ends the procedure.
white.
4.9.2.4 Update Configuration Data

iPASOLINK EX/A.
NOTES:
1. Do not store the data to be downloaded and the existing Configuration Data
File in the same folder. Keep the data separate so that the data can be
compared.
2. To download the Configuration Data, the system must be set into the
Maintenance mode; Do not cancel the Maintenance mode while the
process is in progress.
Procedure 4-25
changes to orange.
(Storage -> NE) Utility.
The Update (Storage -> NE) Utility window appears.

4-84 CONTROL ITEMS
3. Select the Config Data by clicking its radio button, then click the Execute tool
button.
Execute tool button Config Data
4. The Config Data window for selecting source appears. Select the data type
(Network Config, Equipment Config, User Config) from the Select Config
Data Type drop-down list.
Figure 4-136 Config Data Option Window
5. In the Import File option box, select the media (Local PC or USB Memory)
from which the file is transferred, and then click the file icon button ( ). An
option window for selecting a file appears.

CONTROL ITEMS 4-85
6. Select the Config Data file.
7. Click the Open (or OK) button.The Config Data option window displays the
selected directory.

4-86 CONTROL ITEMS

Figure 4-139 Config Data Option Window
9. Warning message dialog box appears. Click the OK button to proceed.

shows up.
10. Information dialog box appears. Click OK button. The WebLCT will shut down
automatically.
11. When the iPASOLINK EX/A restarts, log in to the iPASOLINK EX/A again.
12. Upload the Configuration Data File again, then acquire the Configuration
Data.
13. Check the Configuration Data by comparing the latest Configuration Data
with the previous data.
white.

CONTROL ITEMS 4-87
4.9.2.5 Update Controller Data
NOTE: Proceeding through the following restarts the equipment, which terminates
the WebLCT connection.
Important:
1. Ensure that the data file of Controller Data has already been on the site.
2. Check the F/W versions using the Equipment Inventory Information window.
3. To operate the Controller data, the system must be set into the Maintenance
mode; Do not cancel the Maintenance mode while the download process is in
progress.
Procedure 4-26
changes to orange.
3. The Update (Storage -> NE) Utility window appears. Select Controller Data
by clicking its radio button, and then click the Execute tool button.
Execute tool button Controller Data

4-88 CONTROL ITEMS
4. The Controller Data option window for selecting a source appears. In the
Import File option box, select the media (Local PC or USB Memory) from
which the file is transferred, and then click the file icon button ( ).
Figure 4-143 Controller Data Option Window
5. An option window for selecting a file appears. Select the Controller Data file
(see below for the file name), and click the Open (or OK) button.
 File Name: BBCKT-EV-CONT_NWA-A01929-001_v**.cont

CONTROL ITEMS 4-89
button.
Warning message dialog box appears.
shows up.
Figure 4-147 Progress Bar
When completed, the Update Complete! message dialog box appears.

4-90 CONTROL ITEMS
8. Click the OK button to execute the auto-revert process.


i) Launch the WebLCT, and log in to the iPASOLINK EX/A again.
ii) Select the Inventory  Equipment Inventory Information from the WebLCT
menu.
10. In the Equipment Inventory Information window, verify the information of

newly running program.

CONTROL ITEMS 4-91
 When the target object is MC-MV, the Maintenance mode has been already
released. This step ends the procedure.
white.
4.9.2.6 Update MODEM Parameter Data
Important:
1. Ensure that the Parameter File to update MODEM that was from NEC has
already been on the site.
2. Check that the prepared Parameter File is for MODEM.
3. To operate the MODEM Parameter download, the system must be set into
the Maintenance mode; Do not cancel the Maintenance mode while the
download process is in progress.
Procedure 4-27
changes to orange.
The Update (Storage -> NE) Utility window appears.

4-92 CONTROL ITEMS
3. Select MODEM Parameter by clicking its radio button, and then click the
Execute tool button.
Execute tool button MODEM Parameter
4. The MODEM Parameter option window for selecting source appears. In the
Import File option box, select the media (Local PC or USB Memory) from
which the file is transferred, and then click the file icon button ( ).
Figure 4-152 MODEM Parameter Option Window
5. An option window for selecting a file appears. Select the MODEM Parameter
file (see below for the file name), and then click the Open (or OK) button.
 MODEM Parameter file name: MDxxxxxx.mdp

CONTROL ITEMS 4-93
Figure 4-154 Update (Storage -> NE) Utility
The MODEM Parameter option window displays the specified information.

4-94 CONTROL ITEMS
Figure 4-155 MODEM Parameter Option Window
shows up.
8. When completed, Information dialog box appears. Click the OK button to

proceed.
9. Launch and log in to the WebLCT.
10. From the WebLCT menu, select the Inventory  Equipment Inventory
Information from the WebLCT menu. The Equipment Inventory Information
window appears.
11. Check the latest MODEM Parameter Data running by comparing the
confirmed parameter of specified MODEM.

CONTROL ITEMS 4-95
(scroll)
white. This step ends the procedure.

4-96 CONTROL ITEMS
4.9.2.7 Update SSL Server Certificate
Procedure 4-28
changes to orange.
3. Select SSL Server Certificate by clicking its radio button, and then click the
Execute tool button.
Execute tool button SSL Server Certificate
4. SSL Server Certificate option window appears. In the Import File option box,
select the media (Local PC or USB Memory) from which the file is transferred,
then click the folder tool button ( ) to locate the certificate file.
Figure 4-160 SSL Server Certificate Option Window
Choose File to Upload option window appears.

CONTROL ITEMS 4-97
5. Select the file, and click the Open button. The valid file is compressed by the
zip application.
Figure 4-162 Update (Storage -> NE) Utility

4-98 CONTROL ITEMS
6. SSL Server Certificate option window indicates the selected file. Click the OK
button to proceed.
Figure 4-163 SSL Server Certificate Option Window
OK button
Figure 4-164 Warning dialog Box
During the process, a progress bar shows up.
8. When the process is completed, following Information dialog box appears.

Click the OK button to proceed
The system starts updating SSL Server Certificate file.

 WebLCT is automatically logged off from the equipment.
 It may take a few minutes to 10 minutes (depending on your PC’s capacity)
for updating process, during which the equipment does not allow another
logging in.

CONTROL ITEMS 4-99
4.9.3 Switch (Swap) Program ROM
4.9.3.1 Switch (Swap) BB ROM

iPASOLINK EX/A.
Important:
To operate the Program ROM Switching, the system must be set into the
Maintenance mode; Do not cancel the Maintenance mode while controlling
the switching operation.
Procedure 4-29
changes to orange.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand the Equipment Utility to select
Program ROM Switching. The Program ROM Switching window appears.
3. Click the BB link in the Item field.

Figure 4-166 Program ROM Switching Window
click BB
The Program ROM Switching (BB) option window appears.

4-100 CONTROL ITEMS
4. Confirm the information, then click the OK button.

Figure 4-167 Program ROM Switching (BB) Window
5. Warning message dialog box appears. Click the OK button to execute the
auto-revert process.
6. Information dialog box appears. Click the OK button. The WebLCT will shut
down automatically.
8. Select the Equipment Utility  Program ROM Switching from the WebLCT
menu. The Program ROM Switching window appears.
9. Verify the current version of the BB Firmware:
white.

CONTROL ITEMS 4-101
4.9.3.2 Switch RF ROM

Important:
To operate the Program ROM Switching, the system must be set into the
Maintenance mode; Do not cancel the Maintenance mode while controlling
the switching operation.
Procedure 4-30
changes to orange.
Program ROM Switching.
The Program ROM Switching window appears.
3. Click the target RF link in the Item field.

click RF
The Program ROM Switching (RF) option window appears.

4-102 CONTROL ITEMS
4. Confirm the information then click OK button.

Figure 4-172 Program ROM Switching (rF) Box
5. Warning message dialog box appears. Click the OK button to execute the
auto-revert process.
Figure 4-173 Warning Box

7. The Program ROM Switching window updates the information. Verify the
current version of the RF Firmware.
white.

CONTROL ITEMS 4-103
4.9.4 Check USB Memory Utility
Procedure 4-31
1. In the MENU frame on the left, expand the Equipment Utility to select USB
Memory Utility. The USB Memory Utility window appears.
2. Click the Refresh tool button on the WebLCT tool bar.
Figure 4-176 USB Memory Utility Window

4-104 CONTROL ITEMS
4.9.5 Log Clear Function
Event Logs, PMON Logs, and RMON Logs that are no longer necessary can be
removed from the system storage.
Procedure 4-32
1. In the MENU frame on the left, expand the Equipment Utility to select Log
Clear Function. The Log Clear Function window appears.
2. Select the log type (Event Log or PMON/RMON Log) by clicking its radio
button.
Figure 4-177 USB Memory Utility Window

4. When completed, Information dialog box appears. Click the OK button to

proceed. This step ends the procedure.

CONTROL ITEMS 4-105
4.9.6 Restore Factory Default Settings

iPASOLINK EX/A.
Procedure 4-33
changes to orange.
Shipment. The Shipment window appears.
3. Click the Shipment tool button.

Figure 4-180 Shipment Window
Shipment tool button
(leftmost)
(rightmost)
The Shipment option window appears.

4-106 CONTROL ITEMS
4. Select the operation from the drop-down list, and click the OK button.
Figure 4-181 Shipment Option Window
Table 4-12 Shipment Parameter
Shipment Type Provisioning Clear Restore the provisioning data only.
All Clear w/o Software Key Restore all the data except Software Key.
iPASOLINK EX/A will restart automatically.
6. Another Information dialog box appears. Click the OK button. The WebLCT will
shut down automatically.

CONTROL ITEMS 4-107
4.10 Inventory
The Inventory retrieves and displays the information of hardware, firmware,
network, and software license keys for the equipment.
4.10.1 Equipment Inventory Information
Procedure 4-34
1. In the MENU frame on the left, expand the Inventory to select Equipment
Inventory Information. The Equipment Inventory Information window
appears.
See Figure 4-185 Equipment Inventory Information for the overall view.

4-108 CONTROL ITEMS
Figure 4-185 Equipment Inventory Information
Figure 4-186

CONTROL ITEMS 4-109
Table 4-13 Equipment Inventory Information
Parameter Description
Hardware Information Code No. (NEC Identification Number), Name, Serial No., Manufactured date
and Hardware Version.
Firmware Information Name, Current Version and Uncurrent Version.
FPGA Information Code No. (NEC Identification Number), Name and Version.
Controller Information Current Version
Parameter Information Current Version
SFP/SFP+ Information Port (registered port), Type (Ethernet category), Wavelength (nm) and Color.
See Figure 4-186 and Table 4-14 also.
MAC Address Information Port and MAC Address.
M-Plane/U-Plane
Frequency Information RF running status (Sub-Band usage) that includes: TX Start/Stop Frequency,
RX Start/Stop Frequency, Frequency Step, Shift Frequency, Higher or Lower
Band, and TX/RX Phase.
Figure 4-186 SFP/SFP+ Detailed Information
Table 4-14 SFP/SFP+ Detailed Information
Parameter Description
SFP/SFP+ Detail Information Port (registered port), Vendor Name, Part No., Vendor Serial No., Revision,
and Manufactured Date.

4-110 CONTROL ITEMS
2. To save the Inventory Information, click the Export Equipment Inventory

Information tool button, if required.
Figure 4-187 Location of Export Tool Button
Export Equipment Inventory Information tool button
3. The File Download option window appears. Click the Save button.
Figure 4-188 File Download Window

button.
5. Confirm that the Inventory Information file is saved in the selected folder.

CONTROL ITEMS 4-111
4.10.2 Software License Key Information
Following describes how to confirm and export the Software License Key of the
equipment.
Procedure 4-35
1. In the MENU frame on the left, expand the Inventory to select S/W License
Information. The S/W License Information window appears.
Figure 4-190 S/W License Information Window

4-112 CONTROL ITEMS
2. To save the Inventory Information, click the Export S/W License Information
tool button, if required.
Figure 4-191 Location of Export Button
Export S/W License Information tool button
3. File Download option window appears. Click the Save button.
Figure 4-192 File Download Option Window

button.
5. Confirm that the License Information file is saved in the selected folder.

CONTROL ITEMS 4-113
4.10.3 User Description
Some hardware cannot store their registration information. User Description is an

option to store those objects’ information manually. Following describes how to
create memos onto WebLCT.
Characters to enter here are restricted. Following is the list of the available characters:
b6-b4 0 1 10 11 100 101 110 111
b3-b0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
0 Space
0 — — 0 @ P ‘ p
(NOTE 2)
1 1 — — ! 1 A Q a q
10 2 — — " 2 B R b r
11 3 — — # 3 C S c s
100 4 — — $ 4 D T d t
101 5 — — % 5 E U e u
110 6 — — & 6 F V f v
111 7 — — ’ 7 G W g w
1000 8 — — ( 8 H X h x
1001 9 — — ) 9 I Y i y
1010 A — — * : J Z j z
1011 B — — + ; K [ k {
1100 C — — , < L \ l |
1101 D — — - = M ] m }
1110 E — — . > N ^ n ~
1111 F — — / ? O _ o —
NOTE: Spaces can be used between other available characters only, not at the
head or tail end.

4-114 CONTROL ITEMS
Procedure 4-36
1. In the MENU frame on the left, expand the Inventory to select User
Description. The User Description window appears.
2. Click a desired link, and enter the information.
Figure 4-194 User Description Window
click (see Figure 4-195)
Figure 4-195 User Description (Locality) Option Window

CONTROL ITEMS 4-115
Figure 4-196 User Description (Remark) Option Window
Figure 4-197 User Description (Title) Option Window
Figure 4-198 User Description (No. #) Option Window
3. When completed, click the OK button. Clicking the OK button of each option
window displays the Information dialog box.

4-116/END CONTROL ITEMS
5. The User Description window updates the information.
Figure 4-200 User Description Window

CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE 5-1
5. CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE
5.1 Equipment Conditions
5.1.1 Reporting Methods

Equipment condition can be obtained by the WebLCT. The condition is also visibly
reported using indication lamps on the equipment. iPASOLINK EX/A defines the
following alarm status:
5.1.2 Alarm Status

 CL [Cleared]:
CL indicates that one or more previously reported alarms has/have been cleared. This
state applies to all alarms detected for this managed object with the same alarm type,
probable cause and specific problems (if given). Multiple associated notifications
may be cleared by using the Correlated notifications parameter (defined below).
 ID [Indeterminate]:
ID indicates that the detected condition cannot be determined to classify the severity
level.
 CR [Critical]:2
CR indicates for the Critical Alarm that causes a service affecting failure, which
requires an immediate corrective action. If this level of condition is reported, the
managed object could totally go out of service, restoring its capability.
 MJ [Major]:
MJ indicates for the Major Alarm that causes a service affecting failure which
requires an urgent corrective action. If this level of condition is reported, the
capability of the managed object could be severely degraded, restoring its full
capability.
 MN [Minor]:
MN indicates for the Minor Alarm that detects the existence of a non-service affecting
condition, which requires the corrective action in order to prevent a more serious
(such as a service affecting) failure. This condition does not degrade the capacity of
the managed object.
 WR [Warning]:
WR indicates for the detection of a potential or impending service affecting fault,
before any significant effects have been felt. Action should be taken to further
diagnose (if necessary) and correct the problem in order to prevent a more serious
failure, such as a service affecting fault.

5-2 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE
5.2 View Current Status
5.2.1 Overview
Current Status window of the WebLCT displays the equipment status, event logs and
alarms detected by the equipment. The window displays the view-only information;
not editable.
5.2.2 Display Current Status Window
Procedure 5-1
 From starting up the WebLCT:
1. Launch and log in to WebLCT. The initial (main) window of the WebLCT
displays the Current Status information.
 From other task window:
1. Click the Current Status on top of the MENU frame in the left. The main
window in the right shows the Current Status information.
The Current Status window provides the information on the following objects
separated by tabs on which their items are indicated:
 Active Alarm
 Event Log
 Equipment
 ETH

5.2.2.1 Active Alarm Tab
The Active Alarm tabbed window displays the list of current alarms that have been
detected by the equipment.
 View Active Alarm
Procedure 5-1
1. Click the Refresh tool button to display the Active Alarms.
Figure 5-1 Current Status Window — Active Alarm Tab
Refresh tool button
The Active Alarm list is retrieved.

2. Click the link in the Items field.
Figure 5-2 Active Alarm Tab (Updated)
click
3. Alarm Information window appears.
Figure 5-3 Alarm Information Window

 Save Active Alarms
The displayed information can be saved onto the storage area of WebLCT PC. To
save the information, click the Save button located within the Active Alarm list. See
5.2.3 Save the Displayed Information for an example.
Figure 5-4 Current Status Window — Active Alarm Tab

Save button
NOTE: To save the alarm list, refer to the procedure provided in 5.2.3 Save the
Displayed Information.

5.2.2.2 Event Log Tab
The Event Log tabbed window displays the information of all the detected alarms
and status, including any changes made to the Lines and the equipment configuration.
The displayed information can be saved onto the storage area of WebLCT PC. To
save the information, click the Save button located within the Event Log list.
Figure 5-5 Current Status Window — Event Log Tab
Save button
NOTE: To save the log list, refer to the procedure provided in 5.2.3 Save the Displayed
Information.

5.2.2.3 Equipment Tab and List of Conditions
The Equipment tabbed window displays the information of status detected from
MODEM and by equipment.
Clicking the Equipment tab adds another row of related tabs.

Figure 5-6 Current Status Window — Equipment Tab

Table 5-1 List of Conditions for Equipment
Indication Category Description
Mute Status Status Indicates that the control status of the RF TX Power Output is set
to MUTE.
ATPC Power Mode Status Indicates that a failure of APTC control signal (for 90 seconds), or
a status of MAX Power (for 90 seconds) has been detected.
FDB Full Status FDB Full indication is specified per VLAN.
RX Modulation Status Indicates that the modulation system at the receiving side has
been changed.
Total FDB Full Status Dynamic Entry in L2Switch has reached the maximum number.
TX Modulation Status Indicates that the modulation system of MODEM at the

transmitting side has been changed.
CLK Status Changed Status Indicates that a change has been made to Reference Clock.
PTP Radio Clock Status Status Indicates the PTP Radio Clock Status.
Maintenance Status Indicates that the system is set int the Maintenance mode.
Equipment Start-up Status Status Indicates that the equipment is started up, or rebooted, and
reports the cause.
Trap Suppression Status Status indicates the state of Trap Suppression function.
ETH-Ring Status Status Indicates the state of the ETH-Ring.
ETH-Ring Cause Status Indicates the ETH-Ring State changes.
ETH-Ring Multi RPL Owner Status Indicates that the system detects the multiple settings of ETH-
Detect Ring RPL.
ETH-Ring Port0 Status Status Indicates that the state changes of the Port configuring ETH-
Ring.
ETH-Ring Port0 Loop Detect Status Indicates that the system detects loops in ETH-Ring traffic.
ETH-Ring Port0 R-APS Status Indicates that the time out for receiving R-APS message occurs
Timeout at the node that configures ETH-Ring and has no locked-out
ports.
ETH-Ring Port1 Status Status Indicates that the state changes of the Port configuring ETH-
Ring.
ETH-Ring Port1 Loop Detect Status Indicates that the system detects loops in ETH-Ring traffic.
ETH-Ring Port1 R-APS Status Indicates that the time out for receiving R-APS message occurs
Timeout at the node that configures ETH-Ring and has no locked-out
ports.
PTP Sync. Time Status Indicates the time of synchronizing with Master when using the
PTP function.
PTP Clock Quality Level Status Indicates the level of PTP Clock Quality.
Own Clock ID Status Indicates the PTP Clock of the equipment.

Table 5-1 List of Conditions for Equipment
Indication Category Description
Grandmaster / Port ID Status Indicates the Port ID of the opposing equipment that is connected
with the Grandmaster (Top-level Master) to which the target
equipment belongs.
Grandmaster / Clock ID Status Indicates the Clock ID of Grandmaster (Top-level Master) to

which the target equipment belongs.
Grandmaster / Clock Priority 1 Status Indicates the Clock Priority 1 of Grandmaster (Top-level Master)
to which the target equipment belongs.
Grandmaster / Clock Priority 2 Status Indicates the Clock Priority 2 of Grandmaster (Top-level Master)
to which the target equipment belongs.
Grandmaster / Clock Quality Status Indicates the Clock Quality Class of Grandmaster (Top-level
Class Master) to which the target equipment belongs.
Grandmaster / Clock Quality Status Indicates the Clock Quality Accuracy of Grandmaster (Top-level
Accuracy Master) to which the target equipment belongs.
Clock Class Status Indicates the clock class of opposing node.
Clock ID Status Indicates the clock ID of opposing node.
PTP Source Status Status Indicates the selected (active) Master, when multiple Master
exist, to which the PTP-BC function synchronizes.
Current Status Status Indicates the current state of PTP logical ports.
Quality Level Status Indicates the quality level of the timing clock.

5.2.2.4 ETH Tab and List of Conditions
The ETH tabbed window displays the information of alarms and status detected from
GbE ports. Clicking the ETH tab adds another row of related tabs.
Figure 5-7 Current Status Window — ETH Tab

Table 5-2 List of Conditions for ETH
Indication Category Description Severity
Flow Control Status Indicates Flow Control status of the indicated port. ——
LACP Status Status Indicates the current status of Link Aggregation Control
——
Protocol.
LAG LLF Status Status Indicates a LINKDOWN caused by Link Loss

Forwarding. The Ethernet port that is set to the edge ——
mode is having a LINKDOWN state.
LAG Port Loop Detect Status Received LACP Frame has its own MAC Source
——
Address for its Source Address.
LAG Port Status Status Indicates the current status of LAG member ports; ACT
——
(Active) or SBY (Standby).
LLF Status Indicates the setting of Link Loss Forwarding. ——
LLF Message Timeout Status Loss of a conditional signaling in which the LLF control
signal should be received continuously from the ——
opposite radio equipment.
LLF OAM Received Status Indicates that the LINKDOWN control request caused
by Link Loss Forwarding is issued at Dot3ah and LLF
enabled LAN ports on the opposing site.
MDI/MDI-X Status Indicates MDI status of the indicated Ethernet port. ——
Remote Errored Frame Status Received a message that Errored Frame has been
——
detected at the opposing site.
Remote Errored Frame Status Received a message that Errored Frame Period has
——
Period been detected at the opposing site.
Remote Errored Frame Status Received a message that Errored Frame Seconds
——
Seconds Summary Summary has been detected at the opposing site.
Remote Errored Frame Status Received a message that Errored Symbol Period has
——
Symbol Period been detected at the opposing site.
SFP Port Type Status Indicates an SFP Port type, optic or electric. ——
Speed & Duplex Status Indicates a specified LAN Port Setting on speed rate
——
and duplex mode.
ALS Status ALS has suspended the optical output at the indicated
GbE/10GbE Port.

5.2.3 Save the Displayed Information
Procedure 5-2
1. Click the Save button. File Download option window appears.
Save tool button
2. Click the Save button:

Figure 5-8 Save File Option Window
Save As option window appears.

3. Specify the directory to save the information, then click the Save button:
Figure 5-9 Save As Option Window
 A file name is specified by default using the name of information type and saving
date, e.g., an example above shows that the Active Alarm data is saved on
October 8th, 2010 at 12:59:34 pm. [ActiveAlarm_YYYYMMDDhhmmss.csv,
where YYYY indicates the year using four digits, MM indicates the month, DD
indicates the day, hh indicates the hour, mm indicates the minute, and ss
indicates the second.]
4. When the process is completed, the Download complete window appears.

Click the Close button of the window.
Figure 5-10 Download completed Window
5. Check the specified directory for the data if they are properly saved.

5.3 Alarm Lights

If an alarm is detected, its SYSTEM LED on the equipment bottom indicates the
condition as well. A faulty part can be located by viewing the current alarm status on
the WebLCT.
SYSTEM LED lights up if an alarm is generated, and goes off when the condition is
cleared. Following show the locations of LEDs:
5.3.1 iPASOLINK EX/A Controls and Indicators
5.3.1.1 iPASOLINK EX/A
Figure 5-11 iPASOLINK EX/E Bottom View
SYSTEM LED

5.4 Trouble Shooting Flow
5.4.1 BB Section
START
Connect WebLCT, and view Current Status.
Are
NO
Status of other lines
Normal?
YES
Check associated DTE at local site.
Is
NO
Status of equipment
Normal?
YES
Are Status of NO
Module and Module-BB
Normal?
Execute L2 Loopback. Replace equipment.

[See 4.3.1 L2 Loopback Control]
Is Status of RDI NO
Normal?
Check opposing site equipment.

Are Status
of LOF, Frame ID, NO
Is Status of RF NO
High BER, Low BER
and Early Warning Normal?
Normal? YES
YES Check RF Section.
Replace equipment.
Are Status
NO
of LinkDown, LOS A
Normal?
YES
Check associated DTE and cable Check DTE and cable connetions.
connections on opposing site.

5.4.2 RX Section
Is
NO
Status of RX Level
Normal?
YES
Does
RX Level measured NO
by RLS Monitor vary at
random interval?
YES
Are
frequency values at NO
local and opposing sites
appropriate?
YES
Check the fading and/or Check antenna system Adjust the frequency to
Check TX Section. the interfaces. and/or replace equipment the appropriate value.

5.4.3 TX Section
Is
NO
Status of TX Power
Normal?
YES
Does
Reset RF CPU. TX Power change by NO
ATPC manual conttrol?
YES
Are
NO
Status of RF conditions
Normal?
YES
Replace equipment. Check and adjust the

Replace equipment.
temperature. If TX Power
alarm is not removed,
END replace iPASOLINK EX/A.

5.5 Trouble Clearing
5.5.1 Overview
Following are procedures to recover the equipment if it is in failure. Failed conditions

are issued to LED on the equipment and to the status information on WebLCT. Refer
to 5.1 Equipment Conditions, 5.2 View Current Status and 5.3 Alarm Lights
for the indications.
5.5.2 Making Contact with NEC
For the technical assistance or information, contact your project contractor, or an

NEC supporting office.
5.5.3 Objects and Their Condition Types
Descriptions and procedures for the trouble clearing are organized in the alphabetic
order of indication messages. Alarm indication messages and their procedures to
clear the conditions are provided as the following:
Table 5-3 iPASOLINK EX/A Condition Types (1 of 4)
INDICATION Severity Object Procedure
ALS —— ETH (Indicating the condition only.)
AMBR Range Mismatch MJ MODEM on Page 5-22
ATPC Power Mode —— MODEM (Indicating the condition only.)
CLK Drift MN Equipment on Page 5-22
CLK FAIL MN Equipment on Page 5-23
CLK Status Changed —— Equipment (Indicating the condition only.)
Clock Class —— Equipment (Indicating the condition only.)
Clock ID —— Equipment (Indicating the condition only.)
Compression Setting Mismatch MJ MODEM on Page 5-24
Critical Event —— Equipment (Indicating the condition only.)
Current Status —— Equipment (Indicating the condition only.)
Dying Gasp —— Equipment (Indicating the condition only.)
Early Warning WR MODEM on Page 5-25

Equipment Start-up Status —— Equipment (Indicating the condition only.)
ETH LF MJ ETH on Page 5-25
ETH LOS MJ ETH on Page 5-26
ETH RF MJ ETH on Page 5-26
ETH TF MJ ETH (Indicating the condition only.)
ETH-OAM LOC MJ ETH on Page 5-27
ETH-OAM Mismerge MN ETH on Page 5-28
ETH-OAM RDI MJ ETH on Page 5-29
ETH-OAM Unexpected MEP MN ETH on Page 5-29
ETH-Ring Cause —— ETH (Indicating the condition only.)
ETH-Ring Multi RPL Owner Detect —— ETH (Indicating the condition only.)
ETH-Ring Port0 Loop Detect —— ETH (Indicating the condition only.)
ETH-Ring Port0 R-APS Timeout —— ETH (Indicating the condition only.)
ETH-Ring Port0 Status —— ETH (Indicating the condition only.)
ETH-Ring Port1 Loop Detect —— ETH (Indicating the condition only.)
ETH-Ring Port1 R-APS Timeout —— ETH (Indicating the condition only.)
ETH-Ring Port1 Status —— ETH (Indicating the condition only.)
ETH-Ring Status —— ETH (Indicating the condition only.)
FDB Full —— ETH (Indicating the condition only.)
Flow Control —— ETH (Indicating the condition only.)
Frame ID MJ MODEM on Page 5-31
Grandmaster / Clock ID —— Equipment (Indicating the condition only.)
Grandmaster / Clock Priority 1 —— Equipment (Indicating the condition only.)
Grandmaster / Clock Priority 2 —— Equipment (Indicating the condition only.)
Grandmaster / Clock Quality Equipment (Indicating the condition only.)

——
Accuracy
Grandmaster / Clock Quality Equipment (Indicating the condition only.)

——
Class
Grandmaster / Port ID —— Equipment (Indicating the condition only.)
High BER MJ MODEM (Indicating the condition only.)
LACP Status —— ETH (Indicating the condition only.)

LAG Link MJ ETH (Indicating the condition only.)
LAG LLF Status —— ETH (Indicating the condition only.)
LAG Port Loop Detect —— ETH (Indicating the condition only.)
LAG Port Status —— ETH (Indicating the condition only.)
LAN Link MJ ETH on Page 5-34
License Mismatch MJ MODEM on Page 5-35
Link OAM Down MJ ETH on Page 5-35
LLF —— ETH (Indicating the condition only.)
LLF Message Timeout —— ETH (Indicating the condition only.)
LLF OAM Received —— ETH (Indicating the condition only.)
LOF MJ MODEM on Page 5-36
Loss Announce MJ Equipment on Page 5-37
Low BER MN MODEM on Page 5-37
LTI MJ Equipment on Page 5-38
Maintenance —— Equipment (Indicating the condition only.)
MDI/MDI-X —— ETH (Indicating the condition only.)
Module MODEM on Page 5-38

MJ RF
BB
Module – BB MJ Equipment on Page 5-38
Mute Status —— MODEM (Indicating the condition only.)
Own Clock ID —— Equipment (Indicating the condition only.)
Port ID —— Equipment (Indicating the condition only.)
PTP Clock Quality Level —— Equipment (Indicating the condition only.)
PTP Mode Setting Mismatch MJ MODEM on Page 5-39
PTP Radio Clock Status —— MODEM (Indicating the condition only.)
PTP Source Status —— MODEM (Indicating the condition only.)
PTP Sync. Time —— MODEM (Indicating the condition only.)
Quality Level —— Equipment (Indicating the condition only.)
RDI WR MODEM on Page 5-40
Remote Critical Event MJ ETH on Page 5-41

Remote Dying Gasp MJ ETH on Page 5-41
Remote Errored Frame —— ETH (Indicating the condition only.)
Remote Errored Frame Period —— ETH (Indicating the condition only.)
Remote Errored Frame Seconds ETH (Indicating the condition only.)

——
Summary
Remote Errored Symbol Period —— ETH (Indicating the condition only.)
Remote Link Fault MJ ETH on Page 5-42
RX Level MJ MODEM on Page 5-42
RX Modulation —— MODEM (Indicating the condition only.)
SFP Port Type —— ETH (Indicating the condition only.)
SFP Removed MJ ETH on Page 5-43
SFP Type Mismatch MJ ETH on Page 5-44
Speed & Duplex —— ETH (Indicating the condition only.)
SSM FAIL MN Equipment on Page 5-44
Temperature MJ Equipment on Page 5-45
Total FDB Full —— ETH (Indicating the condition only.)
Trap Suppression Status —— Equipment (Indicating the condition only.)
TX Modulation —— MODEM (Indicating the condition only.)
TX Power MJ MODEM on Page 5-46
UAE WR MODEM on Page 5-46

5.5.4 Clearing Procedures
ALS
ETH
This condition is not an alarm. The message indicates that the ALS function has
suspended optical outputs at indicated GbE/10GbE optical port.
AMBR Range Mismatch
MODEM
This condition indicates that the range of RX AMBR Modulation and that of TX
AMBR Modulation do not match.
Procedure 5-1
1. Check and adjust the ranges of RX AMBR Modulation and TX AMBR

Modulation.
2. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the AMBR Range Mismatch alarm is
cleared. If the alarm is not cleared, contact NEC for the further maintenance
support.
ATPC Power Mode
MODEM
This condition is not an alarm. The message indicates that a failure of APTC control
signal (for 90 seconds), or a status of MAX Power (for 90 seconds) has been
detected.
CLK Drift
Equipment
This condition indicates that the reference clock frequency of the incoming signal of
the indicates facility is out of synchronized range. The problem of this condition
pertains to the far-end NE.

Procedure 5-2
1. Check if any alarm(s) occur(s) to the equipment in the other site, and clear it/
them.
2. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the CLK Drift alarm is cleared.
3. Is the CLK Drift alarm cleared?

 YES: This step ends the procedure.
 NO: Go to Step 4.
4. Check if any alarm(s) issued to the indicated port/line is/are cleared.
5. Is any alarm reported to the indicated port/line?

 YES: Clear it/them, then go to Step.
 NO: Contact NEC for the further maintenance support.
6. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the CLK Drift alarm is cleared. If the
alarm is not cleared, contact NEC for the further maintenance support.
CLK FAIL
Equipment
This condition indicates that the reference clock source failure is detected from the
incoming signal of the indicated facility. The problem of this condition pertains to the
optical fiber cable or electrical cable of the far-end NE.
Procedure 5-3
1. Check if any other alarm(s) is/are detected from/for the indicated facility or from
the other site.
2. Clear the alarm(s).
3. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the CLK Fail alarm is cleared. If the
CLK Status Changed
Equipment
This condition is not an alarm.The message indicates that a change has been made to
Reference Clock:

Clock Class
Equipment
This condition is not an alarm. The message indicates the clock class that the
opposing node uses.
Clock ID
Equipment
This condition is not an alarm. The message indicates the Clock ID that the opposing
node uses.
Compression Setting Mismatch
MODEM
This condition indicates that the Header Compression settings at two opposed sites
do not match, or an improper FPGA version that does not support the Header
Compression is set to enable these functions.
Procedure 5-4
1. Launch WebLCT.
2. Check and match the settings of VLAN Mode, Header Compression Mode, and
Payload Compression of alarmed MODEM and its opposed MODEM:
◆ WebLCT Menu Path:

Provisioning ➜ MODEM Function Setting
➜ MODEM Port Setting
3. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the Compression Setting Mismatch
alarm is cleared.
4. Is Compression Setting Mismatch alarm cleared?
5. Check the FPGA Version of alarmed MODEM. If the improper FPGA is found,
fix it.
6. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the Compression Setting Mismatch
alarm is cleared. If the alarm is not cleared, contact NEC for the further
maintenance support.

Current Status
Equipment
This condition is not an alarm. The message indicates the current state of PTP logical
ports.
Early Warning
MODEM
This condition indicates that the system detects degradation of radio signals. (Early
Warning threshold detection.)
Procedure 5-5
1. Launch the WebLCT.
2. Display the Current Metering to check RX Level.

 If the value is appropriate, replace the equipment.
 If the value is inappropriate, proceed with the flowchart: 5.4 Trouble
Shooting Flow.
Equipment Start-up Status
Equipment
This condition is not an alarm. The system reports that the equipment starts up, and
the cause to start up or reboot.
ETH LF
ETH
This condition indicates that the 10G Ethernet Port on the local NE fails.
Procedure 5-6
1. Check that the Ethernet Cable connected to the target port is appropriately
connected.
2. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the ETH LF alarm is cleared.
3. Is ETH LF alarm cleared?

 NO: Replace the cable, then proceed to the next step.

4. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the ETH LF alarm is cleared.
 NO: Check the associated port of the opposing site as well, then proceed to
the next step.
5. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the ETH LF alarm is cleared. If the
ETH LOS
ETH
This condition indicates that the LOS (Loss of Signal) is detected from the incoming
signal on the indicated Ethernet facility. The problem of this condition pertains to the
optical fiber or to the far-end NE.
Procedure 5-7
1. Verify that the cable connections are all appropriate.
2. Check if any alarm(s) is/are issued to the far-end NE. If any exist(s), clear it/
them.
3. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the ETH LOS alarm is cleared. If the
ETH RF
ETH
This condition indicates that the 10G Ethernet Port on the remote NE fails.
Procedure 5-8
1. Check that the Ethernet Cables connected to the target port and its associated port
of both local NE and its opposing NE are appropriately connected.
2. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the ETH RF alarm is cleared.
3. Is ETH LF alarm cleared?

 NO: Replace the cables, then proceed to the next step.

4. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the ETH RF alarm is cleared. If the
ETH TF
ETH
This condition indicates that a failure is detected in an installed SFP module. The
problem of this condition is likely to be caused by a defective SFP module.
Procedure 5-9
1. Replace the target SFP module.
2. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the ETH TF alarm is cleared. If the
ETH-OAM LOC
BB
This condition indicates that the LOC (Loss of Connectivity) is detected from the
indicated MEP. The problem of this condition pertains to the far-end NE or the MEG/
MEP Configuration Error in the WebLCT.
Procedure 5-10
1. Check if any alarm occurs to the far-end NE that is associated with the indicated
MEP, and clear the condition(s).
2. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the ETH-OAM LOC alarm is cleared.
3. Is the ETH-OAM LOC alarm cleared?

 NO: Check the MEG/MEP Configuration in the WebLCT, and go to Step 4.
4. Is the MEG/MEP Configuration appropriate?

 YES: Go to Step 6..
 NO: Correct the configuration, and go to Step 5.

5. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the ETH-OAM LOC alarm is cleared.
6. Check the MEG/MEP Configuration on the far-end site.

7. Is MEG/MEP Configuration on the far-end site appropriate?
 YES: Contact NEC.
 NO: Correct them, and go to Step 8.
8. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the ETH-OAM LOC alarm is cleared. If
the alarm is not cleared, contact NEC for the further maintenance support.
ETH-OAM Mismerge
BB
This condition indicates that the received ETH-CC Frame matches to the MEP level,
but with an incorrect maintenance ID. This may be caused by receiving the
unexpected ETH-CC Frames from the far-end NE, or by the MEG/MEP
Configuration error in WebLCT.
Procedure 5-11
1. Check the MEG/MEP Configuration, and correct it if it has any error.
2. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the ETH-OAM Mismerge alarm is
cleared.
3. Is the ETH-OAM Mismerge alarm cleared?
 NO: Check the MEG/MEP Configuration of the far-end NE, and then go to
Step 4.
4. Is MEG/MEP Configuration on the far-end site appropriate?
 NO: Correct them, and go to Step 5.
5. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the ETH-OAM Mismerge alarm is
support.

ETH-OAM RDI
BB
This condition indicates that the RDI (Remote Defect Indication) is detected from the
received ETH-CC Frame on the indicated MEP. The problem of this condition
pertains to alarms (failure) at the peer MEP.
Procedure 5-12
1. Check if any alarm is issued to an MEG of a peer MEP that is associated with the
indicated MEP.
2. Is there any alarm occurring?
 NO: Clear it/them, and go to Step 3.
3. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the ETH-OAM RDI alarm is cleared. If
ETH-OAM Unexpected MEP
BB
This condition indicates that a mismatch of ETH-CC transmit period is detected from
the indicated MEG. The problem is a mismatch between the MEG Configuration of
local NE and that of far-end NE in WebLCT.
Procedure 5-13
1. Check the MEG Configuration, and correct it if it has any error.
2. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the ETH-OAM Unexpected MEP
alarm is cleared.
3. Is the ETH-OAM Unexpected MEP alarm cleared?
 NO: Check the MEG Configuration of the far-end NE, and go to Step 4.
4. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the ETH-OAM Unexpected MEP

ETH-Ring Cause
ETH
This condition is not an alarm. The message indicates the ETH-Ring State changes.
ETH-Ring Multi RPL Owner Detect
ETH
This condition is not an alarm. The message indicates that system detects the multiple
settings of ETH-Ring RPL.
ETH-Ring Port0 Loop Detect
ETH
This condition is not an alarm. The message indicates that system detects loops in the
indicated ETH-Ring traffic.
ETH-Ring Port0 R-APS Timeout
ETH
This condition is not an alarm. The message indicates that the time out for receiving
R-APS message occurs at the node that configures ETH-Ring where there are no
locked-out ports.
ETH-Ring Port0 Status
ETH
This condition is not an alarm. The message indicates the state changes of the port
that configures the ETH-Ring.
ETH-Ring Port1 Loop Detect
ETH
This condition is not an alarm. The message indicates that system detects loops in the
indicated ETH-Ring traffic.

ETH-Ring Port1 R-APS Timeout
ETH
This condition is not an alarm. The message indicates that the time out for receiving
R-APS message occurs at the node that configures ETH-Ring where there are no
locked-out ports.
ETH-Ring Port1 Status
ETH
This condition is not an alarm. The message indicates the state changes of the port
that configures the ETH-Ring.
ETH-Ring Status
ETH
This condition is not an alarm. The message indicates the state of the ETH-Ring.
FDB Full
BB
This condition is not an alarm. The message indicates that the FDB of the specified
VLAN is full.
Flow Control
ETH
This condition is not an alarm. The message indicates the status of indicates Ethernet
port regarding its flow control.
Frame ID
MODEM
This condition indicates that the Frame ID (route differentiation ID) and its expected
value do not match.

Procedure 5-14
1. Check if the Frame ID value specified at local and that specified at the opposing
site are identical.
2. If the specified Frame ID values are the same, replace the equipment.
Grandmaster / Clock ID
Equipment
This condition is not an alarm. The message indicates the PTP Clock of the
equipment.
Grandmaster / Clock Priority 1
Equipment
This condition is not an alarm. The message indicates the Clock Priority 1 of
Grandmaster (Top-level Master) to which the target equipment belongs.
Grandmaster / Clock Priority 2
Equipment
This condition is not an alarm. The message indicates the Clock Priority 2 of
Grandmaster / Clock Quality Accuracy
Equipment
This condition is not an alarm. The message indicates the Clock Quality Accuracy of
Grandmaster / Clock Quality Class
Equipment
This condition is not an alarm. The message indicates the Clock Quality Class of

Grandmaster / Port ID
Equipment
This condition is not an alarm. The message indicates the Port ID of the opposing
equipment that is connected with the Grandmaster (Top-level Master) to which the
target equipment belongs.
High BER
MODEM
This condition indicates that the radio signals are significantly degraded, where the
threshold is IE-4 (default value).
Procedure 5-15

Shooting Flow.
LACP Status
ETH
This condition is not an alarm. The message indicates the current status of LACP
(Link Aggregation Control Protocol).
LAG LINK
BB
This condition indicates that all the member ports of Ethernet LAG (Link
Aggregation Group) have failed. The problem of this condition pertains to the optical
fiber cables or to the far-end NE.
Procedure 5-16
1. Check if any alarm(s) occur(s) in the opposing site, and clear it/them if exist(s).

2. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the LAG LINK alarm is cleared. If the
LAG LLF Status
BB
This condition is not an alarm. The message indicates the settings of Link
Aggregation Group - Link Loss Forwarding.
LAG Port Loop Detect
ETH
This condition is not an alarm. The message indicates that the received LACP Frame
has its own MAC Source Address for its Source Address.
LAG Port Status
ETH
This condition is not an alarm. The message indicates the Active/Standby status of
LAG member ports.
LAN Link
ETH
This condition indicates that the Link-Down is detected from the indicated Ethernet
port. The problem of this condition pertains to the optical fiber cables or to the far-
end NE.
Procedure 5-17
1. Check the connections of optical fiber cables.
 Connect optical fiber cables properly.
 Replace optical fiber cables if required.
2. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the LAN LINK alarm is cleared.
3. Is the alarm cleared?


4. Check if any alarm(s) occur(s) to the far-end NE, and clear it/them if any exist(s).
5. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the LAN LINK alarm is cleared. If the
License Mismatch
BB
This condition indicates that registration(s) of unlicensed setting(s) is/are detected.

This alarm may be issued if the system is downgraded by an inappropriate use of
license, etc., leaving the settings registered under the previous (higher graded)
license. To recover from this status, all the provisioning data should be removed.
Procedure 5-18
1. Launch WebLCT to display the Shipment window.
◆ WebLCT Menu Path:
Equipment Utility ➜ Shipment
2. Remove the provisioning data. Refer to 4.9.6 Restore Factory Default Settings.

 NO: Contact NEC.
Link OAM Down
ETH
This condition indicates that the system detects Link OAM Keepalive Protocol
Timeout. The problem of this condition pertains to Ethernet Link, configuration of
Link OAM, hardware error, etc., of the far-end NE.
Procedure 5-19
1. Check if any error occurs to Link OAM Configuration, or to the equipment at the
opposing site, and clear them.
2. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the Link OAM Down alarm is cleared.
If the alarm is not cleared, contact NEC for the further maintenance support.

LLF
ETH
This condition is not an alarm. The message indicates the status of Link Loss
Forwarding.
LLF Message Timeout
ETH
This condition is not an alarm. The message indicates that the conditional signals for
LLF control have repeatedly been received from the opposing radio equipment.
LLF OAM Received
ETH
This condition is not an alarm. The message indicates that the LINKDOWN Control
request caused by the Link Loss Forwarding is issued at Dot3ah and LLF enabled
LAN ports on the opposing site.
LOF
MODEM
This message indicates that the Loss of Frame is detected at the Radio side.
Procedure 5-20
1. Launch the WebLCT, and display the Current Metering to check RX Level:
 If the value is appropriate, go to Step 4.
Shooting Flow.
2. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the LOF alarm is cleared.

4. Replace the equipment.
5. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the LOF alarm is cleared. If the alarm
is not cleared, contact NEC for the further maintenance support.

Loss Announce
Equipment
This condition indicates that the PTP Announce Packets from the Master are not
received.
Procedure 5-21
1. Check the followings:
 Cable connections to/from the Master are appropriate.
 Ethernet Port Settings if it is enabled or disabled.
 Settings of PTP LIF (selections of physical port, VLAN, Message Rate).
 VLAN Settings (VID value)
 Settings of PTP-BC function (Profile, Transport Mode, Multicast Type,
and/or Domain No.) are identical with those of the Master.
2. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the Loss Announce alarm is cleared.
Low BER
MODEM
This condition indicates that the radio signals are slightly degraded, where the
threshold is 1E-7 (default value).
Procedure 5-22

Shooting Flow.

LTI
Equipment
This condition indicates that the system detects LTI (Loss of Timing Inputs) where
the equipment does not synchronize with any reference sources. The problem of this
condition pertains to the optical fiber cables, electrical cables, or to the far-end NE.
Procedure 5-23
1. Check if any alarm regarding the reference clock occur. If any exist(s), clear it/
them.
2. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the LTI alarm is cleared. If the alarm is
not cleared, contact NEC for the further maintenance support.
Maintenance
Equipment
This condition is not an alarm. When the Maintenance indicates On, the system is
set into the Maintenance mode.
MDI/MDI-X
ETH
This condition is not an alarm. The message shows the operating type (MDI or MDI-
X) of the indicated Ethernet port currently running.
Module
MODEM
BB
RF
This condition indicates that the system detects the hardware error of the indicated
object.
Procedure 5-24
1. Replace the object.
2. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the Module alarm is cleared. If the

Module-BB
Equipment
This condition indicates that the system detects the equipment failure in the BB
section. If this alarm occurs, contact NEC for the further maintenance support.
Mute Status
RF
This condition is not an alarm. The message indicates if the RF TX Power Output is
set to Mute or not.
Own Clock ID
Equipment
This condition is not an alarm. The message shows the PTP Clock of the equipment.
PTP Clock Quality Level
Equipment
This condition is not an alarm. The message indicates the level of PTP Clock Quality.
PTP Mode Setting Mismatch
MODEM
This condition indicates that the settings of PTP Mode at two opposing NEs do no
match.
Procedure 5-25
1. Check the settings of following:
 .Check and adjust the PTP Mode settings of both local NE and its opposing
NE.
 Check and adjust the Equipment Clock settings of both local NE and its
opposing NE
2. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the PTP Mode Setting Mismatch

PTP Radio Clock Status
Equipment
This condition is not an alarm. The message indicates the state of PTP Radio Clock.
PTP Source Status
Equipment
This condition is not an alarm. The message indicates the selected Master to which
the PTP-BC function synchronizes.
PTP Sync. Time
Equipment
This condition is not an alarm. The message indicates the time when synchronizing
with Master using the PTP function. The indicated time does not show the date or
time of Management.
Quality Level
Equipment
This condition is not an alarm. The message indicates the quality level of the Timing
Clock.
RDI
MODEM
This condition indicates that RDI (Remote Defect Indication) signal is detected.
Procedure 5-26
1. Check if any alarm(s) occur(s) in the far-end NE. If any exist(s), correct it/them.
2. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the RDI alarm is cleared. If the alarm is
not cleared, contact NEC for the further maintenance support.

Remote Critical Event
ETH
This condition indicates that the hardware error is detected at the opposing site
equipment, which is reported via the Ethernet link. This is an alarm regarding
IEEE802.3ah, Link OAM.
Procedure 5-27
1. Replace the equipment at the opposing site.
2. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the Remote Critical Event alarm is
support.
Remote Dying Gasp
ETH
This condition indicates that the equipment on the opposing site is in the reboot
process. This is an alarm regarding the IEEE802.3ah, Link OAM.
Procedure 5-28
1. Check if any failures occur to the equipment on the opposing site, and if any
exist, clear them.
2. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the Remote Dying Gasp alarm is
support.
Remote Errored Frame
ETH
This condition is not an alarm. The system detects that an Errored Frame message is
issued at the opposing site.
Remote Errored Frame Period
ETH
This condition is not an alarm. The system detects that an Errored Frame Period
message is issued at the opposing site.

5-42/END CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE
Remote Errored Frame Seconds Summary
ETH
This condition is not an alarm. The system detects that an Errored Frame Seconds
Summary message is issued at the opposing site.
Remote Errored Frame Symbol Period
ETH
This condition is not an alarm. The system detects that an Errored Symbol Period
message is issued at the opposing site.
Remote Link Fault
ETH
This condition indicates that Ethernet link failure at the opposing site is detected via
the incoming port. This is an alarm regarding IEEE802.3ah, Link OAM.
Procedure 5-29
1. Check if any alarms occur to the equipment or cable connections at n the
opposing site, and if any exist, clear them.
2. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the Remote Link Fault alarm is
support.
RX Level
RF
This condition indicates that the receiving level is lower than the threshold level
(between –72 to –94 dBm according to the modulation system and bit rates).
Procedure 5-30
Refer to 5.4 Trouble Shooting Flow for the procedure.

RX Modulation
MODEM
This condition is not an alarm. The message informs that the modulation system at
the receiving side has been changed.
SFP Port Type
ETH
This condition is not an alarm. The message indicates if the SFP Port is optical or
electrical.
SFP Removed
ETH
This condition indicates that the system cannot detect the SFP Module on the
indicated port. This condition is caused if the SFP is not properly plugged in, is not
mounted, or is defective.
Procedure 5-31
1. Check if the SFP on the indicated port is properly and securely plugged in.
 If the indicated port is vacant, mount an SFP Module onto the appropriate
port.
 If an SPF module is mounted on the indicated port, dismount and remount it
to ensure the mounted condition.
2. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the SFP Removed alarm is cleared.

 NO: Replace the SFP module.
4. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the SFP Removed alarm is cleared. If

SFP Type Mismatch
ETH
This condition indicates that the provided SFP Port type and the mounted SFP
Module do not match.
Procedure 5-32
1. Launch WebLCT, and display the Inventory window to check the port
configuration. Correct the setting(s) if any inappropriate setting is found.
2. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the SFP Type Mismatch alarm is
cleared.
3. Is the SFP Type Mismatch alarm cleared?
4. Check if the mounted SFP Module is the correct type for the port.
5. Is the type of SFP Module appropriate?

 NO: Replace SFP Module, and go to Step 6.
6. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the SFP Type Mismatch alarm is
support.
Speed & Duplex
ETH
This condition is not an alarm. The message indicates that the current status of speed
and duplex mode of the indicated port.
SSM Fail
Equipment
This condition indicates that the received Sync Status Message is in the unstable
condition. The problem of this condition pertains to the input cable or to the external
timing source.

Temperature
Equipment
This condition indicates that the temperature within equipment exceeds the
operational limitation.
Procedure 5-33
1. Check the room temperature, and adjust it.
2. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the Temperature alarm is cleared.
NOTE: Wait at least for an hour in the adjusted air before checking the
Current Status.
Total FDB Full
BB
This condition is not an alarm. The message informs that the Dynamic Entry in L2
Switch has reached the maximum number.
Trap Suppression Status
MODEM
This condition is not an alarm. The message indicates the state of Trap Suppression
function.
TX Modulation
MODEM
This condition is not an alarm. The message informs that the modulation system of
MODEM at the transmitting side has been changed.

TX Power
RF
This condition indicates that the transmitting power level of RF is lower than 3 dB.
Procedure 5-34
Refer to 5.4 Trouble Shooting Flow for the procedure(s).
UAE
MODEM
This condition indicates that the Unavailable Second Event is detected.
Procedure 5-35
1. Check the Current Alarms, and if any other alarms occur(s), clear it/them.
2. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the UAE alarm is cleared. If the alarm
is not cleared, contact NEC for the further maintenance support.

GGS-000549-01E
June 2016
iPASOLINK EX
Advanced
SPECIFICATION
NEC Corporation
GGS-000549-01E
GGS-000549-01E
Printed in Japan
CONTENTS –i–
SPECIFICATION
CONTENTS
1. INTERFACES 1-1
1.1 Locations of Terminals and LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
2. SPECIFICATION 2-1
2.1 Interface Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

2.1.1 Ethernet Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.1.2 Other Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.2 Supported Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2.2.1 Radio Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2.2.2 Management Plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2.2.3 ETH Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2.2.4 Synchronization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2.2.5 Performance Monitor and Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2.3 Traffic Interface Specifications and Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
2.3.1 1000BASE-X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
2.3.2 10GBASE-R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
3. SYSTEM PERFORMANCES 3-1
3.1 Power Consumption and Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

3.2 Environmental Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3.2.1 Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3.2.2 Humidity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3.3 Power Line Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3.3.1 DC IN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3.3.2 PoE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3.4 Others. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
iPASOLINK EX Advanced: SPECIFICATION GGS-000549-01E

June 2016
– ii/END – CONTENTS
GGS-000549-01E iPASOLINK EX Advanced: SPECIFICATION

INTERFACES 1-1
1. INTERFACES
1.1 Locations of Terminals and LEDs
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
9 8
No. INDICATION PURPOSE
➀ Grounding Terminal (dia. 5 mm)
➁ DC –48V Power Supply (SELV). Port.
➂ DCN (PoE) GbE; Power Supply by PoE (RJ-45); WebLCT or NMS Connecting Port
➃ P2 SFP+ Port (GbE/10GbE Optic)
➄ P3 SFP+ Port (GbE/10GbE Optic)
➅ RSL Monitoring Port for the Received Signal Levels
➆ SYSTEM LED LED to indicate the system status using the colors of green or red
—— Off Equipment is powered off
Green Blinking Equipment is in the starting-up process
On Equipment is in the normal state
Red On Equipment is in the alarmed state
➇ ACCESS LED LED to indicate the Accessing Status
Green Blinking Data downloading/uploading is in progress
➈ MEM USB Memory Port

1-2/END INTERFACES

SPECIFICATION 2-1
2. SPECIFICATION
2.1 Interface Capacity
iPASOLINK EX Advanced (hereinafter iPASOLINK EX/A) supports following

interfaces conforming to the IEEE Standards:
2.1.1 Ethernet Interfaces

Interface Specification Connector Description
10GBASE-SR/LR 10 Gbit/s LC (SFP+ Module) 2 ports of Traffic Interfaces

1000BASE-SX/LX 1000 Mbit/s LC (SFP Module)
1000BASE-T 1000 Mbit/s RJ-45 1 port for use of:

100BASE-TX 100 Mbit/s  User Traffic or
 WebLCT/NMS Connection
10BASE-T 10 Mbit/s
2.1.2 Other Interfaces

Interface Connector Description
RSL Interface 4mm Banana Plug Socket 1 port of monitoring Received Signal Levels
USB Interface USB Type-A 1 port of memory storage

2-2 SPECIFICATION
2.2 Supported Functions
iPASOLINK EX/A supports the following functions:
2.2.1 Radio Functions

Functions Supported Items
TX Power (Maximum) +18.0 dBm ±3 dB; 71-76 GHz, 81-86 GHz band
Configuration 1+0
Channel Separation 62.5 MHz, 125 MHz, 250 MHz, 500 MHz, 750 MHz, 1000 MHz, 2000 MHz
Modulation AMBR CS: 62.5 to 125 MHz QPSK, 8PSK, 16QAM, 32QAM, 64QAM, 128QAM,
256QAM
CS: 250 to 1000 MHz QPSK (1/4 BW), QPSK (1/2 BW), QPSK, 8PSK, 16QAM,
32QAM, 64QAM, 128QAM, 256QAM
CS: 2000 MHz QPSK (1/4 BW), QPSK (1/2 BW), QPSK, 8PSK, 16QAM,
32QAM, 64QAM, 128QAM
Reference CS: 62.5 to 250 MHz QPSK, 8PSK, 16QAM, 32QAM, 64QAM, 128QAM,
Modulation 256QAM
CS: 500 to 750 MHz QPSK, 8PSK, 16QAM, 32QAM, 64QAM
CS: 1000 MHz QPSK, 8PSK, 16QAM
CS: 2000 MHz QPSK, 8PSK
2.2.2 Management Plane

Inband Management VLAN Inband Interface Up to 16 per Equipment
Software Bridge Software Bridge ID Up to 20 per Equipment
User Account User Account Up to 100 per Equipment
ARP ARP Cache Up to 1024 per Equipment
Static ARP Up to 256 per Equipment
Routing Static Route Up to 128 per Equipment
NTP NTP Server Up to 4 per Equipment
DHCP DHCP Server Up to 3 per Equipment
DHCP Server/Relay Up to 16 per Equipment
SNMP SNMP Community Up to 10 Equipment
SNMP Trap Destination Up to 3 per Equipment
RADIUS RADIUS Server Up to 3 per Equipment
Access Control List Input Filter Up to 50 per Equipment
Forwarding Filter Up to 50 per Equipment

SPECIFICATION 2-3
2.2.3 ETH Functions
VLAN VLAN ID Up to 4096 per Port
Up to 4096 per Equipment
C-Bridge Instance Up to 16 per Equipment
Customer Bridge (in C-

Up to 15 per C-Bridge Instance
Bridge Instance)
VLAN Swap Up to 256 per Equipment
FDB All Entries

Up to 32K per Equipment
(Dynamic + Static)
Static Entries Up to 256 per Equipment
Filter Ingress Filter Up to 64 per Equipment
Egress Filter Up to 32 per Equipment
Filter Rules (L2/L3) Up to 512 per Equipment
QoS (VLAN Based) VLAN Group Up to 4 per Equipment
VLAN Group Member Up to 4095 per VLAN Group
Priority Shaper Profile Up to 4 per Equipment
Mapping Table Up to 16 per Equipment
QoS (Port Based) Classification Profile Up to 32 per Equipment
Mapping Table Up to 16 per Equipment
Policer Policer Instance Up to 512 per Equipment
Policer Rate Profiler Up to 64 per Equipment
ETH OAM MEG Instances Up to 128 per Equipment
MEP Instances Up to 128 per Equipment
Peer MEP Up to 512 per Equipment
MIP Up to 32 per Equipment
Ethernet Ring Ring Index Up to 16 Instances
RSTP/MSTP MSTI Up to 4 Instances
Link Aggregation LAG Member Up to 8 per LAG
LAG Instance Up to 3 per Equipment

2-4 SPECIFICATION
2.2.4 Synchronization
Timing Source Timing Source Entry Up to 3 per Equipment
PTP PTP Logical Port Entry Up to 4 per Equipment
Unicast Master Entry Up to 5 per Equipment
2.2.5 Performance Monitor and Logs

Log History Log Command, Event, Alarm

Up to 8,000 items in total per system
PM 15-Min History 192 Instances
1-Day History 7 Instances
VLAN Counter Up to 256 per Equipment
MPLS Counter Up to 256 per Equipment
Proactive LM Counter Up to 16 per Equipment
Proactive DM Counter Up to 16 per Equipment

SPECIFICATION 2-5
2.3 Traffic Interface Specifications and Standards
2.3.1 1000BASE-X
ITEM SPECIFICATIONS
Application IEEE802.3 Full Duplex
1000BASE-SX 1000BASE-LX
Nominal Bit Rate 1250 Mbit/s
Coding Method 8B/10B
Transmitter at Reference Point S
Operating Wavelength Range 770 to 860 nm 1270 to 1355 nm
SMSR 0.85 dB (RMS) 4 dB (RMS)
Maximum Mean Launched Power 0 dBm –3 dBm
Minimum Mean Launched Power –9.5 dBm –11 dBm
Minimum Extinction Ratio (dB) 9 dB or more 9 dB or more
Receiver at Reference Point R
Maximum Mean Launched Power –17 dBm –19 dBm
Minimum Mean Launched Power –0 dBm –3 dBm
Others
Target Distance 550 m 5 km
Type of Fiber Cable MMF: GI Cable SMF: SI Cable

(Core/Clad dia.: 50/125 µm) (Core/Clad dia.: 9/125 µm)
Connector LC Connector using SFP

2-6/END SPECIFICATION
2.3.2 10GBASE-R
ITEM SPECIFICATIONS
Application IEEE802.3 Full Duplex
10GBASE-SR 10GBASE-LR
Nominal Bit Rate 10.3125 Gbit/s
Coding Method 64B/66B
Transmitter at Reference Point S
SMSR —— 30 dB
Maximum Mean Launched Power –2.8 dBm 0.5 dBm
Minimum Mean Launched Power –4.3 dBm –8.2 dBm
Minimum Extinction Ratio (dB) 3 dB 3.5 dB or more
Receiver at Reference Point R
Maximum Mean Launched Power –1 dBm –14.4 dBm
Minimum Mean Launched Power –9.9 dBm 0.5 dBm
Others
Target Distance 300 m 10 km
Type of Fiber Cable MMF: Core/Clad (dia. 50/125 µm) SMF: Core/Clad (dia. 9/125 µm)
Connector LC Connector using SFP+

SYSTEM PERFORMANCES 3-1
3. SYSTEM PERFORMANCES
3.1 Power Consumption and Size
Item DESCRIPTION
Power Consumption 65 W (typical)
Weight iPASOLINK EX/A only Approximately 3.5 kg
Antenna (dia. 0.3 m) + Mounting Bracket 7 kg (approximately)
Antenna (dia. 0.6 m) + Mounting Bracket 10 kg (approximately)
Dimensions (Width × Height × Depth) 230 mm × 230 mm × 65 mm

(Antenna and Mounting Bracket are note included)

3-2 SYSTEM PERFORMANCES
3.2 Environmental Conditions
3.2.1 Temperature
Condition Requirements
Operating (in windless condition) –33 to +45°C
(wind speed is 1 m/s) –33 to +50°C
Reference –33 to+40°C by ETSI EN 300 019-1-4

Class 4.1 in the EU market
Transportation –40 to +70°C (ETSI EN 300 019-1-2 Class 2.3)
Storage –25 to +55°C (ETSI EN 300 019-1-1 Class 1.2)
3.2.2 Humidity
Operating Up to 100% all-weather (IP66)
Transportation Up to 100%
Storage Up to 100%
3.3 Power Line Requirements
3.3.1 DC IN
Input Voltage Range –48.0 V DC (–40.5 to –57.0 V DC)

ETSI EN 300 132-2
Connector molex® Mega-Fit Connector [172064-0004]
3.3.2 PoE
Input Voltage Range 41.0 to 57.0 V DC

LTPoE++ Compliant
Connector RJ-45 Connector
GGS-000549-01E IPASOLINK EX ADVANCED: SPECIFICATION

SYSTEM PERFORMANCES 3-3
3.4 Others
Category Standards
EMC Conforms to ETSI EN 301 489-1, ETSI EN 301 489-4, Class B
Safety Conforms to EN 60950-1, IEC 60950-1, EN 60950-22, IEC 60950-22 UL 60950
Health Conforms to EN 62311
Spectrum Conforms to ETSI EN 302 217-2-2, ETSI EN 302 217-3

3-4/END SYSTEM PERFORMANCES

GGS-000552-01E
June 2016
iPASOLINK EX
Advanced
OPEN SOURCE SOFTWARE
SUMMARY
NEC Corporation
GGS-000552-01E
GGS-000552-01E
Printed in Japan
–i–
OPEN SOURCE SOFTWARE SUMMARY
iPASOLINK contains "Open Source Software" provided under its applicable license
terms.
 GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 2:

http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/gpl-2.0.txt
 GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 3:

http://www.gnu.org/licenses/gpl-3.0.txt
 GNU AFFERO GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE:

http://www.gnu.org/licenses/agpl-3.0.txt
 FreeBSD License:
http://www.freebsd.org/copyright/freebsd-license.html
 NET-SNMP License:
http://net-snmp.sourceforge.net/about/license.html
 Ruby License:
http://www.ruby-lang.org/en/LICENSE.txt
 Creative Commons - Attribution 2.5:

http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by/2.5
 The MIT License:

http://www.opensource.org/licenses/mit-license
 OpenBSD License:
http://www.openbsd.org/policy.html
iPASOLINK EX Advaced: OPEN SOURCE SOFTWARE SUMMARY GGS-000552-01E

June 2016
– ii/END –
GGS-000552-01E iPASOLINK EX Advaced: OPEN SOURCE SOFTWARE SUMMARY

Installation Provisioning Manual IPASOLINK EX Advanced Sept2016

Încărcat de

Informații document

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Installation Provisioning Manual IPASOLINK EX Advanced Sept2016

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

GGS-000543-01E

Following indications are used for admonishment:

Indicates an imminently hazardous

Indicates an imminently hazardous

Indicates a potentially hazardous

This system should be installed, powered on, operated

iPASOLINK EX Advanced: SAFETY INFORMATION GGS-000544-01E

Risk of Electric Shock

Hot Surface. Do Not Touch

Protective Earthing (Must Be Grounded)

GGS-000544-01E iPASOLINK EX Advanced: SAFETY INFORMATION

(1) Risk of Electric Shock

(1) iPASOLINK EX/A is designated to use the –48 V DC

(2) AC Power Module is designated to convert the 100-200

(2) Microwave Radiation

iPASOLINK EX Advanced: SAFETY INFORMATION GGS-000544-01E

(3) Class1/1M Laser Product

GGS-000544-01E iPASOLINK EX Advanced: SAFETY INFORMATION

(1) Lift with Care

(2) To Work in High Place

(3) Supply Safety Extra Low Voltage

iPASOLINK EX Advanced: SAFETY INFORMATION GGS-000544-01E

(4) Protect from Lightning

(5) Do Not Touch Power Plug While in Service

(6) Use Circuit Breaker

GGS-000544-01E iPASOLINK EX Advanced: SAFETY INFORMATION

(7) Using PoE

(8) Use STP Cable for LAN Connection

iPASOLINK EX Advanced: SAFETY INFORMATION GGS-000544-01E

(9) Do Not Use Cables Charged with Static Electricity

(10) Quit Operation in Case of Emergency

GGS-000544-01E iPASOLINK EX Advanced: SAFETY INFORMATION

(11) Do Not Disassemble

iPASOLINK EX Advanced: SAFETY INFORMATION GGS-000544-01E

NOTICE (PLACING EQUIPMENT)

2. iPASOLINK EX/A should be installed as follows:

3. Precautions for Cables:

(b) DATA TRANSMISSION CABLES

4. Transmission quality degradation may temporarily occur due to the

GGS-000544-01E iPASOLINK EX Advanced: SAFETY INFORMATION

NOTICE (POWER SUPPLY AND CIRCUIT BREAKER)

➀ Using DC IN (Power) Port ➁ Using AC Power Module

EXTERNAL CIRCUIT BREAKER EXTERNAL CIRCUIT BREAKER

➁ Using LAN (PoE) Port

Use STP (shielded twisted pair) cable.

iPASOLINK EX Advanced: SAFETY INFORMATION GGS-000544-01E

SAFETY GUIDELINE FOR USING HAZARDOUS MICROWAVE

See the following illustration and Calculation Examples 1 and 2:

Radiation Hazard Area

SAFETY DISTANCE: X m –90 to +90

GGS-000544-01E iPASOLINK EX Advanced: SAFETY INFORMATION

Safety distance should be calculated according to the conditions of installation site.

 Calculation Example 1 (Front Side of Antenna)

 Output Power Density : S = 0.982 mW/cm2  1 mW/cm2

Limit: Output Power Density S = 10 (W/m2) * = 1 (mW/cm2)

 Calculation Example 2 (Rear Side of Antenna)

 Output Power Density : S = 0.788 mW/cm2  1 mW/cm2

Limit: Output Power Density S = 10 (W/m2) * = 1 (mW/cm2)

iPASOLINK EX Advanced: SAFETY INFORMATION GGS-000544-01E

2.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

3. UNPACK iPASOLINK EX/A 3-1

4. MOUNT iPASOLINK EX/A 4-1

4.1 For Placing Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

iPASOLINK EX Advanced: INSTALLATION GGS-000546-01E